Sirona Orthophos XG3, XG5 Dental X-Ray - Service Manual

loqelmelp=ud=PaêÉ~Çó=L=`ÉéÜ
loqelmelp=udmäìë=ap=L=`ÉéÜ
loqelmelp=ud=R=EapF=L=`ÉéÜ
loqelmelp=ud=P=EapF
pÉêîáÅÉ=j~åì~ä
båÖäáëÜ
ORTHOPHOS XG 3Dready / XGPlus
Easypad
ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE
P1
Prog. S kV mA
T R
Multipad
sÉêëáçå=OSKM
About the Service Manual:
• This Service Manual is valid for the following unit versions:
– ORTHOPHOS XG 3Dready / Ceph
– ORTHOPHOS XGPlus DS / Ceph
– ORTHOPHOS XG 5 DS / Ceph
– ORTHOPHOS PlusDS/PlusDSCeph / PPE*
– ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / Ceph
– ORTHOPHOS XG 3
i NOTE
These system versions differ regarding the equipment offered by their user interfaces and their possi-
ble configuration levels (see page 1-4).
i NOTE
Board DX41 is no longer installed in units with hardware version BA or higher (as of November 2006).
In addition, you also require:

• Spare parts list: Order No. 59 38 423
– ORTHOPHOS XG 3Dready / Ceph, ORTHOPHOS XGPlus DS / Ceph,
ORTHOPHOS XG 5 (DS) / Ceph,
ORTHOPHOS XG 3 (DS)
• Wiring diagrams: Order No. 59 38 332

– ORTHOPHOS XGPlus DS / Ceph, ORTHOPHOS XG 5 (DS) / Ceph,
ORTHOPHOS XG 3 (DS): Bestell-Nr. 59 38 332
– ORTHOPHOS XG 3Dready / Ceph: Bestell-Nr. 63 03 494
• Installation Instructions
– ORTHOPHOS XGPlus DS / Ceph, ORTHOPHOS XG 3Dready / Ceph: Order No. 59 87 651
– ORTHOPHOS XG 5 (DS) / Ceph: Order No. 60 04 902
– ORTHOPHOS XG 3 (DS): Order No. 60 51 416
• Tools
– Screwdriver, medium sized
– Torx offset screwdrivers TX10, TX20, TX25
– Open-end wrench, 13 mm A/F
– Socket wrench, 13 mm A/F
– Side cutters
– Spirit level
• Auxiliary devices
– Digital multimeter, Accuracy Class 1
– Mult-O-Meter 512L
– Soldering tool for repairing cables
– Cable ties
– Teflon tape
– Loctite
*PPE = pay per exposure (optional)
General information/Software update 1
Messages 2
Troubleshooting 3
Adjustment 4
Service routines 5
Repair 6
Maintenance 7
Contents
1 General information ..................................................................... 1-5

1.1 Safety .................................................................................. 1-5
1.2 Device classes XGPlus / 3Dready and XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE ....... 1-6
1.3 Operation notes ................................................................... 1-8
1.4 Demo mode – Operation without radiation release ........... 1-11
1.5 Demo mode – Repacking andtransport ............................ 1-13
1.6 List of software versions .................................................... 1-14
1.7 Software update ................................................................ 1-27
1.8 Opening the "Details" ........................................................ 1-37
1.9 Configuring X-ray components via the SIDEXIS Manager 1-39
1.10 The most important modules and components ................. 1-45
1.11 Cabling overview ............................................................... 1-50
1.12 Illustrations of boards ........................................................ 1-54
1.13 Remove covers ................................................................. 1-66
2 Messages .................................................................................... 2-3

2.1 Help messages ................................................................... 2-4
2.2 System messages ............................................................... 2-6
2.3 Status displays .................................................................... 2-6
2.4 Error messages ................................................................... 2-6
2.5 List of error messages ......................................................... 2-9
2.6 List of available service routines ....................................... 2-59
3 Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 3-3

3.1 Error logging memory .......................................................... 3-4
3.2 Check the CAN bus ............................................................. 3-6
3.3 Checking the boards ......................................................... 3-12
3.4 Checking the motors ......................................................... 3-15
3.5 Checking the light barriers ................................................ 3-16
3.6 Device leakage current too high ........................................ 3-17
3.7 Checking the cables .......................................................... 3-18
3.8 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path:
up to unit hardware version AG
(with board DX41) ............................................................. 3-19
unit HW version BA or higher
(without board DX41) ........................................................ 3-23
3.10 Checking data paths / Generating test images ................. 3-26
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 V
Contents
4 Adjustment ................................................................................... 4-3

4.1 Important information concerning adjustment ...................... 4-3
4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu .................................. 4-5
4.3 Adjusting the panoramic X-ray unit ...................................... 4-9
4.4 Checking and adjusting the touchscreen
(only for XGPlus / 3Dready) .................................................. 4-55
4.5 Adjusting the cephalometer
(XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5, if ceph present) .......................... 4-58
4.6 TSA sensor adjustment
(only for XGPlus with full version) ..................................... 4-109
4.7 Resetting the adjustment
(XGPlus / 3Dready / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) ...................................... 4-117
5 Service routines ......................................................................... 5-11

5.1 Selecting the Service menu ............................................... 5-12
5.2 Selecting a service routine ................................................. 5-17
5.3 Service routines with SIDEXIS .......................................... 5-20
5.4 Service routine S001 ......................................................... 5-23
5.14 Service routine S018 ....................................................... 5-121
5.15 Service routine S020 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) ................... 5-139
59 38 399 D3352
VI D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Contents
6 Repair .......................................................................................... 6-5

6.1 Safety check ........................................................................ 6-6
6.2 Replacing the height adjustment motor (M1_4)/spindle ...... 6-7
6.3 Replacing the ring motor (M1_3) ....................................... 6-19
6.4 Replacing the PAN actuators (M1_1/2) ............................. 6-22
6.5 Replace headrest .............................................................. 6-24
6.6 Easypad (XGPlus/ 3Dready) or
Or the Multipad for XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE) ................................. 6-26
6.7 Replacing the control panel ............................................... 6-29
6.8 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (PAN) .............. 6-31
6.9 Replacing/adjusting the MS light localizer
laser module (PAN) ........................................................... 6-33
6.10 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (Ceph) ............. 6-35
6.11 Removing the light localizers from the ring
(for XGPlus and XG 5, if present) ....................................... 6-37
6.12 Replacing the bite block holder ......................................... 6-38
6.13 Replacing the motor-driven diaphragm
(for XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5) .............................................. 6-41
6.14 Replacing the fixed diagram (for XG 3 / 3 PPE) ................ 6-45
6.15 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly .................................. 6-48
6.16 Replacing the fan (tube assembly 1.0) .............................. 6-53
6.17 Replacing the fan (tube assembly 2.0) .............................. 6-54
6.18 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder ........................... 6-56
6.19 Replacing the ceph sensor holder ..................................... 6-60
6.20 Replace sensor ................................................................. 6-61
6.21 Replacing the light barriers ............................................... 6-62
6.22 Replacing circuit boards .................................................... 6-73
6.23 Replacing cables ............................................................. 6-101
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 VII
Contents
7 Maintenance ................................................................................ 7-3

7.1 Checking the height adjustment .......................................... 7-4
7.2 Checking the forehead and temple supports ....................... 7-6
7.3 Testing the rotating unit for smooth running ........................ 7-7
7.4 Checking the sensor holder (pan and ceph) ........................ 7-8
7.5 Checking the bite block holder ........................................... 7-10
7.6 Checking the light localizers .............................................. 7-11
7.7 Checking the X-ray images ................................................ 7-13
7.8 Checking the tube data ...................................................... 7-14
7.9 Checking the diaphragm .................................................... 7-20
7.10 Checking the cables for damage ....................................... 7-38
7.11 Checking the idling rollers .................................................. 7-39
7.12 Checking the grounding straps .......................................... 7-40
7.13 Checking the cable shields ................................................ 7-41
7.14 Checking the protective ground wires ................................ 7-42
7.15 Checking the unit leakage current ..................................... 7-46
59 38 399 D3352
VIII D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
ORTHOPHOS XG
1General information
Tab 1
Contents
1.1 Safety ......................................................................1 – 5
1.2 Device classes XGPlus / 3Dready and
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE ......................................................1 – 6
1.2.1 Overview of the ORTHOPHOS XG
system classes and versions1 – 7
1.3 Operation notes.......................................................1 – 8
1.4 Demo mode – Operation without radiation release1 – 11
1.4.1 Switching the demo mode ON............................ 1 – 12
1.4.2 Switching the demo mode OFF.......................... 1 – 12
1.5 Demo mode – Repacking and transport ...............1 – 13
1.6 List of software versions........................................1 – 14
1.6.1 ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE................................... 1 – 14
1.6.2 ORTHOPHOS XG 3 ........................................... 1 – 17
1.6.3 ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / Ceph ............................... 1 – 20
1.6.4 ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / Ceph............................. 1 – 23
1.6.5 ORTHOPHOS XG 3Dready /Ceph ....................... 1 – 26
1.7 Software update ....................................................1 – 27
1.7.1 Important information on the software update.... 1 – 27
1.7.2 Performing a software update ............................ 1 – 29
1.7.3 Software update of ORTHOPHOS XG 5 to
V02.30 or higher................................................. 1 – 34
1.7.4 Software update ORTHOPHOS XGPlus
from version V02.20 to V02.30 or higher............ 1 – 35
1.7.5 Software update of ORTHOPHOS XGPlus from
version V02.22 to V02.30 or higher.................... 1 – 36
1.8 Opening the "Details" ............................................1 – 37
1.9 Configuring X-ray components via the
SIDEXIS Manager .................................................1 – 39
1.9.1 Setting up the X-ray component......................... 1 – 39
1.9.2 Selecting an X-ray component ........................... 1 – 40
1.9.3 Approval of the X-ray component....................... 1 – 43
1.9.4 Deleting the X-ray component............................ 1 – 44
1.10 The most important modules and components .....1 – 45
1.10.1 Slide ................................................................... 1 – 46
1.10.2 Stand .................................................................. 1 – 48
1.10.3 Cephalometer
(arm mounted on left side and on right side)...... 1 – 49
1.10.4 Remote control ................................................... 1 – 49
1.11 Cabling overview ...................................................1 – 50
59 38 399 D3352
1–2 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 1
1.12 Illustrations of boards ............................................1 – 54

1.12.1 Boards in the slide.............................................. 1 – 54
1.12.2 Boards in the stand ............................................ 1 – 62
1.12.3 Boards in the cephalometer
(arm mounted on left side and on right side)...... 1 – 63
1.12.4 Boards in the remote control .............................. 1 – 64
1.13 Remove covers .....................................................1 – 66
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1–3
Tab 1
59 38 399 D3352
1–4 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 1 1.1 Safety
1 General information
båÖäáëÜ 1.1
1.1 Safety
1.1
Repair work is only to be performed by trained dealers / service engi-
neers who are authorized by Sirona. The Service Manual is provided
purely for these persons.
It is essential that you comply with the warning and safety information con-
tained in this Service Manual.
All such information is highlighted by one of three signal words, i.e. WARN-
ING, CAUTION or DANGER.
CAUTION
Nonobservance may result in minor physical injuries or material damage and
malfunctions.
WARNING
Nonobservance may lead to serious physical injury or death.
DANGER
Immediate danger to life and limb. Threat of serious physical injury or
death.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1–5
1.2 Device classes XGPlus / 3Dready and XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE Tab 1
1.2 Device classes XGPlus / 3Dready and XG 5 / 3 / 3

PPE
Comfort class with Easypad The XGPlus / 3Dready and XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system versions differ with regard
(XGPlus / 3Dready) to their user interface. While the ORTHOPHOS XG (XGPlus / 3Dready) comfort
class features a control panel with a color touchscreen (Easypad), the basic
class (XG5/3/3 PPE) is equipped with a simpler control panel with a sin-
gle-line display (Multipad).
Due to their different control panels, the operating procedures for these two
system classes also vary.
All ORTHOPHOS XG units are digital systems.
The ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / 3Dready and XG 5 unit versions are suitable for
operation with a cephalometer (ceph). The cephalometer for the XGPlus /
3Dready unit version is also available with the ceph arm mounted either on the
left or the right side. Only the cephalometer version with the arm mounted on
Basic class with Multipad the left side is offered for the XG 5 system version. Operation of the XG 3/3
(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) PPE system version is not possible with a cephalometer.
i NOTE
The version with the "left-handed arm" is essentially described and illustrated
in this service manual. The installation/removal procedure for the "right-hand-
ed arm" version must be performed with laterally reversed orientation where it
Prog. S kV mA
is not described separately.
T R
Remote control operation is possible in all system versions.
The comfort unit class (XGPlus / 3Dready) comes in a basic and a full version.
However, the basic unit class (XG 5/3/3 PPE) is available only in a basic ver-
sion.
The XGPlus system class optionally includes TSA operation.
This Service Manual describes both system classes in the highest possible
configuration.
For more information on the different installation versions, please refer to the
Installation Instructions.
i NOTE
The empty digits in the single-line display of the Multipad are marked
with underscores in this Manual. They have been added to enhance clarity
and are not present on the real Multipad.
S005_______1____
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
1–6 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 1 1.2 Device classes XGPlus / 3Dready and XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE
1.2.1 Overview of the ORTHOPHOS XG system
1.2
classes and versions
båÖäáëÜ
Comfort class (Easypad, basic or full version, TSA option (not for XG 3Dready) , remote control option)
1.2
with ceph arm on left side ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / 3Dready with ceph arm on right side
Basic class (Multipad, basic equipment, remote release optional)
Prog. S kV mA Prog. S kV mA
T R T R
with ceph arm on left side ORTHOPHOS XG 5
Prog. S kV mA Prog. S kV mA
T R T R
ORTHOPHOS XG 3 ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1–7
1.3 Operation notes Tab 1
1.3 Operation notes
Nominal line voltage The ORTHOPHOS XG X-ray unit can be operated in the following
Nominal line voltage ranges:
200 V - 240 V
50/60 Hz
The permissible line voltage fluctuation at:
200–240 V: ±10%
The internal line impedance must not exceed max. 0.8 Ω.
Fixed connection
Fixed connection
DANGER
Perilous shock hazard!
Fixed connection!
Installing a mains plug instead of the specified fixed connection infringes
international medical regulatory actions and is prohibited. In case of er-
ror, this puts patients, users, and other parties seriously at risk.
Remote control The system can be equipped with...

a 1–3m coiled cable with release button inside the treatment room or ...
a remote control with or without coiled cable located outside the X-ray
room (see installation instructions).
Warm-up time After it is switched ON, the system requires a warm-up time of approx. 1 min.
Self-adjustment routine At the same time, a mechanical and electronic self-adjustment routine is exe-
cuted. If a button is pressed during the self-adjustment routine, an error mes-
sage is displayed on the Multipad (XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or on the Easypad (XGPlus
/ 3Dready).
Cooling period The cooling period between two exposures is maintained by an automatic
exposure blocking function according to the pulse/pause ratio. A countdown
of the waiting time is displayed on the Multipad (XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or the Easy-
pad (XGXGPlus / 3Dready).
Turn-off time The turn-off time must amount to at least 60 s.
Demo units If the X-ray unit is to be presented as a demo unit at trade fairs or exhibitions,
it must be ensured that radiation release is blocked (see "Demo mode – Oper-
ation without radiation release" on page 1-11).
Software version The overall system software version is determined by the software statuses of
the EEPROMs on the boards (see "List of software versions" on page 1-14).
Wireless phone interference with medi- To ensure safe operation of medical electrical equipment, the use of mobile
cal electrical equipment wireless phones in practice or hospital environments is prohibited.
Disposal The X-ray tube assembly contains a tube with potential implosion hazard, a
small amount of beryllium, a lead lining as well as mineral oil.
59 38 399 D3352
1–8 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 1 1.3 Operation notes
Error messages Error messages are displayed on the display of the Multipad (XG5/3/3 PPE)
1.3
or on the touchscreen of the Easypad (XGPlus / 3Dready).
båÖäáëÜ
Help messages in case exposure readi- Help messages are displayed on the display of the Multipad (XG5/3/3 PPE)
ness cannot be attained or on the touchscreen of the Easypad (XGPlus / 3Dready).
1.3
If you have to remove covers from the Proceed according to section "1.13 Remove covers".
unit.
When removing covers, always remember that direct sunlight or bright room
lighting can cause system malfunctions due to activated light barriers.
I.e.: avoid direct sunlight and bright room lighting above the unit!
When attaching the covers: Be sure to screw the sheet metal cover back on.
CAUTION
For reasons of electromagnetic compatibility, be sure to fasten all screws.
Reattach the covers.
Secondary diaphragm Do not manually move or otherwise exert force on the secondary diaphragm
(e.g. when removing it from its packaging).
Measurements Always switch the unit OFF before connecting a measuring instrument.
Select the correct current/voltage type and adjust the measuring range to
match the expected readings.
Perform continuity tests only on units which are switched off.
If several exposures with radiation must be taken to check a measurement,
make sure that the prescribed cool-down intervals are observed. They are
maintained by an automatic exposure blocking function (see Operating
Instructions).
The pulse/pause ratio is 1:10, i.e. a 10-second pause is maintained for each
second of radiation emission. The pulse/pause ratio is automatically main-
tained (automatic exposure blocking).
A pulse/pause ratio of 1:20 is better for the X-ray tube.
WARNING
It is essential that you observe the radiation protection regulations ap-
plicable in your country prior to radiation release.
The test rotations triggered by pressing the T key on the Easypad and then
the release button are executed without radiation.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1–9
1.3 Operation notes Tab 1
Replacing parts Switch off the unit before replacing parts.

When replacing parts in the vicinity of the power connection, the power
switch, board DX32, or the X-ray tube assembly, disconnect the unit from the
distribution box of the building installation.
Please always wear an ESD wrist band to protect sensitive components on
printed circuit boards (ESD).
Always check the system and adjust it as required after replacing a board or
the X-ray tube assembly.
The article numbers for ordering spare parts can be found in the spare parts
list, Order No. 59 38 423. The diagrams contained in the spare parts list pro-
vide a useful guide when replacing parts.
Safety check A protective ground wire test and a leakage current test must be performed
prior to the installation or the hand-over of the unit as well as after repair work.
See sections "7.14 Checking the protective ground wires " and "7.15 Check-
ing the unit leakage current ".
Functional check Following any form of service and maintenance work, a functional check must
be performed on the device.
Perform the following test steps:
1. Perform a restart of the unit:
– Turn the device off.
– Wait 1 minute.
– Switch the unit on.
– Wait until the self-test is finished.
2. Perform a test exposure using the needle phantom included in the scope
of supply.
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 10 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 1 1.4 Demo mode – Operation without radiation release
1.4 Demo mode – Operation without radiation
1.4
release
båÖäáëÜ
1. 2.
1.4
A
3+4. 3+4.
S2
J6 J6
DX6 tube assembly 1.0 DX6 tube assembly 2.0 S2
i NOTE
Starting with system SW version V02.28.02, the complete possible functional-
ity of the system class is simulated, regardless of the current configuration.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 11
1.4 Demo mode – Operation without radiation release Tab 1
1.4.1 Switching the demo mode ON

5. When operated in demo mode, the unit must not release any radiation. For
Info menu for XG 5/3 this reason, you must take the following safety measures:
Turn the device OFF.
DANGER
PERILOUS SHOCK HAZARD! It is essential to switch the unit off and to
P1______14.1__64_8 wait at least another minute before taking off the covers of the tube
assembly.
1. Remove the cover of the tube assembly.
1 2 3 2. Loosen the screws (A) and remove the cover plate (B).
3. Set the DIP switch S2 (DX6) to Position 2.
4. Pull the cable L5 (X-RAY) off from connector J6 (DX6).
Radiation release is now no longer possible.
5. Switch the unit ON and check the mode with the
info menu (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) / the info screen (XGPlus / 3Dready).
SYSTEM
Demo mode: ON means that: The demo mode is switched ON
(Radiation release is not possible)
Demo mode: OFF means: The demo mode is switched OFF
(Radiography, radiation is possible)
1 2 3
Scroll through the list Switch the unit OFF again and reattach cover plate B and the tube assem-
until the demo mode is bly covers by following the dismantling procedure in reverse order.
displayed
1.4.2 Switching the demo mode OFF

Info screen for XGPlus / 3Dready
DANGER
PERILOUS SHOCK HAZARD! It is essential to switch off the unit and to
wait at least another 1 minute before taking off the covers of the X-ray
tube assembly.
1. Remove the cover of the tube assembly.

2. Loosen the screws A and remove the cover plate B.
3. Set the DIP switch S2 (DX6) to Position 1.
4. Connect cable L5 (X-RAY) to connector J6 (DX6).
Radiation release is now once again possible.
5. Switch the unit ON and check the mode with the
Orthophos XG configuration 2/2 info menu (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) / the info screen (XGPlus / 3Dready).
Mac address : 010001200000 Demo mode: ON means that: The demo mode is switched ON
IP address : 192.168.15.19 (Radiation release is not possible)
Subnet mask : 155.155.255.0
Default gateway : 192.168.15.1 Demo mode: OFF means: The demo mode is switched OFF
Net API version : 1 (Radiography, radiation is possible)
Net API revision : 14 65
Demo mode : ON Switch the unit OFF again and reattach cover plate B and the tube assem-
Tube exposures : 2217
bly covers by following the dismantling procedure in reverse order.
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 12 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 1 1.5 Demo mode – Repacking andtransport
1.5 Demo mode –
1.5
Repacking andtransport
båÖäáëÜ
1.
1.5
A
i NOTE
If the unit is installed with a floor stand, its height in-
creases by 30mm. The bite block height value dis-
played on the Multipad (XG5/3/3 PPE) or Easypad
(XGPlus / 3Dready) remains the same, however.
Panoramic X-ray unit Switch the panoramic X-ray unit ON and move it to its packing height by
pressing the UP/DOWN keys on the Multipad (XG5/3/3 PPE) or Easypad
(XGPlus / 3Dready).
– Bite block height = 965 mm (displayed as height on Multipad (XG5/3/3
PPE) or
Easypad (XGPlus / 3Dready) displayed as height)
– Bottom edge of slide cover = 702 mm
i NOTE
The bottom edge of the slide cover must be at the same height as the mark-
ings A in the column.
Cephalometer Start service routine S034, test step 6.

Move the cephalometer to the packing position
(see page 5-165).
DANGER
PERILOUS SHOCK HAZARD! Prior to disconnecting the line voltage,
you must switch off the power connection and wait 1 minute?.
Unplug any connections between the external units and the DX41 board
or interface board, and disconnect the unit from the power supply.
For information on packing the units and on the packing condition, see the
relevant installation instructions.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 13
1.6 List of software versions Tab 1
1.6 List of software versions
i NOTE
Any software combinations other than those listed here are
not allowed. If the software version of any particular module does not match
the overall software version, the overall software version will be
marked with an asterisk on the info screen (e.g. 02.20*).
1.6.1 ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE

Panoramic unit Note
Board DX6 DX71 DX11 DX81
Overall software 02.60 02.33 02.40 02.33 compatible with
V 02.28 SIDEXIS versions V01.61
Overall software compatible with
V 02.28.2 02.60 02.33 02.40.01 02.33 SIDEXIS versions V01.61
02.60 02.34 02.42 02.33
V 02.32 02.60 02.34 02.43 02.33 SIDEXIS versions V01.61
02.61 02.35 02.45 02.33
V 02.41 02.62 02.36 02.48 02.33 SIDEXIS versions V01.61
02.63 02.37 02.48 02.33
V 02.41.01 SIDEXIS versions V01.61
Overall software 03.05.00 02.54.00 02.51.01 02.33 compatible with
V 02.51.02 03.06.00 02.54.00 02.51.02 02.33 SIDEXIS Version V01.61*
03.06.00 02.54.00 02.51.03 02.33
V 02.51.03 SIDEXIS Version V01.61*
Overall software 03.06.01 02.54.03 02.54.00 02.33 compatible with
Tube assem- Tube assem-
Overall software bly 1.0 bly 2.0 compatible with
V 02.54.01 02.54.03 02.54.01 02.33 SIDEXIS Version V01.61*
03.06.03 04.07.01
02.55.02 02.58.00 02.33
V 02.58.00 SIDEXIS Version V01.61 – V2.5*
03.08.00 04.09.07
V 02.58.02 02.55.02 02.59.07 02.33 SIDEXIS Version V01.61 – V2.5*
03.08.00 04.10.06
* Exception: SIDEXIS version V02.00
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 14 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 1 1.6 List of software versions
1.6
Remote control Note
båÖäáëÜ
Board DX42
Overall software
V 02.28 02.30
1.6
Overall software
02.30
V 02.28.2
Overall software 02.31
V 02.30
Overall software
V 02.31 02.31
Overall software
02.31
V 02.32
V 02.35
Overall software
V 02.40 02.52
Overall software
02.52
V 02.41
V 02.41.01
Overall software
V 02.51.01 02.54.00
Overall software
02.54.00
V 02.51.01
Overall software 02.54.00
V 02.51.02
Overall software
02.54.00
V 02.51.03
V 02.54.00
Overall software
V 02.54.01 02.56.02
Overall software
02.58.02
V 02.58.00
V 02.58.02
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 15
Sidexis XG Note Database

requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE Old database
V 01.53
overall software version V02.28.2 or higher
V 01.54 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE

requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE
V 01.55 overall software version V02.28.2 or higher
requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE New database
V 01.61
V 02.00 i NOTE
Exception: Overall software V2.51.2 is not
compatible with Sidexis XG version V02.00.

V 2.2
V 2.3 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE

V 2.4 overall software version V02.28.2 or higher
V 2.5
V 2.5.3 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE
V 2.5.6 overall software version V02.28.2 or higher
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 16 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
1.6.2 ORTHOPHOS XG 3
1.6
Panoramic unit Note
båÖäáëÜ
Board DX6 DX71 DX11 DX41 DX81
02.57 02.29 02.37 02.22 02.30
1.6
Overall software 02.60 02.31 02.39 02.23 02.32 compatible with
V 02.27 SIDEXIS version V01.53
V 02.28 02.60 02.33 02.40 (02.23*) 02.33 SIDEXIS version V01.53
02.60 02.33 02.40.01 (02.23*) 02.33
V 02.28.2 SIDEXIS version V01.53
Overall software 02.60 02.34 02.42 (02.23*) 02.33 compatible with
V 02.31 02.60 02.34 02.42 (02.23*) 02.33 SIDEXIS version V01.53
02.60 02.34 02.43 (02.23*) 02.33
Overall software 02.61 02.35 02.45 (02.23*) 02.33 compatible with
V 02.41 02.62 02.36 02.48 (02.23*) 02.33 SIDEXIS versions V01.61
02.63 02.37 02.48 (02.23*) 02.33
Overall software 03.05.00 02.54.00 02.51.01 02.30.00 02.33 compatible with
03.06.00 02.54.00 02.51.02 02.30.00 02.33
Overall software 03.06.00 02.54.00 02.51.03 02.30.00 02.33 compatible with
V 02.54 03.06.01 02.54.03 02.54.00 02.30.00 02.33 SIDEXIS Version V01.61*
02.54.03 02.54.01 02.30.00 02.33
03.06.03 04.07.01
Tube assem- Tube assem- compatible with
Overall software bly 1.0 bly 2.0 02.55.02 02.58.00 02.30.00 02.33 SIDEXIS Version V01.61 –
V 02.58.00
03.08.00 04.09.07 V2.5*
Overall software bly 1.0 bly 2.0
V 02.58.01 02.55.02 02.58.00 02.30.00 02.33 SIDEXIS Version V01.61 –
03.08.00 04.09.07 V2.5*
Overall software bly 1.0 bly 2.0 02.55.02 02.59.07 02.30.00 02.33 SIDEXIS Version V01.61 –
V 02.58.02 V2.5*
03.08.00 04.10.06
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 17
Remote control Note

Board DX42
V 02.25
Overall software
V 02.27 02.28
Overall software
02.30
V 02.28
V 02.28.2
Overall software
V 02.30 02.31
Overall software
02.31
V 02.31
V 02.32
Overall software
V 02.35 02.50
Overall software
02.52
V 02.40
V 02.41
Overall software
V 02.41.01 02.52
Overall software
02.54.00
V 02.51.01
V 02.51.02
Overall software
V 02.51.03 02.54.00
Overall software
02.56.02
V 02.54.00
V 02.54.01
Overall software
V 02.58.00 02.58.02
Overall software
02.58.02
V 02.58.01
V 02.58.02
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 18 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
1.6
båÖäáëÜ
requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 overall software Old database
V 01.51
version V02.25 or higher
V 01.53 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3

overall software version V02.25 or higher
1.6
requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3
V 01.54 overall software version V02.25 or higher
V 01.55
V 01.61 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 overall software New database

version V02.25 or higher
V 02.00 i NOTE
requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 overall software

V 2.2 version V02.25 or higher
V 2.3
version V02.28.2 or higher
V 2.4 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 overall software
V 2.5 version V02.28.2 or higher
V 2.5.3
V 2.5.6 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE

* As of hardware version BA (from November 2006) new systems will be delivered without
board DX41 (see also page 1-44).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 19
1.6.3 ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / Ceph

Panoramic unit Cephalo- Note
meter
Board DX6 DX71 DX11 DX41 DX61 DX81 DX91
Overall software compatible with SIDEXIS ver-
V 02.18.1 02.45 02.23 02.31 02.19 02.20 02.25 02.32 sions up to and incl. V01.44
02.56 02.28 02.33 02.22 02.26 02.29 02.34
Overall software 02.56 02.28 02.35 02.22 02.30 02.29 02.38 compatible with
V 02.25 02.57 02.29 02.37 02.22 02.30 02.30 02.40 SIDEXIS versions V01.45
02.60 02.31 02.39 02.23 02.33 02.32 02.42
Overall software 02.60 02.33 02.40 (02.23*) 02.33 02.33 02.42 compatible with
V 02.28.2 02.60 02.33 02.40.01 (02.23*) 02.34 02.33 02.43 SIDEXIS version V01.53
02.60 02.34 02.42 (02.23*) 02.34 02.33 02.43
V 02.32 02.60 02.34 02.43 (02.23*) 02.35 02.33 02.44 SIDEXIS version V01.53
02.61 02.35 02.45 (02.23*) 02.35 02.33 02.44
V 02.40 02.61 02.35 02.47 (02.23*) 02.35 02.33 02.44 SIDEXIS versions V01.61
02.62 02.36 02.48 (02.23*) 02.35 02.33 02.44
V 02.51.01 03.05.00 02.54.00 02.51.01 02.30.00 04.01.00 02.33 02.44.00 SIDEXIS versions V01.61

03.06.00 02.54.00 02.51.02 02.30.00 04.01.00 02.33 02.44.00
Overall software 03.06.00 02.54.00 02.51.03 02.30.00 04.01.00 02.33 02.44.00 compatible with
V 02.54 03.06.01 02.54.03 02.54.00 02.30.00 04.02.00 02.33 02.44.00 SIDEXIS Version V01.61*
Tube Tube
Overall software assem- assem- compatible with
V 02.54.01 bly 1.0 bly 2.0 02.54.03 02.54.01 02.30.00 04.02.00 02.33 02.44.00 SIDEXIS Version V01.61*
03.06.03 04.07.01
Tube Tube
assem- assem- compatible with
Overall software 02.55.02 02.58.00 02.30.00 04.04.00 02.33 02.45.00 SIDEXIS Version V01.61 –
V 02.58.00 bly 1.0 bly 2.0
V2.5*
03.08.00 04.09.07
Tube Tube
bly 1.0 bly 2.0 02.55.02 02.58.00 02.30.00 04.04.00 02.33 02.45.00 SIDEXIS Version V01.61 –
V 02.58.01 V2.5*
03.08.00 04.09.07
Tube Tube
Overall software
V 02.58.02 bly 1.0 bly 2.0 02.55.02 02.59.07 02.30.00 04.04.00 02.33 02.45.00 SIDEXIS Version V01.61 –
V2.5*
03.08.00 04.10.06
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 20 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
1.6
Remote control Note
Board DX42
båÖäáëÜ
Overall software
V 02.18.1 02.22
Overall software
1.6
02.27
V 02.20
V 02.22
Overall software
V 02.25 02.27
Overall software
02.28
V 02.27
V 02.28
Overall software
V 02.28.2 02.30
Overall software
02.31
V 02.30
V 02.31
Overall software
V 02.32 02.31
Overall software
02.50
V 02.35
V 02.40
Overall software
02.52
V 02.41
V 02.41.01
Overall software
V 02.51.01 02.54.00
Overall software
02.54.00
V 02.51.02
V 02.51.03
Overall software
V 02.54.00 02.56.02
Overall software
02.56.02
V 02.54.01
V 02.58.00
Overall software
V 02.58.01 02.58.02
Overall software
02.58.02
V 02.58.02
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 21

requires ORTHOPHOS XG 5 overall Old database
V 01.33 - V01.44
software version < V02.20
V 01.45 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 5 overall

software version V02.20 or higher
requires ORTHOPHOS XG 5 overall
V 01.50 software version V02.20 or higher
V 01.51
V 01.55 overall software version V02.28.2 or
higher
requires ORTHOPHOS XG 5 overall New database
V 02.00
i NOTE
Exception: Overall software V2.51.2 is
not compatible with Sidexis XG version
V02.00.

V 2.3 software version V02.28.2 or higher
higher
higher
V 2.5.3 overall software version V02.28.2 or
higher
V 2.5.6 overall software version V02.28.2 or
higher
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 22 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
1.6.4 ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / Ceph
1.6
båÖäáëÜ
meter
Board DX6 DX7 DX11 DX41 DX61 DX81 DX91
compatible with SIDEXIS
Overall software
1.6
02.41 02.25 02.30 02.16 02.17 02.23 02.31 Version up to and incl.
V 02.17
V01.44
Overall software compatible with SIDEXIS

02.52 02.31 02.32 02.20 02.25 02.26 02.34 Version up to and incl.
V 02.19 V01.44
02.56 02.35 02.33 02.22 02.26 02.29 02.34
Overall software 02.56 02.38 02.35 02.22 02.30 02.29 02.38 compatible with
V 02.25 02.57 02.40 02.37 02.22 02.32 02.30 02.40 SIDEXIS versions V01.45
02.60 02.42 02.39 02.23 02.33 02.32 02.42
V 02.28.2 02.60 02.44 02.40.01 (02.23*) 02.34 02.33 02.43 SIDEXIS version V01.53
02.60 02.44 02.42 (02.23*) 02.34 02.33 02.43
02.60 02.44 02.43 (02.23*) 02.35 02.33 02.44
V 02.40 02.61 02.70 02.47 (02.23*) 02.35 02.33 02.44 SIDEXIS versions V01.61
02.62 02.70 02.48 (02.23*) 02.35 02.33 02.44
V 02.51.01 03.05.00 02.77.01 02.51.01 02.30.00 04.01.00 02.33 02.44.00 SIDEXIS versions V01.61
03.06.00 02.77.01 02.51.02 02.30.00 04.01.00 02.33 02.44.00
Overall software 03.06.00 02.77.01 02.51.03 02.30.00 04.01.00 02.33 02.44.00 compatible with
V 02.54 03.06.01 02.80.05 02.54.00 02.30.00 04.02.00 02.33 02.44.00 SIDEXIS Version V01.61*
Tube Tube
V 02.54.01 bly 1.0 bly 2.0 02.80.05 02.54.01 02.30.00 04.02.00 02.33 02.44.00 SIDEXIS Version V01.61*
03.06.03 04.07.01
Tube Tube
Overall software 02.82.01 02.58.00 02.30.00 04.04.00 02.33 02.45.00 SIDEXIS Version V01.61 –
V 02.58.00 bly 1.0 bly 2.0
V2.5*
03.08.00 04.09.07
Tube Tube
bly 1.0 bly 2.0 02.82.01 02.58.00 02.30.00 04.04.00 02.33 02.45.00 SIDEXIS Version V01.61 –
V 02.58.01 V2.5*
03.08.00 04.09.07
Tube Tube
Overall software
V 02.58.02 bly 1.0 bly 2.0 02.82.02 02.59.07 02.30.00 04.04.00 02.33 02.45.00 SIDEXIS Version V01.61 –
V2.5*
03.08.00 04.10.06
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 23
Remote control Note

Board DX42
Overall software
V 02.17 02.17
Overall software
02.24
V 02.19
V 02.20
Overall software
V 02.22 02.27
Overall software
02.27
V 02.25
V 02.27
Overall software
V 02.28 02.30
Overall software
02.30
V 02.28.2
V 02.30
Overall software
V 02.31 02.31
Overall software
02.31
V 02.32
V 02.35
Overall software
02.52
V 02.40
V 02.41
Overall software
V 02.51.01 02.54.00
Overall software
02.54.00
V 02.51.02
V 02.51.03
Overall software
V 02.54.00 02.56.02
Overall software
02.56.02
V 02.54.01
V 02.58.00
Overall software
V 02.58.01 02.58.02
Overall software
02.58.02
V 02.58.02
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 24 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
1.6
requires ORTHOPHOS XGPlus overall soft- Old database
V 01.33 - V01.44
båÖäáëÜ
ware version < V02.20
V 01.45 requires ORTHOPHOS XGPlus

1.6
requires ORTHOPHOS XGPlus
V 01.50 overall software version V02.20 or higher
requires ORTHOPHOS XGPlus overall soft-
V 01.51
ware version V02.20 or higher
V 01.53 requires ORTHOPHOS XGPlus overall soft-

V 01.54 ware version V02.20 or higher
V 01.55
V 01.61 requires ORTHOPHOS XGPlus overall soft- New database

V 02.00 i NOTE

V 2.3 ware version V02.28.2 or higher
V 2.4
ware version V02.28.2 or higher
ware version V02.28.2 or higher
V 2.5.3 ware version V02.28.2 or higher
V 2.5.6
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 25
1.6.5 ORTHOPHOS XG 3Dready /Ceph

meter
Board DX6 DX7 DX11 DX61 DX81 DX91
V 02.41.01 02.63 02.70 02.48 02.35 02.33 02.44 SIDEXIS versions V01.61
03.05.00 02.77.01 02.51.01 04.01.00 02.33.00 02.44.00
Overall software 03.06.00 0277.01 02.51.02 04.01.00 02.33.00 02.44.00 compatible with
V 02.51.03 03.06.00 02.77.01 02.51.03 04.01.00 02.33.00 02.44.00 SIDEXIS Version V01.61*
03.06.01 02.80.05 02.54.00 04.02.00 02.33.00 02.44.00
V 02.54 SIDEXIS Version V01.61*
Tube Tube
Overall software assembly assembly compatible with
1.0 2.0 02.80.05 02.54.01 04.02.00 02.33.00 02.44.00
03.06.03 04.07.01
Tube Tube
assembly assembly compatible with
Overall software
V 02.58.00 1.0 2.0 02.82.01 02.58.00 04.04.00 02.33.00 04.45.00 SIDEXIS Version V01.61 –
V2.5*
03.08.00 04.09.07
Tube Tube
Overall software 02.82.01 02.58.00 04.04.00 02.33.00 04.45.00 SIDEXIS Version V01.61 –
V 02.58.01 1.0 2.0
V2.5*
03.08.00 04.09.07
Tube Tube
Overall software 02.82.02 02.59.07 04.04.00 02.33.00 04.45.00 SIDEXIS Version V01.61 –
V 02.58.02 1.0 2.0
V2.5*
03.08.00 04.10.06
Remote control Note

Board DX42
Overall software
02.52
V 02.41.01
V 02.51.01
Overall software
V 02.51.02 02.54.00
Overall software
02.54.00
V 02.51.03
V 02.54.00
Overall software
V 02.54.01 02.56.02
Overall software
02.58.02
V 02.58.00
V 02.58.01
Overall software
V 02.58.02 02.58.02

requires overall software version V02.41.01 New database
V 2.5 or higher
requires overall software version V02.41.01
V 2.5.3
or higher
V 2.5.6 requires overall software version V02.41.01

or higher
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 26 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 1 1.7 Software update
1.7 Software update
1.7
1.7.1 Important information on the software update
båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
1.7
Read the information and "release notes" provided on the ORTHOPHOS
XG Software CD and the information on the SIRONA dealer page on the
Internet very carefully. These sources always contain the latest informa-
tion on software updates.
CAUTION
Before performing a software update, it is essential to read the pro-
gram-version-specific information in sections 1.7.3 to 1.7.5.
CAUTION
Important for XGPlus devices with series numbers
≥ 21001 (without ceph) / ≥ 41001 (with ceph):
A downgrade to a software version ≤V02.25 must not be performed on these
systems in any case. Such a downgrade would cause permanent and irrepa-
rable malfunctioning of the user interface!
CAUTION
Important for units with the following serial numbers or higher:
Without ceph With ceph

XG 3 PPE 104000 –
XG 3 104000 –
XG 5 63500 83500
XGPlus 23500 43500
A downgrade to a software version <V02.32 cannot be performed on these

units.

Plus
XG 24500 44500
with occlusal bite block
A downgrade to a software version <V02.40 cannot be performed on units with

an occlusal bite block.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 27
1.7 Software update Tab 1
CAUTION
Important for units with the following serial numbers or higher:

XG 3 109.000 –
XG 5 69.000 89.000
XG 3Dready 29.000 49.000
The new DX1/DX11 (REF: 62 82 052 / REF: 63 17 056) is installed in these

units. Only an overall software version ≧ V02.51.02 can be installed in combi-
nation with these boards.
Not all software versions are suitable for all unit classes. The following table
gives you an overview of the software version permissible for each unit class.
Overall XG 3 PPE XG 3 XG 5 XGPlus XG

software 3Dready
V 02.17 – – – X –
V 02.18.1 – – X – –
V 02.19 – – – X –
V 02.20 – – X X –
V 02.22 – – X X –
V 02.25 – X X X –
V 02.27 – X X X –
V 02.28 X X X X –
V 02.28.2 X X X X –
V 02.30 X X X X –
V 02.31 X X X X –
V 02.32 X X X X –
V 02.35 X X X X –
V 02.40 X X X X –
V 02.41 X X X X –
V 02.41.01 X X X X X
V 02.51.02 X X X X X
V 02.51.03 X X X X X
V 02.54.00 X X X X X
V 02.54.01 X X X X X
V 02.56.01 X X X X X
V 02.58.00 X X X X X
V 02.58.01 X X X X X
V 02.58.02 X X X X X
CAUTION
If an update is nevertheless performed accidentally, the version must be
downgraded again immediately before acknowledging any error messages or
executing any service routines!
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 28 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
1.7.2 Performing a software update
1.7
i NOTE
båÖäáëÜ
When updating the software from version ≤ V02.41.01 to version V02.54.01
or higher, version V02.51.03 must be installed beforehand.
1.7
1. Start SIDEXIS MANAGER under START PROGRAMS
SIDEXIS SIDEXIS XG.
2. Click CONFIGURATION OF THE X-RAY COMPONENTS.
To open the SOFTWARE UPDATE menu 3. Open the SOFTWARE UPDATE menu.
Click the ATTRIBUTES tab and then SOFTWARE-UPDATE.
The dialog box for entering the service password appears on the screen.
2.
Entering the password 4. Enter the service password.
i NOTE
For the service password, enter the first 4 digits of the current system date in
reverse order (e.g. on 05/24/1995, 5042 must be entered as the service pass-
word.
If an incorrect service password or no password at all is then entered, the lim-

ited update menu for users will then be started. This includes only the possi-
bility for an automatic update (see page 1-31).
The dialog box for selecting the installation source opens.
Select an installation source 5. IMAGEFILE is preset as the installation source for the software update.
6. Select the path and the desired update file and confirm your selection by
clicking OPEN.
Click on NAME UPDATE and OPEN
i NOTE
The current update file can be found on the ORTHOPHOS XG Software CD. It
is delivered with each DX11 replacement board and also included in the coun-
4. 5. try set. The contents of the CD can be downloaded from the Dealer domain of
the SIRONA Internet home page (under Product Info X-ray Systems):
www.sirona.com
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 29
Selecting the update mode 7. Select the mode for the software update.
You can select two different update modes via the index tabs:
Automatic
The software of all components is automatically updated to a higher soft-
ware version.
Main version
The software can be upgraded or downgraded to the desired version.
This update mode is required e.g. if a replacement component delivered
from stock has a newer status than the prevailing overall system status. In
this case, a main version update to the overall system status (displayed on
the info screen) must be performed for the corresponding component with
the appropriate update file (*.SUI). The module is then reprogrammed.
(For more information on the update mode, see the next page)
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 30 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
1.7
User domain Service area
båÖäáëÜ
1.7
Automatic Automatic Main version
(accessible without password) A list of modules, their installed soft- (e.g. if modules have a newer ver-
ware version and the latest software sion status than the overall system
version offered by the update func- following module replacement)
tion is displayed in the right pane.
i NOTE
In overall software V04.09.02 and higher, two versions of the DX6 assembly appear (tube assembly 1.0 and tube as-
sembly 2.0).
Depending upon which tube assembly has been installed, one of the versions is displayed with a red bar and the other
with a green bar.
Modules which are connected and whose program release

corresponds to the latest main program version are identified by a continuous green bar.
Depending on the constellation, the update can take up to 10 - 15 mins.
Do not acknowledge any timeout messages before this time has elapsed!!!!!
This may lead to a total failure of individual modules.
Modules which are not elements of the current system configuration

(e.g. DX71 with XGPlus) or, as a removable medium (e.g. sensors) are not connected, are marked by a
broken red bar.
If the actual status of the module could not be polled for the update, the actual SW version
will then be displayed as = V00:00.
If a module has a hardware incompatibility to the program status to be programmed

or the software version on the module is newer than the one in the update file, this will be
indicated by a red triangle with an exclamation mark.
If the version of the selected update file is lower than the current software version of the unit,
then there will be no display in the right window. The downgrade required in this case is possible only via
8. Select the update mode and the update or component.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 31
Starting the update 9. START THE UPDATE by clicking start update.
i NOTE
Before starting the software update, make sure that no unit movements are
active (especially any diaphragm movements)! Otherwise the system may be-
come inoperable in rare cases.
All of the sensors located in the unit (Pan or Ceph) must be inserted in the cor-
responding slots. Exposure readiness must be deselected in SIDEXIS and the
system must not be in the service mode already.
The update is started. A message box informs you when the update pro-
cess is completed. Confirm the update with OK.
7.
Checking the log file 10. Check the log file to make sure that the update was completed success-
fully.
Click SHOW LOGFILE
i NOTE
If messages such as Update of DXxx failed! appear there, please perform
the update again. Repeat this procedure as often as necessary until the "failed
messages" no longer appear.
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 32 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
11. Reboot the system.
1.7
CAUTION
båÖäáëÜ
It is always necessary to reboot the system after any software update. (The
new DX11 version will run only after the system has been rebooted (see also
Section 6.23.2, 6.22.4 Measures following replacement of boards ).
1.7
i NOTE
Any errors with the consecutive numbers 01, 03, 04, 06 and/or 07 displayed
immediately following the software update may be ignored. If these messages
appear again after the unit is rebooted, perform troubleshooting according to
Section 2.6.
If anything conspicuous occurs in connection with system handling on com-

pletion of the software update, please repeat the software update as the first
measure. Also check whether the system software version is displayed with-
out an asterisk (*) on the info screen.
Checking the program versions 12. Check whether all modules contain the current program version via the
SW Update Manager
or service routine S008.2 (see page 5-53).
i NOTE
Modules which are connected and whose program status agrees with
that of the current main program version are marked by a continuous green
bar.
Modules which are not elements of the current system configuration

(e.g. DX71 with XGPlus) or, as a removable medium (e.g. sensors) are not con-
nected, are marked by a broken red bar.
If the actual status of the module could not be polled for the update, the actual
SW version will then be displayed as = V00:00.
If a module has a hardware incompatibility to the program status to be pro-

grammed or the software version on the module is newer than the one in the
SW Update Manager
update file, this will be indicated by a red triangle with an exclamation mark.
If the version of the selected update file is lower than the current software ver-
sion of the unit, then there will be no display in the right window. A downgrade
required in this case is possible only via the MAIN VERSION mode.
13. Open the "Details".

This generates an XML file (with the system parameters) which is filed un-
der the network name of the system in the PDATA\Plugins\<Plugin
Name>\P2K_Config\/<Gerätename>ext.xml directory (see also section
1.8, on page 1-37).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 33
1.7.3 Software update of ORTHOPHOS XG 5 to

V02.30 or higher
i NOTE
If the sensors previously used are to be used in the future as well, plug them
into the slots on the panoramic unit and/or cephalometer before you begin the
update.
1. Switch the unit ON.

2. Perform the software update to version V02.30 or higher
(automatic update) as described on page 1-29.
3. Turn the device OFF.
Wait for approx. 1 minute. Then switch the unit ON again.
Error message E6 15 04 (undefined activation data) is displayed.
4. Acknowledge the error message with the R key R .

E6 15 04 R
5. Start service routine S008.4 and enable the function activation. Exit the
Service menu again.
6. Perform a ceph adjustment if a cephalometer is installed (see chapter
4.5).
8. Check to see which Sidexis software version is installed:
– If SIDEXIS software version V01.55 is installed, no update is required.
– If SIDEXIS software version <V01.55 or V01.6 is installed, then update
the SIDEXIS software to version V02.4 or higher.
– If a SIDEXIS software version between V02.0 and V02.3 is installed,
then SIRONA recommends updating the SIDEXIS software to version
V02.4 or higher.
CAUTION
When doing so, observe the system requirements for SIDEXIS V02.4. If a ≤
V01.55 software version was previously installed, the database also must be
adapted accordingly. If this is not possible, please contact the CSC.
The process is completed.
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 34 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
1.7.4 Software update ORTHOPHOS XGPlus
1.7
from version V02.20 to V02.30 or higher
båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
1.7
update.

E6 15 04 R
5. Open the Service menu (see page 5-12).
6. Start service routine S008.3 and confirm the unit
serial number (see page 5-55).
i NOTE
The unit serial number is located on the rating plate of the unit.
CAUTION
In case of a wrong serial number, cancel the update and contact the SIRONA
Customer Service Center!
7. Start service routine S008.4 and enable the function activation. Exit the
Service menu again.
9. Perform the complete system adjustment (see chapter 4):
– PAN adjustment
– For TSA units: TSA adjustment
– CEPH adjustment if cephalometer is installed
V02.4 or higher.
CAUTION
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 35
1.7.5 Software update of ORTHOPHOS XGPlus from

version V02.22 to V02.30 or higher
i NOTE
update.

4. Perform a ceph adjustment if a cephalometer is installed (see chapter
4.5).
V02.4 or higher.
CAUTION
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 36 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 1 1.8 Opening the "Details"
1.8 Opening the "Details"
1.8
Open "Details"
Open XG 3D
1. Start SIDEXIS MANAGER under START PROGRAMS SIDEXIS
båÖäáëÜ
SIDEXIS XG.
2. 2.Click CONFIGURATION OF THE X-RAY COMPONENTS.
1.8
The CONFIGURATION OF THE X-RAY COMPONENTS MENU opens.
Opening MENU details 3. Open the extended DETAILS.

Click the ATTRIBUTES tab and then
DETAILS.
The current parameters are read from the unit and stored as an XML file
under the network name of the unit in the
PDATA\Plugins\<Plugin Name>\P2K_Config\/<Gerätename>ext.xml di-
rectory.
The process can take up to 30 seconds.
2.
After the parameters are read, an editor displaying the XML file is opened
automatically.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 37
1.8 Opening the "Details" Tab 1
i NOTE
You can scroll down further in the file using the scroll bar. The "Changed sys-
tem parameters", i.e. the system parameters that were modified in relation to
the factory setting, are displayed there. This is especially interesting after a
module change. The parameter settings can thus be easily traced.
1951C59C.txt
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------- Changed Systemparameter ---------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
The following systemparameters have been changed compared to the factory
settings.
After replacing an DX11-PCB, the listed values must be reconfigured.
--- Changed System Configuration Settings ---

Setting of system version (configured in S17.2)
actual value: 0x0043
Setting of head rest type (configured in S17.10)
actual value: 1
Setting of language index (configured in S17.4)
Setting of language-set index (configured in S17.5)
Setting of remote control activation (configured in S17.6)
actual value: active (01)
Setting of DX41 configuration (configured in S17.9)
actual value: mounted (01)
Setting of image format (configured in S17.11)
actual value: enabled (01)
Settings of welcome-screen configuration (configured in S17.14)
actual value: 01=1, 02=1, 03=1, 04=1, 05=0, 06=0, 07=0, 08=0
Settings of CEPH-adjustment (Stored by the adjustment-routines)
actual value: DAlpha = 2810 | DX = 0 | DY = 35160
Settings of CEPH-adjustment QuickShot (Stored by the adjustment-routines)
actual value: DAlpha = 2810 | DX = 0 | DY = 35160
Settings of PAN- and TSA-adjustment (Stored by the adjustment-routines)
actual value: DAlpha = -202 | DX = -191 | DY = -6044 | A1 = 0 | A2 = 0 | C1 =
-77
Setting of ring type (configured in S34.7)
actual value: 100
Setting of kVmA level series (configured in S17.8)
actual value: FIFO_2A
Settings of network configuration
actual value: IP: 192.168.15.176 | Subnet: 255.255.255.0 | Gateway:
192.168.15.1
--- Changed User Preference Settings ---

Settings of patientensymbols PAN (configured in 'select basic settings')
Settings of patientensymbols CEPH (configured in 'select basic settings')
Setting of anomaly default (configured in 'select starting settings')
Setting of default patientsymbol PAN (configured in 'select starting settings')
Setting of default patientsymbol CEPH (configured in 'select starting settings')
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 38 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 1 1.9 Configuring X-ray components via the SIDEXIS Manager
1.9 Configuring X-ray components via the
1.9
SIDEXIS Manager
båÖäáëÜ
1.9.1 Setting up the X-ray component
1.9
Since it is addressable via the network, the X-ray component can in principle
be activated for X-ray image acquisition by any of the PCs connected to the
network.
The SiXABCon program is used to manage networkable X-ray components.
It can be executed on any PC in the network, on which SIDEXIS XG has been
installed.
IMPORTANT! In order to avoid IP address conflicts, you should never oper-
ate several networkable X-ray components in the network using the same IP
address. Each X-ray component needs to be assigned a unique IP address.
Factory setting of the TCP/IP address of the unit:
192.168.15.240 (subnet mask: 255.255.255.0)
Checking existing IP addresses
To find out whether an IP address already exists in the network, enter the
"PING" function in the input prompt (DOS window).
1. Switch on all network devices (computers, printers, X-ray components)
which have been operated to date.
2. Invoke the input prompt (DOS window) from a network computer.
3. At the input prompt, enter "ping" followed by the address to be checked
and then press the Enter key.
Example: "ping 192.168.15.13"
– If a network device responds, then this address has already been as-
signed.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 39
1.9 Configuring X-ray components via the SIDEXIS Manager Tab 1
1.9.2 Selecting an X-ray component

1. Switch all networkable X-ray components off.
2. Start the "SIDEXIS Manager" under "Start" / "Programs" / "SIDEXIS" .
3. Click "Configuration of the X-ray components".
– The menu "Configuration of the X-ray components" opens.
4. Select the "Properties" tab.

5. From the pull-down menu "Name" select the name of the desired X-ray
component ("XG3D" in the example); then click on the "Add component"
button.
or
– select the text "Add component" under the desired X-ray component
in the "Name" pull-down menu.
– The password dialog box appears.
6. Enter the service password and confirm your input by clicking the "OK"
button.
– The menu "Device configuration" opens.
– The "Boot service" element is selected automatically.
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 40 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Boot service
1.9
i NOTE
båÖäáëÜ
Automatic addition and setup of the X-ray component via the boot service
functions properly only if the unit is started with the default factory-set IP ad-
1.9
dress.
If the IP address already has been changed, reset it to the factory setting via
service routine S037.2 or use the elements "Automatic search" or "Add com-
ponent manually" (see section on "Alternatives to the boot service".
The element "Boot service" is selected in the structure tree.

1. Switch the unit on.
– The unit is detected in the network and the values for the IP address,
subnet mask and standard gateway are automatically imported to the
input fields of the menu.
i NOTE
If the unit is not automatically detected in the network, it is possible to manually
assign a static IP address via service routine S037.4.
i NOTE
Each unit must be assigned a unique IP address in the network.
2. If you want to, you can enter an individual IP address in the "IP address"
input field and then click into one of the other input fields with the cursor.
– Default values suitable for the IP address are automatically entered in
the "Subnet Mask" and "Standard Gateway" input fields.
3. You can either overwrite the default values in the input fields or leave them
unchanged, depending on the network involved.
4. Select the desired RCU in the "Sirona Control Server" drop-down menu.
5. Confirm the settings by clicking on the "Save Values" button.
– The settings are saved.
– The "Device Configuration" dialog window appears and informs you
that the configuration of the X-ray component has been completed suc-
cessfully.
6. Confirm this dialog by clicking on the "OK" button.
7. Close the "Device configuration" menu by clicking on the "Close" button.
– The new X-ray component appears in the device list of the menu "Con-
figuration of the X-ray component" .
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 41
Alternatives to the boot service
As an alternative to adding new X-ray components via the boot service, you
also can add them via the "Automatic search" or "Add component manually"
functions.
Automatic search
1. Select the "Automatic search" element.
– The network is searched for existing X-ray components. All X-ray com-
ponents found appear in the menu list.
2. Select the desired X-ray component from the list.
– The values for the IP address, subnet mask and standard gateway are
automatically imported to the input fields of the menu.

cessfully.
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 42 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Adding the component manually
1.9
1. Select the "Add component manually" element.
2. Enter the values in the menu input fields manually.
båÖäáëÜ
1.9
cessfully.

1.9.3 Approval of the X-ray component

The X-ray component must have been selected via the "Device configuration"
menu.
1. Click on the check box in front of the X-ray component that you would like
to enable and accept the setting by clicking on the "Adopt" button.
– The X-ray component is enabled.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 43
Checking enablement 1. To check the communication with the unit, click the "Device info" button.
– If the unit is communicating, a logfile with information on the unit con-
figuration appears.
1.9.4 Deleting the X-ray component

1. Switch all networkable X-ray components off.
2. Start the "SIDEXIS Manager" under "Start" / "Programs" / "SIDEXIS" .
3. Click "Configuration of the X-ray components".
– The menu "Configuration of the X-ray components" opens.
4. Select the "Properties" tab.
5. From the pull-down menu "Name" select the name of the desired X-ray
component ("XG3D" in the example); then click on the "Delete compo-
nent" button.
6. The X-ray component is deleted from the device list of the menu "Config-
uration of the X-ray component" .
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 44 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 1 1.10 The most important modules and components
1.10 The most important modules and components
1.10
The X-ray system comprises the following main modules:
båÖäáëÜ
Slide with rotary unit
Stand
1.10
Cephalometer, arm on right side or on left side (optional)
Remote control (optional)
Slide
(See section 1.10.1)
Cephalometer,
arm on right side or on left
side
Remote control Stand

(See section 1.10.4) (See section 1.10.2)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 45
1.10 The most important modules and components Tab 1
1.10.1 Slide
DX11
MU M1*, M2*
LS
LS*
DX1
LS DX5*
M AK1, M AK2
A DX6*
DX81P*, DX85P*
B
Easypad (XGPlus / 3Dready)
DX61**
DX51***
DX7*
Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
DX71
*) not available as an individual spare part (see spare parts list)
**) not for XG 3 / 3 PPE, (fixed diaphragm)
***) only for XGPlus / 3Dready with occlusal bite block or OA ready units
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 46 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
1.10
Component Designation Function
båÖäáëÜ
Boards DX1 Open-loop/automatic control in general
DX11 Controller board
1.10
DX5* Headrest adapter
DX51*** Occlusal bite blocks (XGPlus / 3Dready with occlusal bite block or OA
ready units)
DX6* (A) Tube assembly Open-loop/automatic control for tube assembly

1.0
DX6* (B) Tube assembly

2.0
DX7* Touchscreen on the Easypad (XGPlus / 3Dready)
DX71 LED display on Multipad (XG 5)
DX61** Diaphragm control
DX81P* Digital sensor
DX85P* Digital sensor power supply
Motors M1*, M2* Linear movement of headrest
MU Rotary movement of rotating element
AK1, AK2 Linear movement of rotating element
Light barriers LS Position check
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 47
1.10 The most important modules and components Tab 1
1.10.2 Stand
M HV
DX32*
DX41**

Boards DX32* Power supply board
DX41** Interface board
Motors M HV Linear movement of height adjustment
* As of hardware version BA (from November 2006) new systems will be delivered with
the new version of board DX32 (see Section 1.9).
** As of hardware version BA (from November 2006) new systems will be delivered without
board DX41.
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 48 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
1.10.3 Cephalometer
1.10
(arm mounted on left side and on right side)
båÖäáëÜ
1.10
DX91
MS
LS

Boards DX91 Cephalometer control
Motors MS Stepping motors:

Linear movement of secondary dia-
phragm and sensor
Light barriers LS Position check
1.10.4 Remote control
DX42

Boards DX42 Display board for remote control
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 49
1.11 Cabling overview Tab 1
1.11 Cabling overview

1 DX1
4 5
DX6
2
Power switch
3 3
DX32 / X2
DX6 / X3
DX32
4 1
DX32 / X1
2
DX1 / X100
Line filter
5
DX1 / J302
DX6 / J6
6 Wago terminal
DX1 / J306 – J302
DX6 / J2 – J3
DX1
7 6
DX1 / J901
10
DX41
DX6
8* DX61
9
DX41 / X100
DX1 / X303
DX7/DX71
11
108*
8/108*
9
7
DX1 / X104
DX7 / X102
10
* as of unit hardware version BA
DX1 / X302
DX7 / X103
** Board DX 41 omitted in unit HW version

BA and higher
11
DX41**
DX61 / X501
DX1 / X102
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 50 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 1 1.11 Cabling overview
1.11
12 18
DX1
DX61 / X101
DX1 / X306
båÖäáëÜ
13
DX5
19
13
1.11
16
LSsensor
DX81
DX61
M HV
16
DX1 / X404
12
18
DX1 / X610
DX5 / X1
19
DX1 / X403
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 51
1.11 Cabling overview Tab 1
Potentiometer
17 DX1
DX91
31 21 21 MU 23
DX42 / X100
DX41 / X103
LS sensor
21
22/24*** /24***
117*
DX61
38
Laser module
21 DX81 35
DX61
DX42
22
DX91
23 17/117*
DX5
24***
25
DX41**
DX61
25 Media converter
* as of unit hardware version BA
** Board DX 41 omitted in unit HW version
Media Konverter
BA and higher
DX41
*** with ceph units with unit HW version BA and higher
31
35
DX81 / X100
38
DX1 / X503
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 52 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 1 1.11 Cabling overview
36
1.11
DX91 DX1
36 39
DX91 / X6
båÖäáëÜ
40
37
1.11
DX91 / X101
DX51
41
37
39
DX1 / X103
40
DX1 / X309
41
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 53
1.12 Illustrations of boards Tab 1
1.12 Illustrations of boards
1.12.1 Boards in the slide
Boards DX1 / DX11 Installed up to unit serial number:"
ORTHOPHOS XG 3 108.999
ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / Ceph 88.999
ORTHOPHOS XG 3Dready 28.999
ORTHOPHOS XG 3Dready / Ceph 48.999
To facilitate cable routing to the side, RJ 45 connectors with a 45° incline were introduced in August 2006.
X104 X402
DX1 J302
X403 J306
X611 X303 X302 X306 X309
X100 J307 X503 X307
X607
X103
X500
X102
X1000
X404
X804
X802
X803
X811
DX11
X812
X813
X610
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 54 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 1 1.12 Illustrations of boards
Boards DX1 / DX11 Installed as of unit serial number:"
1.12
båÖäáëÜ
1.12
ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / Ceph 89.000
ORTHOPHOS XG 3Dready 29.000
ORTHOPHOS XG 3Dready / Ceph 49.000
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 55
Board DX5
X7 X5 X3
X4 X6 X1 X2
Board DX51 (only XGPlus / 3Dready)
L1
X1
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 56 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Board DX6 in the X-ray tube assembly 1.0 (not available as a spare part)
1.12
X1 X305 X306 X2
båÖäáëÜ
1.12
J2
J3
J6
S2
X3
F201
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 57
Board DX6 in the X-ray tube assembly 2.0 (not available as a spare part)
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 58 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Board DX61 (not for XG 3/3 PPE)
1.12
X501
båÖäáëÜ
1.12
X101
X202
X203
X406 X405 X402 X401 X400 X201 X304 X303 X302 X301 X300 X200
Board DX7 (only XGPlus / 3Dready, not available as spare part)
i NOTE
Board DX7 is shown here only for enhanced clarity. The Easypad may be re-
placed only as a complete unit!
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 59
Board DX71 (only XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE, not available as a spare part)
X104 X106
X203
X202
X103 X102
i NOTE
Board DX71 is shown here only for enhanced clarity. The Multipad may be
replaced only as a complete unit!
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 60 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Boards DX81P / DX85P (not available as spare parts)
båÖäáëÜ 1.12
DX81
1.12
DX85
i NOTE
Boards DX81 and DX85 are shown here only for enhanced clarity.
CAUTION
It is not allowed to open the sensor! The sensor may be replaced only as
a complete unit!
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 61
1.12.2 Boards in the stand
Board DX32
X1 F100
X100
F101 F102 F103 X2
Board DX32
as of unit hardware version BA
(from November 2006)
X1 F100
X100
F101 F102 X2
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 62 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Board DX41
1.12
omitted as of unit hardware version BA
båÖäáëÜ
1.12
X100
X102 X104 X103
1.12.3 Boards in the cephalometer

(arm mounted on left side and on right side)
Board DX91
X308 X307 X306 X501
X101
X202
X407
X201 X304 X302
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 63
1.12.4 Boards in the remote control
Board DX42
V101
X100 X105
X200
V103
X201
X101
V100 X107
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 64 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Board DX42
1.12
as of unit hardware version BA
båÖäáëÜ
V101
1.12
X108 X105 Jumpers X109 and X110
X200
V103
X201
X101
V100 X107
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 1 – 65
1.13 Remove covers Tab 1
1.13 Remove covers
13
4
10
5
11
6
12
7
2
1
1. Profile cover
2. Intermediate piece
3. Arm cover, top
4. Slide cover, top rear
14
5. Slide cover, bottom rear
6. Support cover, top
7. Support cover, bottom
8. Tube assembly cover, front
9. Tube assembly cover, rear
10. Slide cover, center rear
11. Sensor holder cover
12. Slide cover, front complete
13. Ring cover
14. Cephalometer cover
59 38 399 D3352
1 – 66 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
ORTHOPHOS XG
2 Messages
Tab 2
Contents
2.1 Help messages .......................................................2 – 4
2.2 System messages ...................................................2 – 6
2.3 Status displays ........................................................2 – 6
2.4 Error messages .......................................................2 – 6

2.4.1 Ex yy zz................................................................ 2 – 7
2.4.2 Ex yy zz................................................................ 2 – 8
2.4.3 Ex yy zz ................................................................ 2 – 8
2.4.4 General handling of error messages .................... 2 – 8
2.5 List of error messages.............................................2 – 9
2.6 List of available service routines ...........................2 – 59
59 38 399 D3352
2–2 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 2
2 Messages
båÖäáëÜ
The different message texts are displayed...
For XGPlus / 3Dready: on the Easypad touchscreen
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: on the Multipad display
on the display of the remote control
There are 3 groups of message texts:
Help messages (Hx xx)

– Help messages are caused by operator errors
– The user must take action
Error messages (Ex yy zz)

– Error messages indicate system faults
– The user must take action to eliminate the fault(s)
System messages (Sxxx)

– System messages inform the user about the current operating
status of the system
– The user is not required to take action
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2–3
2.1 Help messages Tab 2
2.1 Help messages

Help messages are displayed as help codes (Hxxx) on the touchscreen of the
Easypad (XGPlus / 3Dready), on the display of the Multipad (XG5/3/3 PPE) or
on the remote control display (if available). The codes tell you how to operate
the system if radiation release is not possible due to a previous operator error.
The following list provides you with an overview of all help codes, their mean-
ing and the action required to eliminate the corresponding problems:
Help code Description Actions required

H3 01 The rotating element on the panoramic unit is Press the R key:
not located in its starting position. Panoramic unit moves to starting position.
H3 10 The system is performing an action. Wait until the system is ready.
H3 20 The exposure parameters have not been Press the R key:
acknowledged yet. Exposure data are confirmed.
H3 21 The X-ray room door contact is not detected. Close the door or check door contact.
H3 22 Quadrant for TSA exposure is not selected. Select quadrant via Easypad.
(only for XGPlus)
H3 30 Indicates number of exposures remaining Request new activation code via Sirona
(XG 3 PPE only) (PPE concept). Customer Service Center (CSC) in due
time.
1. After each power-up (see S017.22)
2. After each exposure if the number of expo-
sures remaining is below the defined warning
level (see S017.23)
H3 31 No further exposures available. Enter new "activation code".
(XG 3 PPE only)
H4 01 The sensor on the panoramic unit is not properly Plug sensor into PAN slot.
plugged in or is missing.
i NOTE
If this message does not disappear after the
sensor is plugged in, this indicates a system er-
ror. Perform error diagnostics according to Sec-
tion 3.2.
H4 02 The sensor on the cephalometer is not properly Plug sensor into Ceph slot.
plugged in or is missing.
i NOTE
If this message does not disappear after the
sensor is plugged in, this indicates a system er-
ror. Perform error diagnostics according to Sec-
tion 3.2.
H4 03 SIDEXIS is not ready for exposure. Make SIDEXIS ready for exposure.
H4 04 The sensor does not match the selected expo- Plug in the ceph sensor.
sure type
H4 05 The sensor does not match the selected expo- Plug in the TSA sensor.
sure type
H4 06 The cephalometer is not located in its starting Press the R key:
position. Cephalometer moves to starting position.
H4 07 Unit uses default settings for this exposure, Perform alternative program setting.
since the settings specified by SIDEXIS cannot
be taken over.
59 38 399 D3352
2–4 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 2 2.1 Help messages
Help code Description Actions required

H4 10 The sensor is being queried. Wait until the message disappears.
båÖäáëÜ
H4 20 The image could not be transferred to SIDEXIS. Retrieve the exposure with SiRescue (see
SIDEXIS Operator’s Manual).
CAUTION
Do not switch the system off until the help mes-
sage has disappeared.
2.1
i NOTE
The above measures clear those help messages that result from operator er-
rors. If it is not possible to clear the help message by taking the above mea-
sures, another type of error is the cause. To identify the error, proceed as de-
scribed in section 2.5.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2–5
2.2 System messages Tab 2
2.2 System messages
System code Description Actions required

S100 ORTHOPHOS XG is started Wait, no action required
S110 Exposure cannot be performed. Quit readiness for exposure,
switch unit OFF, wait for 1 minute, switch
unit back ON and observe error messages
displayed after switch-on.
Repeat procedure if necessary
2.3 Status displays
Status displays Description

(only for XGPlus / 3Dready)
Ready for exposure The unit is ready for operation.
Please wait The unit waiting for operational readiness.
Ready for exposure in XX seconds The cooling time countdown is running.
Exposure in progress Radiation is released.
2.4 Error messages

Error messages are displayed as error codes (Ex yy zz) on the touchscreen
of the Easypad (XGPlus / 3Dready), on the display of the Multipad (XG5 / 3 / 3
PPE) or on the remote control display (if available).
The codes provide you with error type, error location and troubleshooting
information.
Error code: Ex yy zz The error messages are encoded according to the following pattern:
Ex yy zz
Error type Location Sequential number
“Troubleshooting” Module, subsystem or logi- with identification

classification for the cal function unit of the error
The error messages are sorted by modules in the table on page 2-7.
59 38 399 D3352
2–6 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 2 2.4 Error messages
2.4.1 Ex yy zz
Identifier x is supposed to help you quickly reach a decision on how to pro-
båÖäáëÜ
ceed with this error.
x Description Error group Actions required

1 System warning; This error group includes all errors that indi- Acknowledge the error message to con-
System message cate still acceptable tolerance variations, or tinue system operation. If the error oc-
messages about states which do not directly curs repeatedly, switch the system OFF
affect system operation. and back ON.
2.4
If the error occurs again: Identify the error
by proceeding as described in section
2.5.
2 Errors caused by sys- This error group includes states that indicate Acknowledge the error message.
tem overload e.g. temporary excess temperatures or the Repeat the procedure step after a certain
like. The cause of the error disappears waiting time.
automatically after a certain waiting time.
– If the error message reappears: Ex-
tend the waiting time.
– If the error state persists: Identify the
error by proceeding as described in
section 2.5.
3 The system detects This error group includes all errors that indi- Switch the unit off and on again.
that a key was pressed cate invalid signal states of keys and safety If the error occurs again, identify the error
during power-on signals during power-on. by proceeding as described in section
2.5.
4 Malfunction or This error group includes all errors that indi- Acknowledge the error message and
mechanical obstruction cate problems with the motor-controlled make sure that the movements of the unit
of unit movements movements on the outside of the unit. are not obstructed.
Repeat the last procedure step or expo-
sure. If the error reoccurs without any
identifiable cause: Identify the error by
proceeding as described in section 2.5.
5 Malfunction during the This error group includes all errors resulting Acknowledge the error message.
exposure or during from a certain system action triggered by the Repeat the last procedure step or expo-
exposure preparation user which could not be performed because sure. If the error occurs again: Identify
a required (internal) partial function (soft- the error by proceeding as described in
ware or hardware) is not ready or fails. section 2.5.
6 Error during system This error group includes all errors which Acknowledge the error message.
self-test may occur spontaneously and without any Identify the error by proceeding as de-
related operator action. They may be scribed in section 2.5.
caused by system self-tests.
Note:
Further operation of the unit is possible.
7 Unrecoverable sys- This error group includes all errors which Identify the error by proceeding as de-
tem error may occur spontaneously and without any scribed in section 2.5.
related operator action. They may be
caused by system self-tests. In this case it is
absolutely sure that continued system oper-
ation is not possible.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2–7
2.4 Error messages Tab 2
2.4.2 Ex yy zz
Identifier yy defines the location or logical function unit where the error has
occurred.
yy Location/Function unit Board

06 Tube assembly DX6
61 Diaphragm control (not for XG 3/3 PPE, fixed diaphragm) DX61
Plus ready
07 User interface on the Easypad (XG / 3D ) DX7
71 User interface on the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) DX71
10 System hardware DX11 / DX1
11 System software DX11 / DX1
12 CAN bus DX11 / DX1
13 Stand peripherals DX11 / DX1
14 Digital extension DX11 / DX1
15 Configuration/update (wrong software, wrong module constellation, etc.) DX11 / DX1
41 Media interface card (omitted as of HW version BA, November 2006) DX41
42 Remote control DX42
81 Sensor (Pan slot: zz=1-23 ; ceph slot: zz= 51-73) DX81
91 Cephalometer DX91
The location may be a DX module number standing for an entire HW function

unit, or a logical SW function unit on board DX11 (central control).
2.4.3 Ex yy zz
The identifier zz represents a consecutive number with the error
identification.
2.4.4 General handling of error messages

Error messages must always be acknowledged with the R key.
If trouble-free operation is possible after the error is acknowledged, then no
further action is necessary.
If error messages reoccur or occur frequently, identify the error as described
in section 2.5 and take appropriate action to eliminate the corresponding error
or fault.
In some cases, it may make sense to obtain more information on the history
and frequency of errors via the error logging memory (S007) and DETAILS
(see section 1.8, on page 1-37) (see also section 3.1).
59 38 399 D3352
2–8 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 2 2.5 List of error messages
2.5 List of error messages
båÖäáëÜ
NOTE
In the following table, the error codes are sorted by the location or function unit
where the error has occurred. For enhanced clarity, the corresponding ID in
the error code is printed in bold type.
Location 06: Tube assembly / DX6 board
2.5
Error code Description Actions required see page
E6 06 01 General error during module initializa- Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-27
tion Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by
means of a software update is possible and per-
form such an update if necessary.
If the error occurs frequently, 6-48
replace the X-ray tube assembly
E6 06 02 Invalid system data or uninitialized Perform service routine S005.2 6-33
module storage data Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-27
Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by
E6 06 03 Invalid commanding of control data, Check the CAN bus 3-6
CAN bus error Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-27
Note: means of a software update is possible and per-
This error may also occur in connec- form such an update if necessary.
tion with other causal error messages!
Please also observe the causal error
message! It appears only after you
acknowledge the first error message.
E6 06 04 Data transfer error or dialog error to Check the CAN bus 3-6
module (master side) Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-27
E6 06 05 Data transfer error or dialog error to Repeat software update 1-27
bootloader of module Check the CAN bus 3-6
Note: If the error occurs repeatedly or the module is 6-48
Occurs only in connection with soft- no longer addressable,
ware update Replace the X-ray tube assembly
E6 06 06 Module failed in TTP* Check the CAN bus 3-6
(detected on master side) Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-27
tion with other causal error messages.
Please also observe the causal error If the error occurs repeatedly or the module is 6-48
message! It appears only after you no longer addressable,
acknowledge the first error message. Replace the X-ray tube assembly
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2–9
2.5 List of error messages Tab 2

E6 06 07 TTP* timeout error Check the CAN bus 3-6
(detected on slave side) Check power supply of board DX11; measuring
Note: point 3.3 V on board DX1 (see wiring diagrams).
The module was temporarily not – If 3.3V present, replace board 6-73
addressed by the master: DX11
- Undervoltage on the master side – If 3.3V not present, replace board 6-73
- Procedure error in the software DX11
- Master (DX11) receives no
– Check cable L6, 3-18
Return commanding from the module
replace if necessary 6-101
Note:
This error may also occur in connec- – Check tube assembly (DX6)
tion with other causal error messages! replace if necessary 6-48
E6 06 08 General fault detected locally on mod- Check the CAN bus 3-6
ule (slave side). CAN controller being Check software versions via info screen or ser- 5-53
reinitialized. vice routine S008.2,
if necessary, perform a software update 1-27
Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-27
Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-48
E7 06 10 Module is stuck in bootloader stage Check board DX6 (note LED states) 3-12
If the board remains in the bootloader stage...
Repeat software update 1-27
E7 06 12 Unit is not ready for operation Check the CAN bus 3-6
Note: If this error occurs in combination with other errors
This error may also occur in connec-
System restart:
tion with other causal error messages!
Switch the unit off. Wait 1 minute.
Switch the unit ON.
acknowledge the first error message. Repeat procedure and observe causal error
messages.
E6 06 13 Error when writing to EEPROM Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
Note: If the error occurs again...

Stored data may be lost Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-48
E2 06 20 Overtemperature of single tank/power Wait until the X-ray tube assembly has cooled
pack down.
Check fan function using service routine 5-35
S005.4;
if necessary, Replacing fan 6-53
Check temperature sensor in single tank 5-37
Check service routine S005.5,
if necessary, Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-48
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 10 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

E6 06 21 Hardware signal of release button not Check cable L5 (fiber optic cable), 3-18
detected
båÖäáëÜ
Replacing board DX1 6-73
E6 06 22 Broken temperature sensor Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-48
E3 06 23 Hardware signal of release button Check cable L5:
2.5
applied during power-on – Switch the unit off.
– Pull cable L5 off of tube assembly
– Switch on the unit
– Perform optical check of L5:
- If light is visible: Replacing board DX1 6-73
- If no light is visible, replace the tube as- 6-48
sembly
E5 06 30 Total radiation time exceeded If a CAN bus error had been reported before...
Check the CAN bus 3-6
E5 06 31 Partial radiation time exceeded If a CAN bus error had been reported before...
E5 06 32 Minimum preheating time not If a CAN bus error had been reported before...
observed Check the CAN bus 3-6
E1 06 40 Tolerance exceeded: Preheating (VH) Perform service routine S005.2 5-33
- nom. Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-48
E1 06 41 Tolerance exceeded: kV - nom. Perform service routine S005.2 5-33
E1 06 42 Tolerance exceeded: mA - nom. Perform service routine S005.2 5-33
E1 06 43 Tolerance exceeded: Preheating (VH) Perform service routine S005.2 5-33
- act. Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-48
E1 06 44 Tolerance exceeded: kV - act. Perform service routine S005.2 5-33
E1 06 45 Tolerance exceeded: mA - act. Perform service routine S005.2 5-33
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 11

E6 06 50 Undervoltage in intermediate circuit Check fuse F201 on board DX6 (see wiring dia-
(400 V) grams), replace if necessary
Check cable L3 (tube assembly), 3-18
Check electronic fuse on board DX32:
– Switch the unit off.
– Wait for at least 7 minutes (due to electronic
fuse)
– Switch unit back ON
– Functional test
If the error occurs again...
Check board DX32, 3-12
E6 06 51 VHmax Perform service routine S005.2 5-33
E6 06 52 MAmax Perform service routine S005.2 5-33
E6 06 53 KVmax Perform service routine S005.2 5-33
E6 06 55 Anode voltage too low Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-48
E7 06 54 Basic heating pulses not applied Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-48
E6 06 56 Error during auto-compensation Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-27
Let the tube assembly cool down for approx. 30
min and repeat this procedure.
*) TTP = Time Trigger Protocol
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 12 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Location 07 (XGPlus / 3Dready): Easypad / board DX7
båÖäáëÜ
Check user interface with electronics (DX7) or 3-12
2.5
Replace Easypad 6-26
E6 07 02 Invalid system data or uninitialized Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-27
module storage data Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by
Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
E6 07 03 Invalid commanding or control data Check the CAN bus 3-6
Note: Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-27
This error may also occur in connec- Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by
tion with other causal error messages. means of a software update is possible and per-
Please also observe the causal error form such an update if necessary.
Note: Check user interface with electronics (DX7) or 6-73
Occurs only in connection with
software update to Replace Easypad 6-26
Note: Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by
This error may also occur in connec- means of a software update is possible and per-
tion with other causal error messages. form such an update if necessary.
Please also observe the causal error Replace Easypad 6-26
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 13

addressed by the master: DX11
- Procedure error in the software DX11
Note:
E7 07 10 Module is stuck in bootloader stage Check user interface with electronics (DX7) 3-12
(observe LED statuses)
E7 07 12 Unit is not ready for operation. Check the CAN bus 3-6
Note: This error is a sequential fault.
Therefore, the error can only be dis-
System restart:
played on the remote control (DX42).
Switch the unit ON.
Repeat procedure and observe causal error
messages.
E6 07 20 Contact to DX11 interrupted during Note error message on remote control (DX42)
operation. and check log memory (via details).
Check cable L9, 3-18
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 14 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

E7 07 21 No CAN bus connection. Start detail query
DX11 does not start.
båÖäáëÜ
If DX11 responds...
Note: Check signal path to DX7,
Occurs in the start screen after power-
on. if necessary, repair or replace cable/connector 6-101
Replace DX1 6-73
If DX11 does not respond ...
2.5
Replace DX11 6-73
E3 07 30 Height adjustment keys actuated dur- System restart:
ing power-on Switch the unit off. Wait 1 minute.
Switch unit ON, making sure that the Easypad
E3 07 31 Forehead support key pressed during
is not actuated during boot-up.
power-on
E3 07 32 Temple support keys actuated during If the error occurs again...
power-on Check user interface with electronics (DX7) or
E3 07 33 Light localizer key actuated during 6-73
Replace Easypad
power-on 6-26
E3 07 34 Test key actuated during power-on
E3 07 35 Return key actuated during power-on
E3 07 36 Touchscreen actuated during power-
on
E6 07 40 No valid language set found Check selected language set using service rou- 5-93
tine S017.5, correct if necessary
i 1-27
NOTE
Check whether selected language set is already in-
stalled, perform software update if necessary.

59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 15
Location 10: System hardware

E7 10 01 EEPROM cannot be written. Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
Replace board DX11 6-73
E7 10 02 FPGA* of DX1 is not addressable. Replace board DX1 6-73
E1 10 03 The flash file system must be format- Acknowledge error
ted.
i NOTE
Note: The flash file system is formatted and error message
Occurs after replacement of board E1_10_04 is displayed.
DX11.
E1 10 04 Flash file system formatting in prog- Wait until the message automatically disap-
ress. pears (approx. 2 - 3 min.)
E1 10 05 Flash file system is not ready for oper- Run service routine S009.4 and 5-61
ation. Format flash file system
i NOTE
The contents of the error memory are thus lost.

*) FPGA = Field Programmable Gate Array
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 16 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Location 11: Power PC, board DX11
båÖäáëÜ
E6 11 01 Program sequence error Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-27
means of a software update is possible and
perform such an update if necessary.
2.5
Reset the entire unit adjustment (Pan, Ceph, 4-3
TSA) and readjust the unit
E6 11 02 Watchdog error Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
E6 11 03 Operating system/resource error Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
E7 11 04 Implausible data in EEPROM Check the device configuration via service rou- 5-84, 5-121
tines S017 and S018 and reconfigure if neces-
sary
Check adjustment with diaphragm test expo- 7-20
sures
If the adjustment is not OK...
Readjust the unit 4-3
If the adjustment is OK...
perform the individual system settings again
(e.g. programming of the patient symbol keys;
see operating instructions)
E6 11 05 RAM allocation failed Replace board DX11 6-73
E5 11 06 Only for XGPlus / 3Dready:Error when Pay attention to accompanying error messag-
processing the control image following es
exposure. (E xx, etc.). Proceed according to the descrip-
(Note: Following the scan, the control tion for these error messages.
image is displayed on the Easypad as Check the image data path 3-26
a quick view.)
Check cable 3-18
The error usually occurs when there if necessary, Replace cable 6-101
are problems with the image data path.
Replace sensor 6-61
It appears along with other error mes-
sages from this area (e.g. with E6 14 Replace board DX1 6-73
10, E6 14 11, E6 14 12)
E7 11 07 Unknown or invalid definition of system Perform actions required according to Chapter 6-73
class "Replacing circuit boards".
Note:
Occurs during first power-on after
replacement of board DX6 or DX11.
E7 11 08 The user interface connected to this Install the user interface compliant with the 6-26
unit does is not compliant with the system class configuration of this unit
unit's system class configuration
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 17

E5 11 09 Internal error in program flow of board Acknowledge error
DX11
Perform a software update (bug fix) 1-27
E1 11 10 The system is operating with default Read out log memory and take the appropriate
settings; exposure is possible actions
Note: Readjust the unit 4-3

If this error occurs in combination with If the error occurs again...
errors E6 61 02, E6 91 02 or E7 11 04
Replace the defective module (DX61, DX91 or 6-5
(see error logging memory), these
DX11).
additional errors provide an indication
of the module involved.
E7 11 11 Incorrect device configuration Check the device configuration via service rou- 5-85
tine S017.2 and reconfigure if necessary
E7 11 12 Internal error in data management of If the error occurs after a module has been
board DX11 replaced...
Request "Details" to find out more and coordi-
nate all further action with the Sirona Customer
Service Center.
If no module has been replaced...
Switch the unit off, wait for 30 seconds,
and then switch it back on.
Check software versions via info screen or ser- 5-53
vice routine S008.2,
Perform a software update (bug fix) 1-27
E6 11 13 Up to unit hardware version AG: see section entitled "Error analysis of X-RAY 3-19
Short circuit in radiation release signal control signal path: up to unit hardware version
path between board DX42 and board AG (with board DX41)"
DX41 (cable L17).
The release signal was detected on
boards DX11 and DX41, but not on
board DX42.
From system version BA (from 11/
2006):
Short circuit in radiation release signal
path between board DX42 and board
DX11 (cables L117 and L108).
board DX11, but not on board DX42
E7 11 14 Wrong remote control for this unit Install the correct remote control.
If necessary, obtain a new remote control from
i NOTE the manufacturer.
This error message blocks all unit func- (A remote control from
tions. Work is possible at the unit again GALILEOS or from an outside manufacturer
after the remote control is unplugged might have been connected)
and the unit is switched off and on
again.
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 18 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

E1 11 18 Calibration of the occlusal bite block is Perform service routine S18.9. 5-134
required
båÖäáëÜ
If necessary, perform customer-specific angle 5-130
settings via service routine S18.7.
E1 11 88 The unit is set to the demo mode If the user mode is expressly required...
Note: Switching the demo mode OFF 1-11

Occurs when the unit is switched on.
CAUTION
2.5
Radiation can be released after the demo mode is
switched off!
Location 12: CAN bus

E6 12 01 CAN controller init error on DX1 Check the CAN bus 3-6
E6 12 02 CAN malfunction (cannot be assigned Check the CAN bus 3-6
to module)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 19
Location 13: Stand, peripherals

E4 13 01 Actuator 1 has not reached pan home Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
position smooth and easy running.
In case of stiffness...
Manually reset the actuators to the zero position
and run a test cycle via P1.
Check light barrier V1_1 (X802) with service 5-81
routine S015.5,
if necessary, Replace light barrier, 6-62
Check electric drive and jolt-free running with 5-81
service routine S015.5 (free travel),
Replace the actuators and/or spindles and 6-22
if necessary, Replace board DX1 6-73
E4 13 02 Actuator 1 has not left pan home posi- Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
tion smooth and easy running.
routine S015.5,
E5 13 03 Malfunction of actuator 1 Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
during operation smooth and easy running.
routine S015.5,
E4 13 04 Actuator 1; position counter error Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
smooth and easy running.
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 20 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

båÖäáëÜ
routine S015.5,
if necessary, Light barrier if necessary 6-62
2.5
E6 13 05 Actuator 1 is not ready for operation This error is a sequential fault.
System restart:
Switch the unit ON.
messages.
E6 13 07 Error when activating actuator 1 System restart:
Switch the unit on and test it for proper function-
ing.
E4 13 11 Actuator 2 has not reached pan home Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
position smooth and easy running.
routine S015.5,
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 21

E4 13 12 Actuator 2 has not left pan home posi- Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
tion smooth and easy running.
routine S015.5,
E5 13 13 Malfunction of actuator 2 Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
during operation smooth and easy running.
routine S015.5,
E4 13 14 Actuator 2; Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
Position counter error smooth and easy running.
routine S015.5,
E6 13 15 Actuator 2 is not ready for operation This error is a sequential fault.
System restart:
Switch the unit ON.
messages.
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 22 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

E6 13 17 Error when activating actuator 2 System restart:
båÖäáëÜ
ing.
2.5
E4 13 21 Ring motor has not reached pan home Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
position smooth and easy running,
if necessary, Reset actuators to zero position if
necessary.
Check the ring drive mechanism manually for
smooth and easy running,
if necessary, Replace the ring motor or mecha- 6-19
nism.
routine S014.4,
service routine S014.3,
E4 13 22 Ring motor has not left pan home Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
necessary.
nism.
routine S014.4,
E5 13 23 Malfunction of ring motor Acknowledge error
during operation
E4 13 24 Ring motor; Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
Position counter error smooth and easy running,
necessary.
nism.
routine S014.4,
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 23

E4 13 25 Ring motor has not reached ceph Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
home position smooth and easy running,
necessary.
nism.
routine S014.4,
E4 13 26 Ring motor has not left ceph home Check the actuator mechanisms manually for
necessary.
nism.
routine S014.4,
E6 13 27 Ring motor is not ready for operation This error is a sequential fault.
System restart:
Switch the unit ON.
messages.
E6 13 28 Error when activating ring motor System restart:
ing.
messages
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 24 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

E4 13 30 No height adjustment motor pulses Check cable L16 (X402), 3-18
båÖäáëÜ
Check filter between HA motor and L16
(acc. to circuit diagram on filter)
(ohmic and voltage).
2.5
replace if necessary
Check height adjustment motor incl. pulse gen- 3-15
erator,
E5 13 31 Unit has traveled to upper limit switch Check max. travel height with service routine 5-122
S018.2, adjust if necessary
Run HA motor in the other direction with the UP/
DOWN keys and reference (value approx.
1500)
Check light barriers V1_4 3-16
Check HA motor for overtravel,
if necessary, Replace DX1 6-73
Check the limit switch or wiring,
correct or replace the limit switch if necessary
E5 13 32 Unit has traveled to lower limit switch Run HA motor in the other direction with the UP/ 5-122
DOWN keys and reference (value approx.
1500)
Check light barriers V1_4 3-16
Check HA motor for overtravel,
Check the limit switch or wiring,
correct or replace the limit switch if necessary
E5 13 33 Height adjustment motor position Run HA motor in the other direction with the UP/
counter too small for current position DOWN keys and reference (value approx.
1500)
Note:
Check max. travel height using service routine 5-122
Error may occur after replacement of
S018.2, adjust if necessary
board (DX11)
Check light barriers V1_4, 3-16
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 25

E5 13 34 Height adjustment motor position Run HA motor in the other direction with the UP/
counter too large for current position DOWN keys on the Easypad (XGPlus / 3Dready)
or the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) and reference
Note: (value approx. 1500)
Error may occur after replacement of
Check light barriers V1_4, 3-16
board (DX11)
i 5-125
NOTE
As an aid, the latest switching state can be queried
through the service routine S018.4.
E5 13 35 Height adjustment motor; Check connector assignment on filter or in front

wrong direction of rotation of HA motor,
correct if necessary
E5 13 36 Software signal of key is applied, but Check cables L9 and L10, 3-18
hardware signal is not replace if necessary 6-101
Check limit switches SE1_1 and SE1_2, 7-4
Replacing the user interface 6-26
(Easypad for XGPlus / 3Dready,
Multipad for XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
E7 13 37 Overtravel of HA motor occurs or Check HA motor for overtravel,
height adjustment power transistor if necessary, Replace board DX1 6-73
defective
System restart:
ing.
E6 13 38 Height adjustment motor is not ready This error is a sequential fault.
for operation
System restart:
Switch the unit ON.
messages.
E6 13 39 Error when activating height adjust- System restart:
ment motor Switch the unit off. Wait 1 minute.
ing.
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 26 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

E3 13 40 Release signal applied during power- System restart:
on. Switch the unit off. Wait 1 minute.
båÖäáëÜ
Switch on the unit, making sure that the release
button is not pressed during booting.
Check the X-ray signal path 3-19
E5 13 41 Release signal not applied on DX11 Check signal path for interruption according to
2.5
wiring diagrams, replace component if neces-
sary
Deactivate remote control with service routine 5-93
S017.6; connect release button directly to DX41
(instead of cable L17) and check for proper
functioning
Check release button
If the release button is functioning...
If the release button is not functioning...
E6 13 42 The hardware signal for radiation Check the X-ray signal path 3-19
release is applied on board DX1 dur-
ing unit operation even when no actu-
ated X-RAY release button is reported
via the CAN bus.
E5 13 43 The door was opened during the Check the X-ray signal path 3-19
exposure.
E5 13 50 Forehead support; has not left home Check light barriers V5_1 to V5_4, 3-16
position despite movement pulses if necessary, replace head support / 6-24
light barrier 6-62
E4 13 51 Forehead support; has not left home Check motor M5_1, 3-15
position and no motor movement if necessary, Replace headrest 6-24
Check light barriers V5_1 to V5_4, 3-16
if necessary, replace head support / 6-24
light barrier 6-62
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 27

E5 13 52 Forehead support; has left home posi- Check light barriers V5_1 to V5_4, 3-16
tion without detected movement if necessary, replace head support / 6-24
pulses
light barrier 6-62
E5 13 53 Forehead support; system does not Check headrest mechanics,
block within setting range replace if necessary 6-24
E6 13 54 Forehead support is not ready for This error is a sequential fault.
operation
System restart:
Switch the unit ON.
messages.
E6 13 57 Error when activating forehead sup- System restart:
port motor Switch the unit off. Wait 1 minute.
ing.
Check headrest mechanics,
E6 13 58 Error when activating forehead sup- Acknowledge error
port motor.
Timeout of FPGA* module on board Replace board DX1 6-73
DX1.
E4 13 59 Forehead support drive defective Replace headrest 6-24
E5 13 60 Temple supports; have not left home Check light barriers V5_1 to V5_4, 3-16
position despite movement pulses if necessary, replace head support / 6-24
Replace light barrier, 6-62
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 28 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

E4 13 61 Temple supports; have not left home Check motor M5_2, 3-15
position and no motor movement
båÖäáëÜ
if necessary, Replace headrest 6-24
Check light barriers V5_1 to V5_4, 3-16
if necessary, replace head support / 6-24
2.5
E5 13 62 Temple supports; have left home posi- Check light barriers V5_1 to V5_4, 3-16
tion without detected movement if necessary, replace head support / 6-24
pulses
E5 13 63 Temple supports; system does not Check headrest mechanics, replace if neces- 6-24
block within setting range sary
E6 13 64 Temple supports are not ready for This error is a sequential fault.
operation
System restart:
Switch the unit ON.
messages.
E6 13 67 Error when activating temple support System restart:
motor Switch the unit off. Wait 1 minute.
ing.
Check headrest mechanics,
E6 13 68 Error when activating temple support Acknowledge error
motor
Timeout of FPGA* module on board Replace board DX1 6-73
DX1.
E4 13 69 Forehead support drive defective Replace headrest 6-24
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 29

E6 13 70 Cables for bite block electronics not Check cabling and plug connection. 5-132
connected
i NOTE
Service routine S018.8 can be used for support.
E1 13 71 Signal error for angle acquisition Readjust the values via service routine S18.9 5-134
(incorrect ADC values) Replace board DX51 in the bite block holder 6-73
E6 13 72 Malfunction of the bite block electron-
i 5-132
ics or cabling NOTE
Service routine S018.8 can be used for support.
Replace board DX51 in the bite block holder 6-73

E5 13 73 Malfunction of height adjustment Acknowledge error
during operation System restart:
ing.
If the error occurs repeatedly...
E5 13 83 Error while generating pulse for sen- System restart:
sor Switch the unit off. Wait 1 minute.
ing.
If the error occurs repeatedly...
E6 13 87 Error when activating pulse genera- System restart:
tion Switch the unit off. Wait 1 minute.
ing.
*) FPGA = Field Programmable Gate Array
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 30 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Location 14: Digital extension, SIDEXIS XG
båÖäáëÜ
E5 14 01 Cancellation caused by SIDEXIS XG Check network connection, SIDEXIS installa- 5-53
tion and software version
E7 14 02 Interface version not compatible with Check software versions of unit (S008.2) and 5-53
SIDEXIS XG. SIDEXIS XG and, if necessary,
perform a software update 1-27
E6 14 03 Inappropriate or incorrect data input Send in Xab.ini and raw image of last exposure
2.5
from SIDEXIS XG to the Customer Service Center (CSC) (check
the binning setting) and coordinate with CSC
E5 14 04 The network connection was inter- Acknowledge error and quit service domain
rupted from unit and SIDEXIS end.
Switch unit OFF and ON again and reselect SI-
Note:
DEXIS.
This error often occurs if SIDEXIS is
selected before the unit is ready for If the error occurs again...
selection.
Perform network diagnostics in coordination
with the Sirona Customer Service Center and
check the setting of the network card in coordi-
nation with the Sirona CSC if necessary.
(Checksum offload for patient names with
15 characters for several network cards (prefer-
ably for onboard systems))
Check and, if necessary, replace network com-
ponents (PC network card, Cat5 cable, hub/
switch/router, media converter, L25/26)
Check software versions of unit (info screen or 5-53
service routine S008.2) and of SIDEXIS XG and
E6 14 05 Service of DHCP server is not avail- Have network configuration of dental practice
able. checked by the administrator in charge
Ensure proper functioning of the DHCP server
E6 14 06 The bootline of board DX11 had to be Reconfiguration of network data via sixab-
preassigned with default values. con.exe required.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 31

E6 14 10 Clock signals for sensor image trans- Acknowledge error and, if possible, check func- 3-26
fer not received on board DX1/DX11 tion at another slot (PAN/CEPH) via test image
(...10). (PAN/CEPH).
E6 14 11 Faulty detection of sensor image

If both test images indicate the 5-148
transfer data signals on board DX1/
error...
DX11; nonrecurring (...11)
- Check image signal on board DX1 6-73
E6 14 12 Faulty detection of sensor image (does the image LED on DX1 switch on
transfer data signals on board DX1/ when the ring cycle starts in the test im-
DX11; recurring (...12) age mode?),
if necessary, Replace DX1
If only the PAN test image 6-101

is not OK...
- Check cable L13 for bruises and
breaks as well as connectors and repair 6-73
or
5-148
replace
- Check board DX1, replace if necessary 6-101
- Run service routine S032.10.
In this way, it can be determined whether
the
Fault is stationary or permanent; replace
sensor or cable if necessary.
If only the CEPH test image 3-18

is not OK... 6-101
5-152
For E06 14 10 and Ceph exposure:
- Check board DX91 and cables (L37, 6-101
L40),
3-18
the
6-101
sensor or cable if necessary. 6-73
Otherwise: 5-152
- Check cable L35/L38 for bruises and
6-101
breaks as well as plugs,
repair or replace if necessary
- Check board DX1, replace if necessary
the
sensor or cable if necessary.
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 32 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Location 15: Configuration, update
båÖäáëÜ
E7 15 01 Wrong memory modules. If a DRAM memory module is plugged into board
DX11...
Replace memory module or DX11 6-73
If no DRAM memory module is plugged into board
DX11...
Replace DX11 6-73
2.5
E7 15 02 Wrong module constellation for this Refer to list of software versions
unit. Check to make sure the correct modules are in-
Incompatible modules were used. stalled (e.g. after replacing modules)
Contact the Sirona Customer Service Center
(CSC)
E7 15 03 Wrong software constellation of mod- Check software versions of unit (info screen or 5-53
ules. service routine S008.2) and of SIDEXIS XG and
if necessary, Perform or repeat software update 1-27

or downgrade
E6 15 04 Product activation keys invalid or not Execute service routine S008.4 and confirm the 5-59
available. existing activation profile of the unit.
Note:
Occurs after replacement of tube
assembly (DX6) or DX11 and possibly
after software updates.
See also chapter "Measures following
replacement of boards" starting on
page 6-77.
E6 15 05 Unit serial number invalid or not avail- Execute service routine S008.3 and confirm or 5-55
able. enter the unit serial number at the unit.
Note:
Occurs during first power-on after
replacement of board DX6 or DX11.
See also chapter "Measures following
replacement of boards" starting on
page 6-77.
E6 15 06 Wrong or invalid manufacturer code Replace board DX11 6-73
on an module was detected. Replacing the X-ray tube assembly 6-48
E6 15 07 The user interface or the remote con- Install the correct user interface or remote con-
trol is not compatible with the unit. trol.
If necessary, obtain a new user interface or re-
i NOTE mote control from the manufacturer.
An ORTHOPHOS XG5 (Multipad) or
XGPlus / 3Dready (Easypad) as well as
an ORTHOPHOS remote control must
be installed.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 33
E6 15 10 Update file for module is corrupt Obtain current update file from the Sirona CSC 1-27
and perform software update via the SIRONA
home page
Location 41: Media interface card Board DX41 is omitted as of unit hardware version BA
(See page 1-34).

E6 41 01 General module initialization error If the error is a software error known to the 1-27
SIRONA Customer Service Center, a software
update (bugfix) must be performed
E6 41 02 Invalid system data or uninitialized If the error is a software error known to the 1-27
module storage data SIRONA Customer Service Center, a software
update (bugfix) must be performed
Note: Replace board DX41 6-73
software update to
(detected on master side) Replace board DX41 6-73
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 34 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

(detected on slave side)
båÖäáëÜ
Check power supply of board DX11; measuring
addressed by the master: replace
- Procedure error in the software replace
2.5
Note:
E6 41 09 Board DX41 is installed in the unit, but Perform device configuration via service routine 5-98
not configured S017.9
E7 41 10 Module is stuck in bootloader stage Check operating status of board 3-12
E7 41 12 Unit is not ready for operation This error is a sequential fault.
System restart:
Switch the unit ON.
Check unit configuration (with or without DX41) 5-98
via service routine S017.9,
Configure correctly if necessary 5-98
messages.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 35

E3 41 20 Release signal applied during power- System restart:
on Switch the unit off. Wait 1 minute.
Switch on the unit, making sure that the release
button is not pressed during booting.
Check signal path for short-circuit according to
wiring diagrams (see section "Error analysis of
X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware
version AG (with board DX41)"),
if necessary, replace component
E6 41 21 CAN bus connection to board DX41 Check cable L17, 3-18
interrupted. replace if necessary 6-101
Board DX41 cannot address board Check board DX42, 3-12
DX42 via the separate CAN bus con-
nection. replace if necessary 6-73
E6 41 23 Hardware fault at controller input on see Section "Error analysis of X-RAY control 3-19
board DX41. signal path: up to unit hardware version AG
(with board DX41)"
Board DX41 detects a wrong signal
level of the hardware signal for radia-
tion release.
E6 41 24 Short circuit in radiation release signal see Section "Error analysis of X-RAY control 3-19
path between board DX42 and board signal path: up to unit hardware version AG
DX41 (cable L17). (with board DX41)"

boards DX11 and DX41 but not on
board DX42.
E6 41 25 X-Ray hardware signal present, Check cable L17, 3-18
software signal not present replace if necessary 6-101
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 36 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Location 42: Remote control, board DX42
båÖäáëÜ
E6 42 01 General module initialization error Check unit configuration (with or without DX41) 5-98
Note:
Error generated during module self-
test Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-27
2.5
E6 42 03 Invalid commanding or control data Check software version of DX42 (in comparison 5-53
to overall software version) via service routine
Note: S008.2,
Please also observe the causal error Check the CAN bus 3-6
Check the signal path from board DX1 to board
DX42,
if necessary, replace DX42 module
software update to
(detected on master side) Check the signal path from board DX1 to board
DX42,
if necessary, Replace module
Replace DX42 board 6-73
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 37

(detected on slave side) Check power supply (3.3V) of DX11, replace 6-73
Note: board DX1 or DX11 if necessary
The module was temporarily not Check the signal path from board DX1 to board
addressed by the master: DX42,
- Undervoltage on the master side if necessary, Replace module
- Procedure error in the software Replace board DX42 6-73
Note:
E6 42 08 General fault detected locally on mod- Check software versions via info screen or ser- 5-53
ule (slave side). CAN controller being vice routine S008.2,
reinitialized. if necessary, perform a software update 1-27
Note: Check the CAN bus 3-6
Occurs if software of boards is incom-
patible.
E7 42 10 Module is stuck in bootloader stage Check board DX42 (note LED states) 3-12
Replace remote control,
see installation instructions
System restart:
Switch the unit ON.
Check unit configuration (with or without DX41) 5-98
messages.
Check the signal path from board DX1 to board
DX42,
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 38 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

E6 42 20 Contact to DX11 interrupted during Check the signal path from board DX1 to board
operation DX42, replace module if necessary
båÖäáëÜ
Check connection of remote control,
see Installation Instructions
2.5
i NOTE
If the error cannot be eliminated immediately, the
unit can be temporarily reconfigured and operated
with a release button located directly on the unit (see
installation instructions)
E7 42 21 No CAN bus connection. Check configuration (with or without DX41) via 5-98
DX11 does not start. service routine S017.9,
Note: Configure correctly if necessary 5-98
Occurs in the start screen after power- Check the signal path from board DX1 to board
on. DX42,
Check remote control via service routine 17.6, 5-94
configure if necessary
Start detail query
If DX11 responds...
Check the signal path to DX42,
if necessary, repair or replace cable/connector 6-101
Replace DX1 6-73
Replace DX11 if this error persists 6-73
E3 42 30 R key actuated during power-on System restart: Switch the unit off. Wait 1 min-
ute. Switch unit ON, making sure that the re-
mote control is not actuated during boot-up.
Replace remote control,
see installation instructions
E3 42 31 Release button pressed during power- See section entitled "Error analysis of X-RAY 3-19, 3-23
on. control signal path"
The hardware signal for radiation
release is applied on board DX42
when the unit is switched on.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 39
Location 61: Diaphragm control, board DX61 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE, fixed diaphragm)

Check board DX61, replace if necessary 3-12
Replace board DX61 or 6-73
Replacing the diaphragm unit 6-41
E6 61 03 Invalid commanding or control data If the error occurs during the acceptance/constancy
test:
Note:
This error may also occur in connec- Check filter offset Bf in the "reset values" menu. 4-3
tion with other causal error messages. If the value is < -500
Please also observe the causal error (e.g. -502), repeat the adjustment of the pan
message! It appears only after you symmetry and check the fitting position of the
acknowledge the first error message. diaphragm.
i NOTE
For software versions ≤ V02.22, the filter offset value
must be < 500 (e.g. ± 450).
If the error occurs in the normal mode:

Note: Check board DX61, replace if necessary 3-12
software update to Replace board DX61 or 6-73
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 40 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

(detected on master side)
båÖäáëÜ
2.5
Note:
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 41

System restart:
Switch the unit ON.
messages.
E5 61 15 Drive overtemperature Allow unit to cool down.

Can occur after frequent diaphragm Check board DX61, replace if necessary 3-12
travel, e.g. during demo operation at a
fair. Replace board DX61 or 6-73
E7 61 17 The installed diaphragm mechanics Check diaphragm type; perform service routine 3-115
do not match the system version. S017.17 if necessary.
E5 61 20 Horizontal motor malfunction during Allow unit to cool down.
operation
If the error occurs again... 3-12
Note:
Check board DX61, replace if necessary
Can occur after frequent diaphragm
travel, e.g. during demo operation at a Replace board DX61 or 6-73
fair. Replacing the diaphragm unit 6-41
E5 61 21 Horizontal motor limit switch error Check light barrier V61_1 and connectors, re- 3-16
place if necessary 6-62
Perform diaphragm adjustment 4-3
E5 61 22 Horizontal motor movement error Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
If the error occurs again... 3-12
Check board DX61, replace if necessary
E5 61 30 Vertical motor malfunction during Allow unit to cool down.
operation
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 42 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

E5 61 31 Vertical motor limit switch error Check light barrier V61_2 and connectors, re- 3-16
place if necessary
båÖäáëÜ
6-62
2.5
E5 61 32 Vertical motor movement error Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
E5 61 40 Filter motor malfunction during opera- Allow unit to cool down.
tion
E5 61 41 Filter motor limit switch error Check light barrier V61_1 and connectors, 3-16

E5 61 42 Filter motor movement error Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 43

E5 61 50 Sensor positioning drive malfunction Allow unit to cool down
during operation
Check connector of TSA motor and TSA-LS
(V61_4) for correct position, replug if necessary
Check pan sensor holder mechanics (TSA) for 6-56
smooth and easy movement, replace sensor
holder if necessary
E5 61 51 Sensor positioning drive limit switch Check light barrier V61_4, 3-16
error replace if necessary 6-62
Check connector of TSA motor and TSA-LS
(V61_4) for correct position, replug if necessary
Check extension cord to light barrier, replace if
necessary
Check pan sensor holder mechanics (TSA) for 6-56
smooth and easy movement, replace sensor
holder if necessary
E5 61 52 Sensor positioning drive movement Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
error
Check to make sure TSA transport safety de-
vice has been removed (see TSA installation in-
structions), remove if necessary
Check pan sensor holder mechanics (TSA) for
smooth and easy movement,
if necessary, Replace the sensor holder. 6-56
if necessary, Replace board DX61 or 6-73
E5 61 53 Limit switch sensor adjustment Check light barrier V61_4 and 3-16
TSA defective Check plug connector, 3-18
E5 61 54 Limit switch sensor adjustment Check light barrier V61_5 and 3-16
PAN/CEPH defective Check plug connector, 3-18
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 44 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

E1 61 60 Voltage error on DX61, Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
40 V or 28 V
båÖäáëÜ
Note: Check height adjustment (soft start),
If several drives are operated simulta-
neously under unfavorable conditions, if necessary, Replace DX1 6-73
this may cause voltages to fall below Check voltages at X501 on board DX61 accord-
their minimum tolerances. ing to wiring diagrams,
if necessary, Replacing the diaphragm unit
2.5
6-41
Check voltage path from DX32 to DX1 (X102)
according to wiring diagrams,
if necessary, replace component
E6 61 70 Error in diaphragm unit configuration If the error occurs after replacing board DX11:
Check configuration of diaphragm unit via ser- 5-110,
vice routine S017.17 5-115
Configure correctly if necessary 5-110,
5-115
If the error occurs after replacing the diaphragm
system:
Check purchase order number of inserted dia-
phragm unit
if necessary, Replacing the diaphragm unit 6-41,
6-45
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 45
Location 71 (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE): Multipad / board DX71

the Multipad 6-26
the Multipad 6-26
Note: Replace board DX71 or 6-73
software update to the Multipad 6-26
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 46 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

båÖäáëÜ
Check power supply of board DX11; measuring
The module was temporarily not
addressed by the master:
- Undervoltage on the master side – If 3.3V present, replace board 6-73
- Master (DX11) receives no – If 3.3V not present, replace board 6-73
2.5
Return commanding from the module replace
Note:
the Multipad 6-26
E7 71 10 Module is stuck in bootloader stage Check board DX71 3-12
the Multipad 6-26
E7 71 12 Unit is not ready for operation Check the CAN bus 3-6
This error is a sequential fault.
System restart:
Switch the unit ON.
messages.
E6 71 20 Contact to DX11 interrupted during Note error message on remote control (DX42)
operation. and check log memory (via details).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 47

E7 71 21 No CAN bus connection. Start detail query
DX11 does not start.
If DX11 responds...
Note: Check signal path to DX71,
Occurs in the start screen after power-
on. if necessary, repair or replace cable/connector 6-101
Replace DX1 6-73
Replace DX11 6-73
E3 71 30 Height adjustment keys actuated dur- System restart:
ing power-on Switch the unit off. Wait 1 minute.
Switch unit ON, making sure that the Multipad is
E3 71 31 Forehead support key pressed during
not actuated during boot-up.
power-on
E3 71 32 Temple support keys actuated during If the error occurs again...
power-on 6-73
Board DX71 /
6-26
E3 71 33 Light localizer key actuated during the Multipad
power-on
E3 71 34 Test key actuated during power-on
E3 71 35 Return key actuated during power-on
E3 71 36 Service key actuated during power-on
E3 71 37 Memory key actuated during power-
on
E3 71 38 Program selection key actuated during
power-on
E3 71 39 Radiation time key actuated during
power-on
E3 71 40 kV/mA key actuated during power-on
E3 71 41 Patient symbol key actuated during
power-on
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 48 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Location 81, zz = 1-23: Board DX81, pan slot
båÖäáëÜ
E6 81 01 PAN Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-27
General error during module initializa-
tion
Check pan sensor, replace if necessary
E6 81 02 PAN Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-27
2.5
Invalid system data or uninitialized
module storage data
E6 81 03 PAN Check the CAN bus 3-6
Invalid commanding or control data If the error is a software error known to the Siro- 1-27
Note: na Customer Service Center (CSC), a software
This error may also occur in connec- update (bugfix) must be performed
Data transfer error or dialog error to Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-27
module (master side) Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by
E6 81 05 PAN Repeat software update 1-27
Data transfer error or dialog error to Check the CAN bus 3-6
bootloader of module
Note:
software update to
Module failed in TTP* Check pan sensor, replace if necessary
(detected on master side)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 49

TTP* timeout error Check cable L13, 3-18
Note:
The module was temporarily not Check power supply of board DX11; measuring
addressed by the master: point 3.3 V on board DX1 (see wiring diagrams).
- Undervoltage on the master side – If 3.3V present, replace board 6-73
- Master (DX11) receives no – If 3.3V not present, replace board 6-73
Return commanding from the module replace
Note:
General fault detected locally on mod- Check software versions via info screen or ser- 5-53
E7 81 10 PAN Check sensor or board DX81 (replacement sen-
sor), replace sensor if necessary
Module is stuck in bootloader stage
E7 81 12 PAN This error is a sequential fault.
Unit is not ready for operation System restart:
Switch the unit ON.
messages.
E5 81 13 PAN Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
Error when writing to EEPROM perform a software update 1-27
Stored data may be lost
Check log memory (via details)
E6 81 20 The sensor type on the device is not Check with the Sirona Customer Service Cen-
compatible with SIDEXIS specifica- ter (CSC) for SIDEXIS specifications
tions Check version compatibility of XG software and 1-14
Sidexis,
Pull sensor out of slot and plug it back in, repeat
procedure
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 50 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

E7 81 21 PAN perform a software update 1-27
båÖäáëÜ
File system error on DX81P Check sensor or board DX81 (replacement sen-
E6 81 23 PAN Check cable L13, replace if necessary 3-18
Sensor in pan slot active on CAN bus, 6-101
but no hardware detection Check Pan LED (V500) on DX1 3-12
(Hardware detection of the sensor)
2.5
Check sensor or board DX81 (replacement sen-
Check plug X500 on DX1, 6-73
if necessary, Replace DX1 or DX11
Replace board DX1 or DX11 6-73
E5 81 24 PAN Check cable L13, 3-18
Sensor in PAN slot not detected.
Check Pan LED (V500) on DX1 3-12
(Hardware detection of the sensor)
Check sensor or board DX81 (replacement sen-
Check plug X500 on DX1,
E5 81 25 PAN perform a software update 1-27
Error while synchronizing image data If the error occurs again...
E5 81 27 PAN Check cable L13, 3-18
Voltage error detected on sensor. replace if necessary 6-101
(CCD voltages on board DX81P)
Check plug X500 on DX1,
Note:
If this error occurs in connection with if necessary, Replace DX1 6-73
other causal error messages (e.g. E6 Check pan sensor, replace if necessary
6160, E6 9150), take appropriate
action
E5 81 28 PAN Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
Invalid data at start of exposure. If the error occurs again...
Check version compatibility of XG software and 1-14
Sidexis,
Contact the Sirona Customer Service Center for
the settings/sensor information in the Xab.ini file
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 51
Location 81, zz = 51-73: DX 81, ceph slot

E6 81 51 Ceph Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-27
General error during module initializa- means of a software update is possible and per-
tion form such an update if necessary.
Check ceph sensor, replace if necessary
E6 81 52 Ceph Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-27
Invalid system data or uninitialized means of a software update is possible and per-
module storage data form such an update if necessary.
E6 81 53 Ceph Check the CAN bus 3-6
Invalid commanding or control data Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-27
Data transfer error or dialog error to Please contact the Sirona Customer Service 1-27
module (master side) Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by
E6 81 55 Ceph Repeat software update 1-27
Data transfer error or dialog error to Check the CAN bus 3-6
bootloader of module
Note:
software update to
Module failed in TTP* Check ceph sensor, replace if necessary
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 52 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

båÖäáëÜ
TTP* timeout error Check power supply of board DX11; measuring
(detected on slave side) point 3.3 V on board DX1 (see wiring diagrams).
– If 3.3V present, replace board 6-73
Note: replace
The module was temporarily not
addressed by the master: – If 3.3V not present, replace board 6-73
- Undervoltage on the master side replace
2.5
- Procedure error in the software
Note:
General fault detected locally on mod- Check software versions via info screen or ser- 5-53
E7 81 60 Ceph Check sensor or board DX81 (replacement sen- 3-12
sor)
Module is stuck in bootloader stage
E7 81 62 Ceph This error is a sequential fault.
Unit is not ready for operation. System restart:

Switch the unit ON.
messages.
E5 81 63 Ceph Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
Error when writing to EEPROM If the error occurs again...
Note: Check ceph sensor, replace if necessary

Stored data may be lost
E7 81 71 Ceph perform a software update 1-27
File system error on DX81C
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 53

E6 81 73 Ceph Check cable L35/L38, 3-18
Sensor in ceph slot active on CAN replace if necessary 6-101
bus, but no hardware detection Check plug X500 on board DX1,
Check Ceph sensor holder,
E5 81 74 Ceph Check cables L35 and L38, 3-18
Sensor in ceph slot not detected. replace if necessary 6-101
Check plug X503 on board DX1, 6-73
if necessary, Replace board DX1
Check ceph sensor holder, replace if necessary 6-60
E5 81 75 Ceph perform a software update 1-27
Error while synchronizing image data If the error occurs again...
E5 81 77 Ceph Check cable L35/L38, 3-18
Voltage error detected on sensor. replace if necessary 6-101
(CCD voltages on board DX81C). Check plug X503 on board DX1,
Note: if necessary, Replace board DX1 6-73
If this error occurs in connection with
Check ceph sensor holder, replace if necessary 6-60
other causal error messages (e.g. E6
6160, E6 9150), take appropriate perform a software update 1-27
action Check ceph sensor, replace if necessary
E5 81 78 Ceph Acknowledge error and repeat procedure
Invalid data at start of exposure. If the error occurs again...

Check version compatibility of XG software and 1-14
Sidexis,
Contact the Sirona Customer Service Center for
the settings/sensor information in the Xab.ini file
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 54 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Location 91: Cephalometer, board DX91
båÖäáëÜ
2.5
module storage data
software update to
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 55

Note:
Check DX91, 3-12
System restart:
Switch the unit ON.
messages.
E3 91 13 Error when writing to EEPROM Complete unit adjustment 4-3
Note: incl. check of center position of Ceph scan via 5-157,
Stored data may be lost service routines S034.4 and S034.5, 5-161
readjust if necessary
E5 91 15 Drive overtemperature Allow unit to cool down.
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 56 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

Check complete mechanics/spindle of motor
M91_3 for smooth and easy running,
båÖäáëÜ
E5 91 16 Motor control timeout (M91_2/3) Replace board DX91 6-73
E5 91 20 Sensor drive malfunction during oper- Allow unit to cool down.
ation
2.5
Check complete mechanics/spindle of motor
M91_3 for smooth and easy running,
Check light barrier V91_2, 3-16
E5 91 21 Sensor drive, opposite light barrier replace if necessary 6-62
reached prematurely Check cable to light barrier (L21/L24),
if necessary, Replace board 6-73
E5 91 22 Sensor drive timeout Check motor M91_3 incl. cable and connector,
Check cable to light barrier (L21/L24),
E5 91 30 Secondary diaphragm drive malfunc- Allow unit to cool down.
tion during operation
Check motor M91_2 incl. cable and connector,
E5 91 31 Secondary diaphragm drive, opposite Check light barrier V91_2, 3-16
light barrier reached prematurely replace if necessary 6-62
if necessary, Replace board 6-73
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 57

E5 91 32 Secondary diaphragm drive timeout Check motor M91_2,
E6 91 40 Rotary table pot compensation not yet Perform software update to version V02.25 or 1-27
performed higher
Replace DX91 6-73
E6 91 41 Ear plug pot compensation not yet Perform software update to version V02.25 or 1-27
performed higher
Replace DX91 6-73
E6 91 42 Nose support pot compensation not Perform software update to version V02.25 or 1-27
yet performed higher
Replace DX91 6-73
E1 91 50 Voltage error on DX91, Check height adjustment (soft start),
40 V or 28 V if necessary, Replace DX1 6-73
Note: Check cables L36, L39 and adapter, 3-18
If several drives are operated simulta- replace if necessary 6-101
neously under unfavorable conditions,
this may cause voltages to fall below Check voltages at X103 on board DX91 accord- 6-73
their minimum tolerances. ing to wiring diagrams, replace DX91 if neces-
sary
Check boards DX1 and DX91, 3-12
If multiple boards report errors...
Check DX32, 3-12
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 58 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 2 2.6 List of available service routines
2.6 List of available service routines
Routine Description Required... see page
båÖäáëÜ
S001 Radiation without rotary movement: for tube assembly test and testing kV/mA levels 5-23
Fixed radiation time of 14.0 s
i NOTE
This routine enables the service engineer to release
radiation without having to attain exposure readi-
ness for the entire system.
2.6
S002 Radiation without rotary movement: for system test, final testing, tube voltage mea- 5-25
Max. radiation time selectable surement, reproducibility measurement, equiv-
alent dose measurement
Test step 1:
Radiation from any position;
last primary diaphragm setting
Test step 3:
Primary diaphragm opened fully
Test step 4:
Step filter in beam path;
Primary diaphragm opened
symmetrical to PAN setting
S005 General X-ray tube assembly service after error messages or component replace- 5-30
ment
Test step 2:
Automatic alignment of preheating
(board DX6) with display of setpoint
values
Test step 4:
Fan test (board DX6)
Test step 5:
Temperature sensor test (board DX6)
Test step 6 (V02.22 or higher): only if expressly requested by the customer! 5-38
Disabling the pulse/pause monitoring
CAUTION
The execution of this service routine is irrevers-
ible. The unit is operated beyond its specifications
afterwards. This may result in an X-ray tube assem-
bly failure.
The warranty for the X-ray tube assembly will be-
come void!
The performance of this service function can be
proven by Sirona following a system failure.
Test step 7 (V02.27 or higher): only if expressly requested by the customer! 5-41
Switching tube assembly fan to contin-
uous operation CAUTION
The execution of this service routine is irrevers-
ibly documented on the tube assembly!
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 59
2.6 List of available service routines Tab 2

S007 Error logging after error messages 5-44
Test step 1:
Display error logging memory
Test step 2:
Delete error logging memory
Test step 5 (V02.27 or higher): only after consulting with the Sirona Customer
Enabling CAN bus logging in the Mini- Service Center!
web
S008 Update service for checking the configuration 5-53
Test step 2:
Display of module software version
statuses
Test step 3: after error messages
Input/confirmation of
unit Serial number
Test step 4
(not for XG 3 or XG 3PPE)
Initializing the function activation
S009 Flash file system after error messages 5-61
Test step 4:
Formatting flash file system
S012 CAN bus service on suspicion of unstable CAN bus 5-64
(from Test step 2: in case of accumulated error messages EX yy
V02.27) Query of CAN status register of mod- 12; Ex yy 06, Ex yy 07, Ex yy 03
ules not suitable as an accompanying measure e.g.
"check connector of CAN bus" and "check bus
terminations"
Test step 3: to be executed prior to service routine S012.2 if
Reset of CAN status register of mod- required
ules
Test step 4: in case of sporadic failures of modules on CAN
Display of CAN bus cycle on LEDs of bus (after Ex yy 06, Ex yy 07,
modules Ex yy 08, Ex yy 12)
as accompanying measure when checking con-
nectors (wiggle) for firm seating
S014 Rotation motor service for electromechanical problems with the ring 5-74
(from motor or the ring rotation system
Test step 1:
V02.28.02) Travel of rotational drive to the Pan
home position
Test step 2:
Travel of rotational drive to the Ceph
position
Test step 3:
Free travel of rotational drive
Test step 4:
Display of light barrier signals of rota-
tional drive
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 60 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

S015 Actuator service for electromechanical problems with the actua- 5-81
tors or the actuator movement
båÖäáëÜ
(from Test step 5:
V02.28.02) Functional test of actuators 1 + 2
S017 Configuration service for changing the configuration 5-84
Device ID
Test step 2:
Configuring the hardware version
2.6
Test step 3:
Selecting the country group code
Test step 4
(only for XGPlus/3Dready):
Selecting a language index within the
language set
Test step 5
(only for XGPlus/3Dready):
Selecting a language set index within
the language set
Test step 6: for installation and removal of remote control
Activating the remote control
Test step 8: for changing the configuration
Selecting the kV/mA level ID
Test step 9 (V02.28.02 or higher): for software updates and replacement of DX11
Configuration of unit with or without
board DX41
Test step 10 (from V02.28.02 or for replacement of board DX11 or the headrest
higher):
Configuration of headrest
Test step 11 for changing the configuration
(XG 5 only):
Selecting the image format
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 61

Test step 12 At the customer's request: Switch the preview
(V02.22 or higher, only for XGPlus/ image ON and OFF (after update to version
3Dready): V02.22)
Enabling/disabling the preview image
Test step 13 (V02.22 or higher, only At the customer's request: Enabling or disabling
for XGPlus full version /3Dready): the welcome screen (after update to V02.22)
Enabling/disabling the welcome
screen
Test step 14 (V02.22 or higher, only At the customer's request or compliant to legal
for XGPlus full version /3Dready): regulations: Configure the appearance of the
Enabling/disabling certain lines of the welcome screen.
welcome screen
Test step 15 (V02.25 or higher, only At the customer's request: Switch the acoustic
for XGPlus/3Dready): signal for the end of exposure ON or OFF.
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
signal for the end of exposure
Test step 17 After replacing the diaphragm or DX61:
(V02.32 or higher): – RöV FRG: Configuration of the standard for
the acceptance/constancy test
– Worldwide: Checking/accepting the dia-
phragm configuration
S017 Test step 18
(V02.28.02 or higher, only for XGPlus CAUTION
/ 3D ready): This routine may only be selected for units with oc-
clusal bite block; otherwise, the unit will malfunction.
Activation of the occlusal bite block A unit software version of V02.40 or higher must be
function installed.
i NOTE
If the activation of the occlusal bite block is repeated
during the service function, all previously performed
adjustments of the occlusal bite block system will be
Occlusal bite reset to the factory setting.
block Then error message E1 11 18 will be generated to
inform the user that the occlusal bite block requires
adjustment.
Following the adjustment in service function S18.9,
the error message is reset.
Test step 22 Configuration of display of remaining exposures

(V02.28.02 or higher, only for XG 3 after power-on
PPE):
Configuration of PPE display
Test step 23 Configuration of warning level for display of re-
(V02.28.02 or higher, only for XG 3 maining exposures after an exposure
PPE):
Configuration of PPE display warning
level
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 62 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

S018 Set travel height if the room height is lower than 2.27 m 5-121
(2.3 m with floor stand)
båÖäáëÜ
Test step 2:
Set the maximum travel height
Test step 3:
Undoing maximum travel height set-
ting
Test step 4: Check of the sensor system for the height ad-
2.6
Check the height adjustment sensor justment (upper and lower limit switches, cor-
system rection switch, pulse counter)
Test step 5 (V02.27 or higher): if the minimum travel height must be limited
Setting the minimum travel height
Test step 6 (V02.27 or higher):
Undoing minimum travel height setting
Test step 7:
(V02.40 or higher, only for XGPlus/ CAUTION
3Dready): This routine may only be selected for units with oc-
Set the nominal angle for the occlusal
bite block (as required by the cus-
tomer)
Occlusal bite
block
Test step 8:
Check the function of the occlusal
bite block
Occlusal bite
block
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 63

Test step 9:
Adjustment of the AD acceptance
angle values and the zero point
Occlusal bite
block
Test step 10:

Setting the PWM values for the
height adjustment creep speed
Occlusal bite
block
S020 Service for temple support in case of complaints regarding the allocation of 5-139
Test step 1: the temple support distances to the jaw widths
(V02.22 or higher)
Defining switching thresholds of tem-
ple supports.
S021 Diaphragm service: motor-driven dia- following replacement of diaphragm unit 5-143
phragm
Test step 1:
Initialization of diaphragm axis
Test step 3: Important for TSA Ready units:
Functional test of after replacing the sensor holder
TSA sensor adjustment
S032 Test function for sensor in PAN slot for troubleshooting HSI problems 5-148
(E6 14 10, E6 14 11, E6 14 12)
Test step 10 (V02.27 or higher):
Test function for sensor in PAN slot
S033 Test of CEPH image path without for troubleshooting HSI problems 5-152
SIDEXIS (E6 14 10, E6 14 11, E6 14 12)
Test step 10 (V02.27 or higher

not with XG 3/ 3 PPE):
Test of CEPH image path without
SIDEXIS
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 64 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

S034 Service for the digital cephalometer after replacing ceph module 5-156
båÖäáëÜ
Test step 4: for adjustment problems (only after consulting
Calibrating center position of ceph the Sirona Customer Service Center [CSC])
scan (sensor side)
Test step 5:
Calibrating center position of ceph
scan (diaphragm side)
2.6
Test step 6: for repacking the cephalometer
Moving cephalometer to packing posi-
tion
Test step 7 (only for XGPlus): for PAN units up to serial number 20056,
Setting the ring type for PAN/CEPH units up to serial number 40104
Test step 8: at customer's request
User-specific determination of the
shadowing limit for C1 and C2
Test step 9: at customer's request
User-specific determination of the
shadowing limit for C3 and C3F
S037 Network service, PC service for problems with exposure readiness 5-173
Test step 1: for changing the network configuration
Displaying the network data
Test step 2:
Resetting the IP address
Test step 3:
Toggling between DHCP and UDP
boot mode
Test step 4:
Manual input of IP address, default
gateway address and subnet mask
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 2 – 65
59 38 399 D3352
2 – 66 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
ORTHOPHOS XG
3 Troubleshooting
Tab 3
Contents
3.1 Error logging memory..............................................3 – 4

3.1.1 Example of error logging data .............................. 3 – 5
3.2 Check the CAN bus.................................................3 – 6

3.2.1 Checking the CAN bus with the diagnostic
function of board DX1........................................... 3 – 9
3.2.2 Jumper positions in the CAN bus ....................... 3 – 10
3.3 Checking the boards .............................................3 – 12

3.3.1 Checking board DX32 ........................................ 3 – 14
3.4 Checking the motors .............................................3 – 15
3.5 Checking the light barriers ....................................3 – 16
3.6 Device leakage current too high............................3 – 17
3.7 Checking the cables ..............................................3 – 18

(with board DX41) .................................................3 – 19
3.8.1 Error and help messages with remote control
installed .............................................................. 3 – 19
3.8.2 Error messages without installed
remote control .................................................... 3 – 21
3.8.3 Error messages with and without installed
remote control .................................................... 3 – 22

(without board DX41) ............................................3 – 23
installed .............................................................. 3 – 23
3.9.2 Error messages without installed
remote control .................................................... 3 – 25
remote control .................................................... 3 – 25
3.10 Checking data paths / Generating test images .....3 – 26
59 38 399 D3352
3–2 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 3
3 Troubleshooting
DANGER
PERILOUS SHOCK HAZARD! It is essential to switch off the unit and
wait at least 1 minute before removing a cover.
CAUTION
–Switch the X-ray unit OFF before connecting a
measuring instrument.
–Select the correct current/voltage type and adjust the
measuring range to match the expected readings.
–Perform continuity tests only on units which are switched off.
–Observe the prescribed cool-down intervals if several exposures must be
taken to check a measurement.
CAUTION
Please observe the usual precautionary measures for han-
dling printed circuit boards (ESD).
Touch a ground point to discharge static electricity before

touching any boards.
CAUTION
CAN bus cable: When unplugging CAN bus cables, it is essential to unplug
the power supply as well.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 3–3
3.1 Error logging memory Tab 3
3.1 Error logging memory
i NOTE
If the software is updated to V02.51.02 or higher, any previously stored con-
tent in the error logging memory is lost. The error login memory is restarted.
Please read out the error login memory prior to performing an update in case
its contents are useful.
The error logging memory is a component of the extended DETAILS (see sec-
tion 1.8 on page 1-37).
System time Entry type Entry data
Data which might be expected to occur in the logging memory are explained
below to help you interpret them more effectively.
59 38 399 D3352
3–4 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 3 3.1 Error logging memory
3.1.1 Example of error logging data
System time 2006-03-06, 20:13:02 : System time (clock on the

DX11)
Entry type [Message] : General system event

[Error] : Error event
[Error Sidexis] : Network error event
[Stringname] : Free status texts
[Stringsegment] : Additional data (string names)
Entry data [Message] Recording started : Beginning of a recording

Value: 9000 : Sequence ID of recording
Recording stopped : End of a recording
Recording canceled : Recording cancellation
3.1
Logbook started : Corresponds to power-on of
Unit
Image state switched to Released : Recording has been delivered to
and confirmed by SIDEXIS
Other entry data which document the occurrence of a rescue event include:
– Image state switched to Rescue
– Rescue request Sidexis Error
– Rescue request Sidexis TrackEpilogue
– Rescue request Sidexis Timeout
These entry data may also occur after "Recording stopped" or "Cancel" and
indicate an exceptional circumstance. You can supply important information
for error diagnostics in coordination with the Sirona Customer Service Center.
Entry data [Error] E6 07 06 : Error code

ERR_DX7_TTP_LOST : Clear text display of error
Entry data [Error Sidexis] SidErr: ERR_SOCKET_ERROR : Details on

network error
(for Sirona only)
SockErr: : Details on
network error
(for Sirona only)
Entry data [Stringname] Key Act : Activation transaction

Key OK : Activation transaction
Counter (XG 3 PPE) : Current counter reading
Entry data [Stringsegment] 7YFWDUFV- : e.g. Activation/

E4MMRJBW confirmation code
(for activation transaction)
061-00133 : Example: Counter
(ID counter reading)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 3–5
3.2 Check the CAN bus Tab 3
3.2 Check the CAN bus
CAUTION
When unplugging CAN bus cables, it is essential that the voltage supply is ap-
plied at the module!
Unit HW version BA and higher:

Check jumpers on board DX42 (if present) for
Measure the ohmic resistance on < 50 Ω correct setting, see 6.22.7Section .
board DX1 at connector X310 be- Are the jumpers plugged in correctly?
tween pin 1 and pin 2 (unit HW ver-
sion < AG) or between measuring
pins CAN H and CAN L (unit HW ver- yes No
sion ≥ AG).
120/0 Ω Insert jumper

correctly.
Fault in the electric CAN bus 60 Ω Continue to page 3-8
connection
Only for unit hardware versions ≥ BA:

Check cable L117 and manual re- Plug in cable L117/manual release A2 (unit HW
lease No version ≥ BA) properly, or replace if necessary.
A2 (without remote control).
Are cable L117 and manual release
A2 properly connected?
yes
Check jumpers for correct position on

board DX1, see section 5.13.1.
No Plug in jumpers correctly.
• Are the jumpers plugged in correctly?
yes
Cabling fault in the connec-

tors or modules
Check CAN plug connections from

board DX1 to the connected mod-
ules! Make a plug connection.
• Are the plug connections OK? No
(see also service routine S012.4
(LED test), page 5-72)
yes
Continue to page 3-7
59 38 399 D3352
3–6 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 3 3.2 Check the CAN bus
from page 3-6
Fault in the cabling or in the

modules
Find defective component or faulty

cable by process of elimination.
Is a substitute cable available? No
3.2
Cyclical test using
yes bypassing of components
Bypass the individual bus outputs to the

modules one after the other and mea-
Cyclical test using sure the ohmic resistance on board DX1
"wandering" substitute cable (unit HW version < AG) at connector
X310 between pins 1 and 2 or between
the measuring pins CAN H and CAN L
(unit HW version ≥ AG) in each case.
Connect a substitute cable to each mod-
ule in succession and measure the ohm- Was a bus resistance of 60 Ω measured
ic resistance on board DX1 at connector in any particular constellation?
X310 between pins 1 and 2 (unit hard-
ware version < AG) or between the mea-
suring pins CAN H and CAN L (unit HW
version ≥ AG) in each case.
No No
Was a bus resistance of 60 Ω measured yes
in any particular constellation?
Replace board DX1.

yes
Replace the defective cable in the cor- Replace the defective cable in the cor-
responding signal path. responding signal path.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 3–7
from page 3-6
Check optical CAN bus connection L6

to board DX6.
("Wiggle test“ or substitute cable) yes
Fault on optical
• Can the fault be traced to this connec-
CAN bus connection
tion?
No
Replace optical L6 label.
Unstable CAN bus or
sporadic faults
Test connection quality of CAN bus with

service routine S012.2 (see page 5-67).
To do this, display the fault status of all
modules in succession.
No
• Is there any information on bus faults in
the status registers of one or more mod-
ules?
yes
Inadequate
Connection quality
Check individual signal paths and

connectors. ("Wiggle test" or see also
service routine S012.4 (LED test),
Contact the SIRONA
page 5-72)
Customer Service Center
No
(CSC).
• Can a CAN error message or failure of
the LED flashing be caused for one or
more modules?
yes
Replace the corresponding

connectors, cables or modules.
59 38 399 D3352
3–8 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
3.2.1 Checking the CAN bus with the diagnostic

function of board DX1
Board DX1 features a diagnostic function for diagnosing malfunctions of the
CAN bus via LEDs V700 and V701 (see wiring diagrams). The following table
indicates the operating status of the CAN bus and the recommended error
correction measures:
V700 V701 Operating status of CAN bus Error correction measures

Slow flashing Slow flashing CAN bus OK Not required
Fast flashing OFF CAN error, no communication with Check cabling
board DX7, i.e. no display of error Check CAN jumper
messages (see Section 3.2.2)
Fast flashing Fast flashing CAN error, no physical communica- Disconnect CAN cables succes-
tion with CAN bus possible; there is sively (set jumper to inner posi-
probably a short circuit in the CAN tion!) until the CAN bus functions
cable or on the board of a module. again (V700 and V701 flash
slowly)
3.2
Replace defective module
OFF Fast flashing CAN error, CAN bus TTP* disturbed Disconnect CAN cables succes-
by defective, constantly transmitting sively (set jumper to inner posi-
board tion!) until the CAN bus functions
(bus-heavy) again (V700 and V701 flash
slowly)
Replace defective module
OFF OFF System did not power up (DX11) Switch unit OFF and ON again
and wait until end of power-up
time
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 3–9
3.2.2 Jumper positions in the CAN bus

The jumpers are located on board DX1 at sockets X302, X303, X306, X307,
X309, X500 and X503 (see also wiring diagrams).
If a cable is plugged into the socket, the corresponding jumpers must be set
to the outer position. If no cable is plugged in, the jumpers must be set to the
inner position.
If a jumper is not set to the inner position with a cable plugged in, the CAN bus
is interrupted at this location. Modules located behind this location can no lon-
ger be connected to the CAN bus and, therefore, do not function.
Up to unit hardware version AG
Socket, Socket, DX1

e.g. X500 e.g. X309 DX81
RS X503
SUB_D Ceph
sensor
Jumper outside Jumper inside

DX81
Module con- Module not con- X500
Pan
SUB_D
nected, i.e. connected, i.e. con- sensor
nector plugged in nector not
plugged in
DX91
X309
Jumper
RJ45 Ceph
sensor
Jumper X307 Optional

SUB_D connection
DX61*
X306
RJ45 Dia-
phragm
DX41 DX42
X303
RJ45
Inter- Remote
face control
X302 DX7
RJ45
Display
RS
DX11
PowerPC
* Connector not plugged in for XG 3/3 PPE,

Jumper must be connected to socket X306 inside for XG 3/3 PPE
59 38 399 D3352
3 – 10 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Unit HW version BA and higher

Socket, Socket, DX1

e.g. X500 e.g. X309 DX81
RS X503
SUB_D Ceph
sensor
Jumper outside Jumper inside

DX81
Module con- Module not con- X500
Pan
SUB_D
nected, i.e. connected, i.e. con- sensor
nector plugged nector not
in plugged in
DX91
X309
Jumper
RJ45 Ceph
sensor
3.2
Jumper X307 Optional
SUB_D connection
DX61*
X306
RJ45 Dia-
phragm
DX42
X303 X103
RJ45 SUB_D
Remote
control
Angle
interface
X103
SUB_D
A2
X302 DX7
RJ45
Display
RS
DX11
PowerPC
*)Connector not plugged in for XG 3/3 PPE,

Jumper must be connected to socket X306 insidefor XG 3/3 PPE
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 3 – 11
3.3 Checking the boards Tab 3
3.3 Checking the boards
Check operating status of board.
Visual inspection: Locate board (DX1 or other

• Is the board intact? connected board) or component (e.g.
• Do the LEDs indicate normal operation? No cable) causing fault/error;
(see table below) replace component if necessary
Measure voltages:
• Are the voltage levels OK?
(see wiring diagrams)
yes
Insert replacement board and Board is OK!

check unit functioning. No Continue troubleshooting acc. to
• Is the unit functioning properly? error list (see section 2.5)
yes
Replace board or module,

see Section 6
59 38 399 D3352
3 – 12 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 3 3.3 Checking the boards
Important LEDs on the boards (see also wiring diagrams)
Board LEDs Normal operation Malfunction Bootloader

DX1 V100 lit not lit
59 24 142 V101 lit not lit
V109 lit not lit
V110 lit not lit
V610 lit not lit
DX1 V200 flashing at 1 Hz lit / not lit flashing quickly
62 82 052 V610 lit not lit
V700 flashing at 1 Hz lit / not lit / flashing quickly
V701 flashing at 1 Hz lit / not lit / flashing quickly
V1301 lit not lit
V1303 lit not lit
V1316 lit not lit
V1317 lit not lit
V1323 lit not lit
V1324 lit not lit
3.3
DX6 (tube assem- V1 flashing at 1 Hz not lit flashing at 2 Hz
bly 1.0) V203 lit not lit
DX6 (tube assem- V200 flashing at 1 Hz not lit flashing at 2 Hz
bly 2.0) V515 lit not lit
DX61 V101 flashing at 1 Hz not lit flashing at 2 Hz
V501 lit not lit
DX7 V100 lit not lit
V101 lit not lit
DX71 V101 lit not lit flashing at 2 Hz
V103 lit not lit
V107 flashing at 1 Hz not lit
DX41* V103 flashing at 1 Hz not lit flashing at 2 Hz
V202 lit not lit
DX42 V101 lit not lit flashing at 2 Hz
V103 lit not lit
V107 flashing at 1 Hz not lit
DX91 V101 flashing at 1 Hz not lit flashing at 2 Hz
V501 lit not lit
* Board DX41 is not installed in units with HW vers. BA and higher (from Nov. 2006).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 3 – 13
3.3 Checking the boards Tab 3
3.3.1 Checking board DX32
Check operating status of board. If board DX32 is visibly

No damaged, replace board;
Visual inspection: see Section 6.22
• Is the board intact?
yes
Unit hardware version < BA:

• Are LEDs V132 and V133 on board DX32 lit?
Unit hardware version ≥ BA:
• Are LEDs V111 and V112 on board DX32 lit?
No
yes
• Are LEDs V100 and V101

on board DX1 lit?
Measure voltages on DX1:
AA107/AA108 = 28 V ± 10% yes Board DX32 is OK.
AA109/AA108 = 40V ± 10%
• Are the voltage levels OK?

And are the LEDs lit?
No
Check cable L4: Replace cable L4, see Section 6.23

No
• Is the cable OK?
yes Check plug connections on board

DX32:
• Switch the unit OFF.
Check automatic circuit breakers F101 Wait 7 minutes (el. discharge)
and F102 on board DX32. No • Check fuses F100 and F103
• Have the circuit breakers tripped? (HW status only up to AG)
• Switch unit ON and check function
yes
Is the unit functioning properly?
Press automatic circuit breakers and
test unit function.
• Is the unit functioning properly? No
yes
Replace board DX32,

The fault is corrected! see Section 6.22
59 38 399 D3352
3 – 14 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 3 3.4 Checking the motors
3.4 Checking the motors
Check operating status of motors.
Visual inspection: Replace the motor and/or fix the plug

No
• Is the motor intact? connections.
• Are the plug connections OK?
yes
Temporarily install replacement motor Motor is OK!

and check unit function. No Continue troubleshooting according to
• Is the unit functioning properly? error list (see section 2.5).
3.4
yes
Replace motor, see section 6.3 or

section 6.4
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 3 – 15
3.5 Checking the light barriers Tab 3
3.5 Checking the light barriers
Clean connector; if defective

Is the plug connection between the light Fix connector or replace defective
No
barrier and the board OK? component, see Section 6
yes
Actuate light barrier manually and

Is a replacement light barrier available? check signal change on pin 3 of light
No
barrier connector:
Pin Signal
yes 1 GND
2 3.3V / 5V
3 Signal
Temporarily install replacement 4 GND
light barrier and check unit functioning.
Note:
• Is the unit functioning properly? When inspecting the light barrier,
check to see whether ambient light
can influence its function.
yes
• Are the signals OK?
Replace light barrier,

see Section 6.21
No
Replace light barrier,

see Section 6.21
No yes
Light barrier is OK!

Continue troubleshooting acc. to
error list (see section 2.5).
59 38 399 D3352
3 – 16 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 3 3.6 Device leakage current too high
3.6 Device leakage current too high
Pull tube assembly cable L3 off of con- Check the cable shields (see section
nector X3 on board DX6 and perform 7.13) and check the cables for visible
measurement of leakage current signs of damage.
No
according to sect. 7.15. • Are the cable shields and Cables OK?
• Is the leakage current OK?
yes No yes
Replace tube assembly, Replace board DX32,

see Section 6.15 see Section 6.22
3.6
Fix cable shields and/or replace any
defective cables.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 3 – 17
3.7 Checking the cables Tab 3
3.7 Checking the cables
i NOTE
You can use a standard Cat5 cable as a test cable for L8*, L10, L12, L40 and
L37. Attention! This cable must not be permanently installed.
i NOTE
Most cables have the same plug at both ends and are connected 1:1 (see also
section "1.11 Cabling overview').
Clean connector; if defective Fix plug,

Is the cable plug connection OK? if necessary, replace cable
No
see section 6.23
yes
For shielded cables: Repair shield, if necessary, replace

Is the cable shield connection OK? No cable see Section 6.23
yes
If a substitute cable is available,

temporarily connect it and Locate module causing fault and
check unit functioning. No replace component,
see Section 6
• Is the unit functioning properly?
yes
Replace cable, see section 6.23
* up to unit hardware version AG
59 38 399 D3352
3 – 18 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 33.8 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware ver-

(with board DX41)

installed
E3 42 31 + E3 13 40 + E3 41 20
occur in combination after the unit Was the release button Switch the unit OFF and
actuated during switch yes
is switched ON with the door con- then ON again. Make
tact closed. ON? sure that the release but-
ton is not actuated dur-
ing switch-ON.
Do the error messages

recur?
3.8
No yes
Short circuit in the coiled cable of the release button or on the

membrane keyboard of the remote control:
• Replace release button
• Replace remote control
E3 42 31
occurs individually after the unit is Hardware fault on display board DX42 or short circuit in coiled ca-
switched ON. ble of release button or on membrane keyboard of the remote
control:
• Replace release button (unit hardware version < BA)
• Replace remote control (see section 6.22)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 3 – 19
3.8 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware ver-
E3 41 20
occurs individually after the unit is Door contact yes • Close door contact
switched ON. open? • Switch unit OFF and ON again
Does the error message recur?
No yes
Short circuit in signal path between boards DX41 and DX42

during switch-ON:
• Replace cable L17, (see section 6.23)
• Replace remote control
• Replace board DX41 (see section 6.22)
E3 41 24
occurs individually during Short circuit in signal path between boards DX41 and
operation of unit. DX42 during switch-ON:
E6 13 43
occurs individually during opera- Was the door • Acknowledge error message
tion of unit. opened during the ye with R key
exposure? • Close door contact
• Repeat the exposure
No
• Check door contact, repair if necessary

59 38 399 D3352
3 – 20 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 33.8 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware ver-
H321
is triggered at start of exposure. Door contact yes • Close door contact
open? • Start exposure again
Is the error message displayed

again?
No yes

3.8.2 Error messages without installed remote con-
3.8
trol
E3 13 40 + E3 41 20
occur in combination after the unit Was the release Switch the unit OFF and
button actuated during ye
is switched ON. then ON again. Make
switch ON? sure that the release but-
ing switch-ON.

recur?
No yes
Short circuit in coiled cable of release button:

• Replace release button (unit hardware version < BA)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 3 – 21
3.8 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware ver-

remote control

E3 41 20 Faulty detection of release signal by Replace board DX41 6-73
DX41 processor when the unit is
switched ON.
E6 41 23 Faulty detection of release signal by Replace board DX41 6-73
DX41 processor during operation of
the unit.
E6 41 25 The DX41 detects no release signal Replace board DX41 6-73
when the exposure is started.
E3 13 40 Short circuit in signal path between Replacing cable L17 6-101
boards DX11 and DX41 during switch- Replace board DX41 6-73
ON.
Replace board DX1
Replace board DX11
E6 13 41 Release signal missing on board Replacing cable L17 6-101
DX11 at start of exposure. Replace board DX41 6-73
Replace board DX1
Replace board DX11
E3 13 42 Short circuit in signal path between Replacing cable L17 6-101
boards DX11 and DX41 during opera- Replace board DX41 6-73
tion of the unit.
Replace board DX1
Replace board DX11
59 38 399 D3352
3 – 22 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 3 3.9 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: unit HW version BA or

(without board DX41)

installed
E3 42 31 + E3 13 40
occur in combination after the unit Was release button A2 Switch the unit OFF and
actuated during switch- yes
is switched ON with the door con- then ON again. Make
tact closed. ON? sure that release button
A2 is not actuated during
switch-ON.

recur?
3.9
No yes
Short circuit in coiled cable of release button A2 or on membrane

keyboard of remote control:
• Replace coiled cable
• Replace membrane keyboard of remote control
• Replace display board DX42 of remote control
(see section 6.22)
E3 42 31
occurs individually after the unit is Hardware fault on display board DX42 or short circuit in coiled ca-
switched ON. ble of release button A2 or on membrane keyboard of remote
control:
• Replace release button A2 (unit hardware version ≥ BA)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 3 – 23
3.9 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: unit HW version BA or
E6 13 43
occurs individually during opera- Was the door • Acknowledge error message
tion of unit. opened during the ye with R key
exposure? • Close door contact
• Repeat the exposure
No

H321
is triggered at start of exposure. Door contact ye • Close door contact
open? • Start exposure again
Is the error message displayed

again?
No yes

59 38 399 D3352
3 – 24 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 3 3.9 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: unit HW version BA or
3.9.2 Error messages without installed remote

control
E3 13 40
occurs individually after unit is Was the release button Switch the unit OFF and
actuated during switch yes
switched ON. then ON again. Make
ON? sure that the release but-
ing switch-ON.

recur?
No yes
3.9
Short circuit in coiled cable of release button:
• Replace release button A2 (unit hardware ≥ BA)
Short circuit in cable L108:

remote control

E3 13 40 Short circuit in signal path between Replace cable L117 or L108 6-101
release button A2 and board DX11 Replace board DX1 6-73
during switch-ON.
Replace board DX11
E6 13 41 Release signal missing on board Replace cable L117 or L108 6-101
DX11 at start of exposure. Replace board DX1 6-73
Replace board DX11
E3 13 42 Short circuit in signal path between Replace cable L117 or L108 6-101
release button A2 and board DX11 Replace board DX1 6-73
during unit operation.
Replace board DX11
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 3 – 25
3.10 Checking data paths / Generating test images Tab 3
3.10 Checking data paths / Generating test images

SIDEXIS XG must be installed and configured before you begin checking the
data paths.
i NOTE
For a panoramic test image, the panoramic mode must be activated on the
unit; for a ceph test image, the cephalometric mode must be activated; for a
TSA test image, the TS mode must be selected (see operating instructions).
Generate the test images for the different operating modes in succession.
1. Select constancy test in SIDEXIS XG:

Select UTILITIES CONSTANCY TEST
The classical SIDEXIS user interface is started. Constancy test is already
preset.
2. Starting the exposure mode:

Click XCXP
The dialog box for selecting the X-ray device opens.
i NOTE
If no X-ray device has been configured yet in SIDEXIS XG, the password input
window appears instead of the dialog box for selecting the X-ray device.
3. Select/confirm the X-ray device:

E.g. select ROOM 1 and click on OK
The dialog box for selecting the test type appears on the screen.
4. Select/confirm the test type:

Click SERVICE EXPOSURE
The dialog box for selecting the service exposure appears on the screen.
59 38 399 D3352
3 – 26 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 3 3.10 Checking data paths / Generating test images
5. Select/confirm the service exposure:

Click DIGITAL TEST PATTERN
– If several different X-ray components are available, a dialog box for
selecting the X-ray component appears on the screen. In this case,
select/confirm the required component.
– If only one X-ray component is available, the exposure readiness dia-
log box appears on the screen and shows the status of the exposure.
i NOTE
During operation in the service mode, the unit switches from the user mode to
the PC service mode logged by the PC.
Once the exposure is completed, the unit switches back to the user mode.
3.10
6. Take an exposure:
– Press the R key on the Easypad (XGPlus / 3Dready) / Multipad (XG 5 / 3
/ 3 PPE) to move the unit back to its starting position.
– Press the release button. Hold down the button until the exposure has
been completed.
i NOTE
A service message box indicates whether the generated test image is correct.
Acknowledge this message with OK. The test image is displayed on the
T R screen.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 3 – 27
3.10 Checking data paths / Generating test images Tab 3
PAN test image CEPH test image
TSA test image
7. Check the images according to the following criteria:

– Tile structure of the existing segments
i NOTE
To facilitate checking, you may adjust the image contrast and brightness in SI-
DEXIS.
– Linear grayscale gradient

– Intensity steps clearly recognizable
– No image artifacts detectable
59 38 399 D3352
3 – 28 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
ORTHOPHOS XG
4 Adjustment
Tab 4
Contents
4.1 Important information concerning adjustment .........4 – 3
4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu......................4 – 5
4.3 Adjusting the panoramic X-ray unit .........................4 – 9

4.3.1 Pan needle phantom ............................................ 4 – 9
4.3.2 Dismantling the fixed diaphragm
(XG 3 / 3 PPE only) ............................................ 4 – 10
4.3.3 Adjusting the pan sensor
(XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) .................. 4 – 12
4.3.4 Adjust pan diaphragm
(motorized) (XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5) ................. 4 – 22
4.3.5 Adjusting the (fixed) pan diaphragm
(XG 3 / 3 PPE).................................................... 4 – 32
4.3.6 Adjusting the pan filter........................................ 4 – 40
4.3.7 Adjusting the pan symmetry
(XGPlus / 3Dready / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) ........................ 4 – 46

(only for XGPlus / 3Dready)......................................4 – 55

(XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5, if ceph present)..............4 – 58
4.5.1 Functional test
(only for XGPlus with left-arm version) ................ 4 – 58
4.5.2 Ceph test phantom ............................................. 4 – 59
4.5.3 Adjusting the ceph primary diaphragm............... 4 – 60
4.5.4 Adjusting the ceph fixed point of rotation ........... 4 – 70
4.5.5 Adjusting the ceph main X-ray beam direction... 4 – 83
4.5.6 Adjusting Ceph - Quickshot
(only for XGPlus full version / 3Dready)................. 4 – 92
4.5.7 Checking and adjusting the alignment of the
ear plugs........................................................... 4 – 102

(only for XGPlus with full version).........................4 – 109

(XGPlus / 3Dready / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) .........................4 – 117
59 38 399 D3352
4–2 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 4 4.1 Important information concerning adjustment
4 Adjustment
4.1 Important information concerning adjustment
WARNING
When performing the following tests, be sure to observe the radiation
protection regulations applicable in your country (see Operating In-
structions).
CAUTION
Before starting the service routines for system adjustment, make sure that no
unit movements are active (especially diaphragm travels)! Otherwise the sys-
tem may become inoperable in rare cases.
i NOTE
“Radiation” is signaled via the message “X-RAY active!” (only for XGPlus /
3Dready), a beep and an X-ray LED.
i NOTE
Be sure to take screenshots of the PAN - RESET ADJUSTMENT and CEPH - RE-
SET ADJUSTMENT menus before and after the adjustment (see section 4.7)
and save them to the C:\SIDEXIS\XGRAW directory along with the time and
4.1
date!
Coarse and precision adjustment using the Diaphragm/system adjust-

ment menu in SIDEXIS XG
i NOTE
The Pan - Sensor adjustment, Pan - Diaphragm and Ceph - Fixed point of ro-
tation submenus provide a coarse adjustment and a precision adjustment
(precision adjustment is preset).
Always try to use precision adjustment first when adjusting the unit. In most
cases, previous coarse adjustment is not necessary.
With SIDEXIS versions V02.20 and higher, a message window indicates that a
coarse adjustment is required if necessary.
Only if you cannot achieve your goal with precision adjustment, e.g. if the
exposed area is completely outside the image field, should you first
perform a coarse and then a precision adjustment.
If a coarse adjustment proves necessary, deactivate the

PRECISION ADJUSTMENT check box and follow the adjustment steps de-
scribed in the present chapter to perform a coarse adjustment.
The steps and correction procedure required for coarse adjustment are iden-
tical to those for precision adjustment. The only difference between the two
modes is the size of the image field considered. Furthermore, there are fewer
auxiliary lines in the coarse adjustment mode.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4–3
4.1 Important information concerning adjustment Tab 4
Default values in the Diaphragm/system adjustment menu in

SIDEXIS XG
During the adjustment, the default adjustment values are displayed in the text
boxes of the Diaphragm/system adjustment menu.
First perform the adjustment with these default values. If you do not attain the
desired result via this automatic adjustment, you should determine the adjust-
ment values manually by measuring the exposure with the SIDEXIS measur-
ing ruler and then overwrite the default values in the menu.
This procedure is described in the following sections.
Return ring travel with unit SW version V02.27 and higher
Starting with unit version V02.27, return ring travel is automatically performed
during service operation (during adjustment). Actuation of the R key before or
after each adjustment exposure (as described in the following chapters) can
thus be omitted.
i NOTE
It is not possible to select a new exposure during the return ring travel
(incl. resetting of the actuators)!
If a selection is made during this period, the error message "It is not possible to
set the adjustment values at this time" or “No exposure can be taken" appears.
Acknowledge the error message and wait until the return ring travel has been
completed.
Screenshot appearance during adjustment
Without installed OPXG plug-in, the screenshots are as illustrated.

If the OPXG plug-in is installed, the dialogs look the same as for
ORTHOPHOS XG 3D.
– Installing the OPXG plug-in is not obligatory when using SIDEXIS XG,
but it can be installed optionally.
– The OPXG plug-in must be installed for XG devices (not XG 3D) and
using SIDEXIS 4.
59 38 399 D3352
4–4 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 4 4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu
4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment
The DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu guides you through the

adjustment of the panoramic unit and the cephalometer. This service routine
is started from SIDEXIS XG:
4.2
UTILITIES CONSTANCY TEST XCXP SELECT X-RAY DEVICE SER-
VICE EXPOSURE DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
i NOTE
The DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu is password-protected. For
the password, enter the first four digits of the current system date (PC) in re-
verse order.
Example: On 05/30/2004, the service password is 5003
XGPlus / 3Dready
i NOTE
When you open the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu, the unit
switches from the user mode to the PC service mode logged by the PC.
For ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / 3Dready /Ceph:

This mode is displayed on the Easypad via the PC service image.
In the PC service mode, the control options that are available on the Easypad
are determined by SIDEXIS and the currently selected service routine. Gen-
* eral control of the unit by means of the Easypad (as in the user mode) is not
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE possible in this mode.
SERVICE
For ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / Ceph and XG 3 / 3 PPE:
This mode is indicated on the Multipad through the SERVICE display.
In the PC service mode, the control options that are available on the Multipad
eral control of the unit by means of the Multipad (as in the user mode) is not
possible in this mode.
*) Start screen for unit software version

< V02.35 (see also page 4-55)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4–5
4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu Tab 4
i NOTE
The tabs of the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu and several check-
boxes corresponding to the system version are present and activated in the
software (i.e. visible) depending on the system configuration. The following
description of the menus is always based on the maximum configuration of the
comfort class (XGPlus / 3Dready).
The DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu has 12 submenus:

Pan - Sensor adjustment (XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
Pan - Diaphragm or Pan - Fixed diaphragm
(XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5 and XG 3 / 3 PPE)
Pan - Filter (XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5)
Pan - Symmetry (XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
Ceph - Primary diaphragm (XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5)
Ceph - Fixed point of rotation (XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5)
Ceph - Main X-ray beam direction (XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5)
Ceph - Quickshot (only for XGPlus with TSA option / 3Dready )
TSA - Sensor (XGPlus full version only)
Pan - Reset adjustment (XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
Ceph - Reset adjustment (XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5)
Sirona Service Sheet (for internal use only)
You can change between the individual submenus by clicking the menu tab-
smenu tabs with the mouse. To quit the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
menu, click CANCEL.
For the pan adjustment (XGPlus / 3Dready, XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)

the following submenus are required:
Pan sensor: see page 4-12
Pan - Diaphragm or Pan - Fixed diaphragm:
See page 4-22 (XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5) and page 4-32 (XG 3 / 3 PPE)
Pan - Filter (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE): see page 4-40
Pan - Symmetry: see page 4-46
For the ceph adjustment (only for XGPlus / 3Dready and XG 5)

the following submenus are required:
Ceph - Primary diaphragm (see page 4-60)
Ceph - Fixed point of rotation (see page 4-70)
Ceph - Main X-ray beam direction (see page 4-83)
Ceph - Quickshot (only for XGPlus full version / 3Dready, see page 4-92)
For the TSA adjustment (only for XGPluswith full version)

you require the submenu:
TSA sensor (see page 4-109)
59 38 399 D3352
4–6 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 4 4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu
Shifting direction of the exposed image area /

Information on the pictographs in the system adjustment menu
The Pan - Sensor adjustment, Pan - Filter and Pan - Symmetry submenus
each contain a pictographic representation of the expected adjustment image
to help you perform the adjustment. The direction of displacement indicated
by the plus and minus signs located below and next to the pictograph refer to
shifting of the exposed image field in the direction of the stationary auxiliary
lines (see the following example):
Sx
+ Sy
4.2
-
- +
In the example, the exposed image section is offset to the left by the value Sx
and upward by the value Sy. In order to shift the image field so that it comes
to lie inside the auxiliary lines, you must enter …
Sx (shift to the right) with a positive sign
Sy (shift downward) with a negative sign
in the text boxes of the submenu.
i NOTE
For system version XG 3 / 3 PPE: The PAN fixed diaphragm of the device
variant XG 3 / 3 PPE system version cannot be adjusted via the software, i.e.
the pan fixed diaphragm must be adjusted by moving it mechanically (see sec-
tion 4.3.5).
Generally speaking, the exposed image area must always be shifted toward
the auxiliary lines:
– Shift to the right or upward:: Enter the

value (measured offset from the auxiliary line) with
positive sign (for XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5) and mechanical
Movement of the diaphragm rightwards / upwards (for XG 3 / 3 PPE)
– Shift downwards / leftwards: Enter the

value (measured offset from the auxiliary line) with
negative sign (for XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5) / mechanical
Movement of the diaphragm leftwards / downwards (for XG 3 / 3 PPE)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4–7
4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu Tab 4
Displays during the adjustment procedure
During the adjustment procedure, different service routines are started from
SIDEXIS; they are displayed one after the other on the touchscreen of the
(XGPlus / 3Dready) or the Multipad display (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) so that you can
follow their progress.
...for ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / 3Dready / Ceph
In addition to the relevant parameters, the Easypad touchscreen shows the
service routines which are currently executed as well as different help mes-
sages (see section 2.1).
...for ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / Ceph and XG 3 / 3 PPE
In addition to the relevant parameters, the single-line display of the
Multipad shows different help messages (see section 2.1).
Help messages during the adjustment procedure
The most frequent help and status displays during adjustment are the follow-
ing:
Help messages H301: Move panoramic unit into starting position Press the R key R
H401: Plug the sensor into the PAN slot

H402: Plug the sensor into the CEPH slot
H406: ?Move cephalometer into starting position Press the R key R
Status displays ORTHOPHOS is ready for exposure

Exposure not possible
Wait until ORTHOPHOS is ready
ORTHOPHOS is ready in XX s
X-RAY active!
i NOTE
If any other help or error messages are displayed during adjustment, please
follow the instructions provided in chapter 2.
59 38 399 D3352
4–8 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 4 4.3 Adjusting the panoramic X-ray unit
4.3 Adjusting the panoramic X-ray unit
4.3.1 Pan needle phantom
4.3
Accessories: Pan needle phantom
In order to perform the pan sensor adjustment and the symmetry adjust-
ment you must insert the needle phantom A in the bite block holder of the
panoramic X-ray unit.
The needle phantom must be removed from the bite block holder for the
PAN,diaphragm, and TSA adjustment.
CAUTION
It is essential that the needle phantom is removed from the bite block holder of
the panoramic X-ray unit again before a Ceph exposure is taken; otherwise the
phantom may collide with the sensor.
Needles on
the top side
i NOTE
When fitting the needle phantom, make sure that it is installed correctly. For
the adjustment of the X-ray unit, the phantom must be fitted in such a way that
the needles point upward.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4–9
4.3 Adjusting the panoramic X-ray unit Tab 4

(XG 3 / 3 PPE only)
The fixed diaphragm must be dismantled in order to perform the sensor

adjustment of the ORTHOPHOS XG 3 / 3 PPE X-ray unit. To do this, proceed
as follows:
1. Remove the covers:

1. – Tube assembly, front
– Tube assembly, rear
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 10 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
2.
Version delivered until approx. end of 2006 Version delivered after approx. end of 2007
B B B B
Version delivered from around October 2012
(REF 6371707)
4.3
BB
BB
2. For units in the version delivered until around October 2012:

Loosen the two screws B (approx. 2-3 turns) and push the fixed dia-
phragm upward.
For units in the version delivered from around October 2012

(REF 6371707):
Unscrew and remove the two screws B and take off the fixed diaphragm.
Assemble by following the same procedure in reverse order.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 11
4.3.3 Adjusting the pan sensor

(XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment Pan - Sensor adjustment
Preparations Plug the sensor into the sensor slot on the panoramic X-ray unit.
Insert the needle phantom in the bite block holder of the panoramic X-ray
unit (see page 4-9).
ORTHOPHOS XG 3 / 3 PPE:
The fixed diaphragm must be dismantled prior to the sensor adjustment

for the ORTHOPHOS XG 3 / 3 PPE system version (see page 4-10).
OPENING PAN - sensor adjustment 1. Open the PAN - SENSOR ADJUSTMENT submenu (see section 4.2).
i NOTE
The menu provides a precision adjustment and a coarse adjustment (preci-
sion adjustment is preset). Perform a precision adjustment first. In most cases,
previous coarse adjustment is not necessary.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 12 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Enabling scan readiness 2. To make SIDEXIS XG ready for exposure:

Click IMAGE ACQUISITION
SIDEXIS screen The exposure dialog box showing the exposure status
appears in SIDEXIS.
XGPlus / 3Dready: Display on the Easypad Service routine S010.1 and its specific exposure
4.3
parameters are displayed on the Easypad touchscreen.
1 - 60 kV / 3 mA + S10
2 0.60 s 1
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Display on the Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad shows the exposure parameters
of the service routine S010.1.
60/3____0.60____
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 13
Starting the exposure 3. Take an exposure (60 kV / 3 mA; 0.60 s):

– The return takes place automatically; if not, press the
R R key to move the device to the starting position.
For XGPlus / 3Dready:

The procedure is completed when the status message "ORTHOPHOS is
WAIT!
ready for exposure" appears on the touchscreen and the exposure
UNTIL UNIT IS IN STARTING POSITION
parameters of service routine S010.1 are displayed.
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
The procedure is completed when the exposure parameters of service
routine S010.1 are displayed and the progress indicator disappears.
– Press the release button. Hold down the release button until image ac-
quisition is completed and the preview image appears in the exposure
dialog box.
Evaluating the X-ray image 4. Evaluate the X-ray image:
A B
Adjustment: OK Adjustment: not OK
– The three needle images must lie in the center of the exposed ar-
eas and inside the auxiliary lines (A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the pan sensor must be
adjusted.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 14 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Coarse or precision adjustment? Sensor adjustment can usually be performed directly via precision adjust-
ment. Only in exceptional cases, e.g. if one or several needles are completely
outside of the image field (C) in an image acquired with the PRECISION
ADJUSTMENT presetting, is it necessary to perform a coarse adjustment prior
to precision adjustment (D). To do this, deactivate the PRECISION ADJUST-
MENT check box (see page 4-3) and then perform a coarse adjustment pro-
ceeding in the same way as for precision adjustment. The only difference
between coarse and precision adjustment is the size of the image field con-
sidered. Furthermore, there are fewer auxiliary lines in the coarse adjustment
mode.
C D
4.3
X-ray image with unadjusted pan sensor:
Alternatively with precision adjustment setting (C) and coarse adjustment setting (D)
On the X-ray image with coarse adjustment (D), the center pin is just barely
visible on the left margin of the image field in the middle. Even in this extreme
case, an adjustment would still be possible.
i NOTE
With SIDEXIS SW V01.45 and higher, a message window indicates whether a
coarse adjustment is required on completion of the precision exposure.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 15
Enabling scan readiness
i NOTE
The default values for S1, S2, and S3 were automatically determined by
SIDEXIS based on the exposure and entered in the text boxes of the menu.
For manual adjustment, the values displayed at this position in the text boxes
of the menu can be overwritten (see page 4-21).
First continue with the automatic adjustment. Manual determination of the

adjustment values is required only if you fail to reach your goal via automatic
adjustment (see page 4-20).
5. To make SIDEXIS XG ready for exposure:

The PAN - SENSOR ADJUSTMENT dialog box appears in SIDEXIS.
The dialog box suggests a value Lx for the mechanical adjustment of the
sensor.
If the suggested value is greater than ± 0.5 mm, then perform a mechan-
ical adjustment of the sensor.
Moving the sensor 6. Adjust the sensor:
i NOTE
Positive sign = Moves the sensor to the right
Negative sign = Moves the sensor to the left
– Mark the position of the sensor.

– Loosen the three screws A (approx. 2 turns, do not unscrew fully)
A A – Move the sensor to the left or right by the displayed value Lx.
A
– Tighten screws A again.
- +
Device variant 1: Fixed sensor holder
A A
A
- +
Device variant 2: Motorized sensor holder

adjustable (only for XGPlus, TSA)
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 16 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Enabling scan readiness 7. Confirm the displacement of the sensor

and make SIDEXIS XG ready for exposure:
Click OK
appears in SIDEXIS.
4.3
1 - 60 kV / 3 mA + S10
2 0.60 s 1
of the service routine S010.1.
60/3____0.60____
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 17


WAIT!
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
– Press the release button. Hold down the release button until image
acquisition is completed and the preview image appears in the expo-
sure dialog box.
Adjustment: OK
– The three needle images must lie in the center of the exposed
areas and inside the auxiliary lines (A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not yet fulfilled, repeat the adjustment procedure starting
with item 5.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 18 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
i NOTE
If you do not reach your goal via automatic adjustment, repeat the adjustment
procedure with manually determined adjustment values (see page 4-20).
Save values 10. If the image is identical to the ideal image (A), save
the values:
Click SAVE VALUES
i NOTE
In SIDEXIS versions higher than V01.50, the values for S1 - S3 in the PAN -
SENSOR ADJUSTMENT submenu are set equal to zero with a correct
adjustment, i.e. if they are within the permissible tolerance. For versions <
V01.50, the values in the text boxes may deviate slightly from zero even with a
correct adjustment.
Remove the needle phantom from the bite block holder of the unit.
ORTHOPHOS XG 3 / 3 PPE:
Reattach the fixed diaphragm (see page 4-10).
4.3
Go on to the next adjustment step.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 19
Manual adjustment of the PAN sensor
The manual adjustment procedure is similar to the one for automatic adjust-
ment. The only difference is that the default adjustment values automatically
determined by SIDEXIS are overwritten by manually determined adjustment
values in the PAN - SENSOR ADJUSTMENT submenu.
Determining the adjustment values for Measure distances S1, S2, and S3 with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.
S1, S2, and S3 manually
S1 S2 S3
i NOTE
To measure S1, S2, and S3, estimate the horizontal center position of the
displayed needles. Measure in the lower area of the needles if possible, since
they may have been bent slightly after repeated use.
Tip: To facilitate the measuring procedure, you can color the image in
SIDEXIS (see also SIDEXIS Operator’s Manual).
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 20 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Overwriting default values for S1, S2, Overwrite the default values for S1, S2, and S3 with the measured values
and S3 in the text boxes of the PAN - SENSOR ADJUSTMENT submenu.
i NOTE
For information on the direction of displacement (input of +/- sign in the menu)
see page 4-7. Use points as decimal separators!
Proceed with step 5 of the adjustment procedure.
4.3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 21
4.3.4 Adjust pan diaphragm (motorized)

(XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5)
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment Pan - Diaphragm
Preparations Remove the needle phantom from the bite block holder of the panoramic
X-ray unit (see page 4-9).
i NOTE
If a message window indicating that the diaphragm is tilted appears during the
pan diaphragm adjustment, this means that the primary diaphragm is me-
chanically maladjusted in the vertical axis. In this case, contact the SIRONA
Customer Service Center:
OPENING pan diaphragm 1. Go to the PAN DIAPHRAGM submenu.
i NOTE
sion adjustment
is preset). Perform a precision adjustment first. In most cases, previous coarse
adjustment is not necessary.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 22 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

appears in SIDEXIS.
4.3
1 - 60 kV / 3 mA + S30
2 0.20 s 2
XG 5: Display on the Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad shows the exposure parameters
of service routine S030.2 .
60/3____0.20____
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 23
Starting the exposure 3. Take an exposure (60 kV/3 mA; 0.20 s):
R key to move the device to the starting position.
R
WAIT! ready for exposure" appears on the touchscreen and the exposure
UNTIL UNIT IS IN STARTING POSITION parameters of service routine S030.2 are displayed.
For XG 5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 24 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
A B
4.3
– The exposed diaphragm area must lie horizontally centered in the

image field as well as inside the superimposed auxiliary lines (A).
– A surrounding white border must be present. The maximum den-
sity must lie in the center of the diaphragm area (A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the pan diaphragm must be adjusted.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 25
Coarse or precision adjustment? In most cases, the diaphragm can be adjusted using precision adjustment
from the start (see step 5 onward). Only in exceptional cases, e.g. if the
exposed image field is completely outside the image field (C) in an image
acquired with PRECISION ADJUSTMENT setting, is it necessary to perform a
coarse adjustment prior to precision adjustment (D). To do this, deactivate the
PRECISION ADJUSTMENT check box (see page 4-3) and then perform a
coarse adjustment proceeding in the same way as for precision adjustment.
The only difference between coarse and precision adjustment is the size of
the image field considered. Furthermore, there are fewer auxiliary lines in the
coarse adjustment mode.
i NOTE
When the diaphragm is correctly adjust-
ed, a course adjustment does not produce
a meaningful image, since no surrounding
border can be seen in this case (similar to C D
image C).
X-ray image with unadjusted pan diaphragm:

On the X-ray image with coarse adjustment (D), the exposed area is just
about visible at the right margin of the image field. Even in this extreme case,
an adjustment would still be possible.
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 26 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
i NOTE
Enabling scan readiness The default values for Sx and Sy were automatically determined by SIDEXIS
based on the exposure and entered in the text boxes of the menu.
First continue with the automatic adjustment. Manual determination of the ad-
justment values is required only if you fail to reach your goal via automatic ad-
justment (see page 4-30).

appears in SIDEXIS.
4.3
1 - 60 kV / 3 mA + S30
2 0.20 s 2
of service routine S030.2.
60/3____0.20____
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 27

For XG 5:
dialog box.
Adjustment: OK
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 28 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

i NOTE
with step 5.
i NOTE
i NOTE
If a message window indicating the need to take an additional X-ray exposure
opens at this point, repeat the adjustment procedure starting with item 5. This
is necessary even if the X-ray exposure which has been taken is already within
the tolerance limits. This additional exposure ensures that the new diaphragm
gap width offset is also correctly adjusted.
Save values 8. If the image is identical to the ideal image (A), save the values:
Click SAVE VALUES
i NOTE
4.3
In SIDEXIS versions higher than V01.50 the values for Sx and Sy in the PAN
DIAPHRAGM submenu are set equal to zero with a correct adjustment, i.e. if
they are within the permissible tolerance. For versions < V01.50, the values in
the text boxes may deviate slightly from zero even with a correct adjustment.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 29
Manual adjustment of the PAN diaphragm
values in the PAN - DIAPHRAGM submenu.
Determining adjustment values for Sx Measure distances Sx and Sy with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.
and Sy manually
Sy
S2
Sx
i NOTE
Tip: To facilitate the measuring procedure, you can color the image in SIDEX-
IS (see also SIDEXIS Operator’s Manual).
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 30 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Overwriting the default values for Sx Overwrite the default values for Sx and Sy with the measured values in
and Sy the text boxes of the PAN - DIAPHRAGM submenu.
i NOTE
4.3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 31
4.3.5 Adjusting the (fixed) pan diaphragm

(XG 3 / 3 PPE)
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment Pan - diaphragm
i NOTE
Preparations The fixed diaphragm must be reattached for this adjustment step
(see page 4-10).
Remove the needle phantom from the bite block holder of the panoramic
X-ray unit (see page 4-9).
OPENING pan diaphragm 1. Go to the PAN DIAPHRAGM submenu.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 32 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

appears in SIDEXIS.
XG 3 / 3 PPE: Display on the Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad shows the exposure parameters
4.3
60/3____0.20____
1 2 3

WAIT!
UNTIL UNIT IS IN STARTING POSITION – Press the release button. Hold down the release button until image ac-
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 33
A B

i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the pan diaphragm must be adjusted.
The adjustment of the pan fixed diaphragm (XG 3 / 3 PPE) must be performed
mechanically, i.e. this cannot be done via SIDEXIS!
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 34 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Measuring adjustment values in Measure distances Sx and Sy with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.
SIDEXIS
Sy
S2
4.3
Sx
i NOTE
Measured value x 0.27 (mm) = mechanical adjustment value of diaphragm
(mm)
i NOTE
Tip: To facilitate the measuring procedure, you can also color the image in
SIDEXIS (see SIDEXIS Operator’s Manual).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 35
Mechanical adjustment of the fixed dia- • Remove the covers (see also page 1-66):
phragm – Tube assembly, front
For units in the version delivered until around October 2012:
B
B
A A
A A
D D
C
Plastic Lead dia-

support phragm
Loosen both screws A slightly (approx. 1 turn).

Adjust the diaphragm position via eccentric screws B (horizontal adjust-
ment) and C (vertical adjustment).
– CW rotation of the eccentric screws:
Movement of the diaphragm to the right or upward
– CCW rotation of the eccentric screws:
Movement of the diaphragm to the left or downward
i NOTE
To measure the shift, refer to the gap between the plastic support and the lead
diaphragm (D).
Tighten screws A again.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 36 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

(REF 6371707):
4.3
Loosen both screws A slightly (approx. 1 turn).
Adjust the diaphragm position via adjusting screws B (horizontal adjust-
ment) and C (vertical adjustment).
– B: Movement of the diaphragm to the right or left
– C: Movement of the diaphragm upward or downward
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 37

appears in SIDEXIS.
XG 3 / 3 PPE: Display on the Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad shows the exposure parameters
60/3____0.20____
1 2 3

WAIT!
UNTIL UNIT IS IN STARTING POSITION – Press the release button. Hold down the release button until image ac-
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 38 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
4.3
Adjustment: OK

i NOTE
If these criteria have not yet been fulfilled, repeat the mechanical adjustment
of the diaphragm (see page 4-35) and then continue with step 5.
If the image is identical to the ideal image (A), then the adjustment of the dia-
phragm is completed:

59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 39
4.3.6 Adjusting the pan filter

for units in the version delivered from around October 2012
(XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5, not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment Pan - Filter
Opening pan - filter 1. Go to the PAN - FILTER submenu.

59 38 399 D3352
4 – 40 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
appears in SIDEXIS.
1 - 60 kV / 3 mA + S30
2 0.20 s 3
4.3
60/3____0.20____
1 2 3

For XG 5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 41
A B
– The superimposed filter must cover one half of the diaphragm (A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the pan filter must be adjusted.
i NOTE
Enabling scan readiness The default value for Fx was automatically determined by SIDEXIS based on
the exposure and entered in the text box of the menu.
For manual adjustment, the value displayed at this position in the text box of
the menu can be overwritten (see page 4-45).
justment value is required only if you fail to reach your goal via automatic ad-

59 38 399 D3352
4 – 42 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
appears in SIDEXIS.
1 - 60 kV / 3 mA + S30
2 0.20 s 3
4.3
60/3____0.20____
1 2 3

WAIT!
For XG 5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 43
Adjustment: OK
– The superimposed filter must cover one half of the diaphragm (A).
i NOTE
If this criterion is not yet fulfilled (B), repeat the adjustment procedure starting
with step 5.
procedure with a manually determined adjustment value (see page 4-45).
Saving a value 8. If the image is identical to the ideal image (A), save
the value:
Click SAVE VALUES
i NOTE
In SIDEXIS versions V01.50 and higher the value for Fx in the
PAN - FILTER submenu is set equal to zero with a correct adjustment, i.e. if it
is within the permissible tolerance. For versions < V01.50, the value in the text
box may deviate slightly from zero even with a correct adjustment.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 44 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Manual adjustment of the PAN filter
ment. The only difference is that the default adjustment value automatically
determined by SIDEXIS is overwritten by a manually determined adjustment
value in the PAN - FILTER submenu.
Determining the adjustment value for Measure distance Fx with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.
Fx manually
Fx
i NOTE 4.3
Overwriting the default value for Fx Replace the default value for Fx by entering the measured value in the text
box of the PAN - FILTER submenu.
i NOTE
see
page 4-7. Use points as decimal separators!
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 45
4.3.7 Adjusting the pan symmetry

(XGPlus / 3Dready / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment Pan - Symmetry
Preparations Insert the needle phantom in the bite block holder of the panoramic X-ray
OPENING pan - symmetry 1. Go to the PAN - SYMMETRY submenu.

59 38 399 D3352
4 – 46 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
appears in SIDEXIS.
1 - 60 kV / 3 mA + S10
2 14.1 s 2
4.3
60/3____14.1____
1 2 3
Starting the exposure 3. Take an exposure (60kV / 3mA; 14.1 s):

R
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 47
A ZOOM: 1:1 B
± 0.75 mm ± 0.75 mm
A1 = 88.6 mm ± 1 mm
A2 A2
A2 = 44.3 ± 0.5 mm A2 = 44.3 ± 0.5 mm
Adjustment: OK (length measurement with SIDEXIS)
S2
Adjustment: not OK (length measurement with SIDEXIS)
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 48 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
– The shadow of the center needle, the needle image and the auxil-
iary line must be coincident and located behind each other.
A tolerance (offset of needle from the central auxiliary line) of
± 0.75 mm is permissible (A).
– Distance A1 must be 88.6 ± 1 mm (A).
– Distances A2 must be identical, each being 44.3 ± 0.5 mm
(A).
– A white border surrounding the image on all sides must be visible
(B).
i NOTE
If one of these criteria is not fulfilled (C), the pan symmetry must be
adjusted.
i NOTE
Enabling scan readiness The default values for S1, S2, and S3 were automatically determined by SI-
DEXIS based on the exposure and entered in the text boxes of the menu.
4.3

appears in SIDEXIS.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 49
1 - 60 kV / 3 mA + S10
2 14.1 s 2
60/3____14.1____
1 2 3


For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 50 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
A ZOOM: 1:1 B
± 0.75 mm ± 0.75 mm
A1 = 88.6 mm ± 1 mm
A2 A2
A2 = 44.3 ± 0.5 mm A2 = 44.3 ± 0.5 mm
4.3
(A).
(B).
i NOTE
Always measure exactly from pin center to pin center.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 51
i NOTE
If the X-ray image still does not correspond to the ideal image, it is pos-
sible that one or more criteria have not yet been fulfilled:
Case 1: Center needle not coincident with auxiliary line

If the shadow of the center needle, the needle image and the auxiliary line do
not yet coincide, then repeat the adjustment procedure starting with step 5.
Case 2: Symmetry not OK

If the shadow of the center needle, the needle image and the auxiliary line co-
incide, but the symmetry or the distance between the two outer needles is not
yet correct, then repeat the adjustment procedure starting with step 5.
i NOTE
Save values 8. If all criteria are fulfilled and the current image is identical to the ideal im-
age (A+B), then save the values:
Click SAVE VALUES
i NOTE
In SIDEXIS versions V01.50 and higher, the values for S1, S2, and S3 in the
PAN - SYMMETRY submenu are set equal to zero with a correct adjustment,
i.e. if they are within the permissible tolerance. For versions < V01.50, the val-
ues in the text boxes may deviate slightly from zero even with a correct adjust-
ment.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 52 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Manual adjustment of the PAN symmetry
values in the PAN - SYMMETRY submenu.
Determining the adjustment values for Measure distances S1, S2, and S3with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.
4.3
S1 S2 S3
i NOTE
Measure in the lower area of the needles if possible, since they may have been
bent slightly after repeated use.
Always take the measurement exactly from the center of the auxiliary line to
the center of the pin.
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 53
and S3 in the text boxes of the PAN - SYMMETRY submenu.
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 54 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 4 4.4 Checking and adjusting the touchscreen (only for XGPlus / 3Dready)

(only for XGPlus / 3Dready)
Switching the system ON 1. Switch the unit ON.

Once the unit software has started up, the start screen is displayed on the
touchscreen.
Start screen for unit software Start screen for unit software vers
version < V02.35 V02.35
*
*) Start screen for unit software version
≥ V02.35
2. When the start screen appears (see left), press the 3 buttons light local-
izer, T and R immediately and simultaneously.
i NOTE
These buttons must be pressed while the unit is booting and the start screen is
4.4
still displayed.
The first adjustment screen appears on the display.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 55
4.4 Checking and adjusting the touchscreen (only for XGPlus / 3Dready) Tab 4
Performing calibration 3. Calibrate the touchscreen:
Touch the upper left corner.

The second adjustment screen appears on the display.
Touch the lower right corner.

The third adjustment screen appears on the display.
see next page
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 56 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 4 4.4 Checking and adjusting the touchscreen (only for XGPlus / 3Dready)
Touch the center of the green square in the

upper right corner.
The fourth adjustment screen appears on the display.
i NOTE
Try to place the black dots which then appear as close to the centers of the
squares as possible by touching the centers of the squares.
Touch the center of the green square in the

bottom left corner.
The fifth adjustment screen appears on the display.
Confirm the adjustment with YES.
4.4
The touchscreen is now adjusted.
To repeat the adjustment, touch NO.

You can ABORT the adjustment at any time by pressing the abort
button.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 57
4.5 Adjusting the cephalometer (XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5, if ceph present) Tab 4

(XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5, if ceph present)
CAUTION
For XGPlus / 3Dreadyunits with a unit software version of V02.40 or higher
and an occlusal bite block installed:
Each time the ceph arm is attached or removed, the unit creep speed must be
checked in the user mode due to the resulting change in the unit's weight (Pre-
requisite: The occlusal bite block is plugged in and P1 is selected). If there is
any need for correction, you can reconfigure the creep speed via service rou-
tine S018.10.
4.5.1 Functional test

(only for XGPlus with left-arm version)
In XGPlusunits with with ceph arm mounted on the left side,
a different ring type is used with a serial number ≤ 40104 than with a serial
number > 40104.
Due to the different ring types used, the default ring offsets stored in the sys-
tem for the position of the ring switching plate are also different.
If a software update is performed on a unit with the old ring type, this presents
no problem as long as no module replacement (DX11) is performed and the
unit adjustment is not reset to the factory setting via the CEPH - RESET
ADJUSTMENT menu (see page 4-117).
If the previous system adjustment values are lost for any of the above rea-
sons, the correct ring type must be reset via service routine S034.7 before
beginning the adjustment of the cephalometer.
Therefore, check before beginning the adjustment...

whether an old ring type is installed in the system
old ring type = ceph units with serial nos. up to 40104
new ring type = ceph units with serial no. 40105 or higher
whether a module has been replaced or the adjustment values have been
reset and...
if the answer is yes, execute service routine S034.7 (see page 5-167).
i NOTE
XG 5 and XGPlus / 3Dreadyunits with the ceph arm mounted on the right side
are always equipped with the new ring type. It is therefore not necessary to
check the ring type of these units.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 58 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 4 4.5 Adjusting the cephalometer (XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5, if ceph present)
4.5.2 Ceph test phantom
Accessories: Ceph test phantom
4.5
For the adjustment of the ceph primary diaphragm and the ceph main X-
ray beam direction, you must insert test phantom B in the sensor slot on
the panoramic X-ray unit.
For the adjustment of the ceph fixed point of rotation, you must remove
the test phantom from the sensor slot on the panoramic X-ray unit.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 59
4.5.3 Adjusting the ceph primary diaphragm
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment Ceph - Primary diaphragm
i NOTE
For units with a unit software < V02.27 the exposure parameters for the prima-
ry diaphragm adjustment may deviate from the parameters shown here
(64 kV / 16 mA; 6.1 s).
CAUTION
It is essential that the PAN needle phantom is removed from the bite block
holder of the panoramic X-ray unit before a Ceph exposure is taken; otherwise
the phantom may collide with the sensor.
Preparations Move the ear plug holders on the cephalometer completely apart and
swing them out of the beam direction (ap).
Insert the test phantom in the sensor slot on the panoramic X-ray unit
(see page 4-59).
Plug the sensor into the sensor slot on the cephalometer.
Open the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu
(see page 4-5).
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 60 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Opening CEPH PRIMARY DIAPHRAGM 1. Go to the CEPH - PRIMARY DIAPHRAGM submenu.

4.5
appears in SIDEXIS.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 61
1 - 64 kV / 16 mA + S10
2 6.1 s 3
64/16____6.1____
1 2 3


For XG 5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 62 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S2
S2
Adjustment: OK
Length measurement with S3 = approx. 60 mm
SIDEXIS
4.5
B
Adjustment: not OK
Length measurement with
SIDEXIS
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 63
– The vertical pin must be horizontally centered in the exposed im-

age field (A). A slight vertical offset of the grid is permissible.
– A uniform white border surrounding the image on all sides must
be visible (A).
– Distance S3 must be approx. 60 mm.
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the ceph primary diaphragm must be
adjusted.
i NOTE
If S3is >70mm, then please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center:
Tel.: +49 (0)62 5116 1670
i NOTE
Enabling scan readiness The default values for S1, S2, S3, and S4 were automatically determined by

appears in SIDEXIS.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 64 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
1 - 64 kV / 16 mA + S10
2 6.1 s 3
64/16____6.1____
1 2 3
4.5
R
WAIT!
For XG 5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 65
S2
S2
Adjustment: OK
S3 = approx. 60 mm
– The vertical pin must be horizontally centered in the exposed im-

age field (A). A slight vertical offset of the grid is permissible.
– A uniform white border surrounding the image on all sides must
be visible (A).
– Distance S3 must be approx. 60 mm.
i NOTE
with step 5.
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 66 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
the values:
Click SAVE VALUES
4.5
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 67
Manual adjustment of the ceph primary dia-

phragm
values in the CEPH - PRIMARY DIAPHRAGM submenu.
Determining the adjustment values for Measure distances S1-S4 with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler:
S1, S2, S3, and S4 manually S1: Distance from the top edge of the image
S2: Distance from the right edge of the exposed area
to the middle of the center pin
S3: Width of the exposed area
S4: Distance from the bottom edge of the image
S1
S2
new S3
S4
i NOTE
Tip: To facilitate the measuring procedure, you can invert or color
the image in SIDEXIS (see also SIDEXIS
Operator’s Manual).
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 68 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Overwriting default values for S1, S2, Overwrite the default values for S1, S2, S3, and S4 with the measured val-
S3, and S4 ues in the text boxes of the CEPH - PRIMARY DIAPHRAGM submenu.
i NOTE
4.5
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 69
4.5.4 Adjusting the ceph fixed point of rotation
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment Ceph - Fixed point of rotation
CAUTION
Preparations Remove the ceph test phantom from the sensor slot of the panoramic X-
ray unit (see page 4-59).
OPENING Ceph - Fixed point of rotation 1. Go to the CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION submenu.
i NOTE
sion adjustment
is preset). Perform a precision adjustment first. In most cases, previous coarse
adjustment is not necessary.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 70 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

appears in SIDEXIS.
XGPlus / 3Dready:Display on the Easypad Service routine S010.5 and its specific exposure
4.5
1 - 80 kV / 14 mA + S10
2 0.60 s 5
80/14___0.60____
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 71


For XG 5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 72 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
A B
4.5
– The exposed diaphragm area must lie centered and straight

in the image field as well as inside the superimposed
auxiliary lines (A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the ceph fixed point of rotation must be ad-
justed.
Coarse or precision adjustment? In most cases, the fixed point of rotation can be adjusted using precision
adjustment from the start (see steps 5 ff.). Only in exceptional cases, e.g. if
the exposed image field is completely outside the image field (C) in an image
acquired with PRECISION ADJUSTMENT setting, is it necessary to perform a
coarse adjustment prior to precision adjustment (D). To do this, deactivate the
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 73
PRECISION ADJUSTMENT check box (see page 4-3) and then perform a
coarse adjustment proceeding in the same way as for precision adjustment.
The only difference between coarse and precision adjustment is the size of
the image field considered. Furthermore, there are fewer auxiliary lines in the
coarse adjustment mode.
C D
X-ray image with unadjusted ceph fixed point of rotation:

On the X-ray image with coarse adjustment (D), the exposed area is still vis-
ible in the image field. Even in this extreme case, an adjustment would still be
possible.
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 74 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
i NOTE
The default values for S1, S2, and S3 were automatically determined by
First continue with the automatic adjustment. Manual determination of the

adjustment values is required only if you fail to reach your goal via automatic
adjustment (see page 4-81).

SIDEXIS screen In SIDEXIS, the

CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION dialog appears.
The dialog box suggests two values, Lx and Ly, for the mechanical adjust-
ment of the ceph secondary diaphragm.
If the suggested values are greater than ±0.5 mm, you must perform a
mechanical adjustment of the diaphragm.
i NOTE
Positive sign = movement of the diaphragm to the right or upward
Negative sign = movement of the diaphragm to the left or downward
4.5
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 75
Adjusting the diaphragm 6. Adjust the diaphragm on the cephalometer mechanically.

To do this, proceed as follows:
Removing the cover 7. Loosen screw B and remove the cover of the secondary diaphragm by
pulling it downward.
Detaching the diaphragm 8. Loosen screws C slightly

(approx. 2-3 turns).
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 76 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Adjusting the inclination 9. Adjust the inclination of the diaphragm with screw D (Lx mm) and the
height of the diaphragm with screw E (Ly mm) .
i NOTE
Screw D: CCW rotation = Correction of diaphragm to the right

D CW rotation = Correction of diaphragm to the left
Lx Screw E: CCW rotation = Correction of diaphragm downward
CW rotation = Correction of diaphragm upward
E Use a ruler to measure the displacement.
The directions of rotation specified for the screws above apply equally to both
Ly versions (left-handed and right-handed ceph arm).
Tighten screws C again.
Confirming the diaphragm adjustment 10. Confirm the mechanical correction of the ceph secondary diaphragm:
Click OK
4.5
appears in SIDEXIS.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 77
1 - 80 kV / 14 mA + S10
2 0.60 s 5
80/14___0.60____
1 2 3

For XG 5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 78 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
4.5
Adjustment: OK

i NOTE
with step 5.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 79
Save values 13. If the image is identical to the ideal image (A), save the values:
Click SAVE VALUES
i NOTE
In SIDEXIS versions V01.50 and higher the values for S1, S2, and S3 in the
CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION submenu are set equal to zero with a
correct adjustment, i.e. if they are within the permissible tolerance.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 80 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Adjusting the ceph fixed point of rotation manu-

ally
values in the CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION submenu.
Determining the adjustment values for Measure distances S1, S2, and S3 with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.
S1
4.5
B
S3
S2
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 81
and S3 in the text boxes of the CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION submenu.
i NOTE
see
page 4-7. Use points as decimal separators!
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 82 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
4.5.5 Adjusting the ceph main X-ray beam direction
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment Ceph - Main X-ray beam direction
CAUTION
4.5
Preparations Insert the test phantom in the sensor slot on the panoramic X-ray unit
(see page 4-59).
Swing the ear plug holders out of the beam direction.
OPENING Ceph - Main x-ray beam direc- 1. Go to the CEPH - MAIN X-RAY BEAM DIRECTION submenu.
tion
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 83

appears in SIDEXIS.
1 - 80 kV / 14 mA + S10
2 14.9 s 6
80/14___14.9____
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 84 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016


For XG 5:
dialog box.
4.5
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 85
A
10 mm
10 mm
10 mm
10 mm
Adjustment: OK
Adjustment: not OK
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 86 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
– A horizontal bar must be visible in the center of the image (A). If

this bar is visible, the exposure is
OK and ...
– the two beams imaged are within the
tolerance band of ± 10 mm (A).
i NOTE
If the above criteria are not fulfilled (B),
the ceph main X-ray beam direction must be adjusted.
i NOTE
Enabling scan readiness The default value for S1 was automatically determined by SIDEXIS based on

4.5
appears in SIDEXIS.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 87
1 - 80 kV / 14 mA + S10
2 14.9 s 6
80/14___14.9____
1 2 3


For XG 5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 88 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Adjustment: OK
– A horizontal bar must be visible in the center of the image (A). If
4.5
this bar is visible, the exposure is
OK and ...
– the two beams imaged are within the
tolerance band of ± 10 mm (A).
i NOTE
with step 5.
Saving a value 8. If the image is identical to the ideal image (A), save the value:
Click SAVE VALUES
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 89
Manual adjustment of the ceph main X-ray beam

direction
value in the CEPH - MAIN X-RAY BEAM DIRECTION submenu.
Determining the adjustment value for Measure distance S1 with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.
S1 manually
S1
Measuring range
Measuring range
i NOTE
Measure within the measuring range shown in C.
Inflection point Measure the maximum distance S1. If the X-ray beam is imaged in the form of
an S curve, measure S1 at the inflection point of the curve, but always within
the measuring range shown.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 90 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Overwriting the default value for S1 Replace the default value for S1 displayed in the text box of the CEPH
MAIN X-RAY BEAM DIRECTION submenu with the measured value if nec-
essary.
i NOTE
Use points as decimal separators!
4.5
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 91
4.5.6 Adjusting Ceph - Quickshot

(only for XGPlus full version / 3Dready)
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment Ceph - Quickshot
CAUTION
Preparations Remove the ceph test phantom from the sensor slot of the panoramic X-
ray unit (see page 4-59).
OPENING Ceph - Quickshot 1. Go to the CEPH QUICKSHOT submenu.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 92 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

appears in SIDEXIS.
4.5
1 - 80 kV / 14 mA + S10
2 0.30 s 8
80/14___0.30____
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 93

R
For XG 5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 94 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
A B
4.5

In the image field as well as inside the superimposed auxiliary
lines (A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the ceph quickshot must be
adjusted.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 95
i NOTE
The default value for S1 was automatically determined by SIDEXIS based on

appears in SIDEXIS.
1 - 80 kV / 14 mA + S10
2 0.30 s 8
80/14___0.30____
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 96 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016


For XG 5:
dialog box.
4.5
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 97
Adjustment: OK

lines (A).
i NOTE
with step 5.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 98 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Saving a value 8. If the image is identical to the ideal image (A), save the value:
Click SAVE VALUES
i NOTE
In SIDEXIS versions V01.50 and higher, the value for S1 in the CEPH -
QUICKSHOT submenu is set equal to zero with a correct adjustment, i.e. if it
is within the permissible tolerance. For versions < V01.50, the value in the text
box may deviate slightly from zero even with a correct adjustment.
Quit the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu and proceed to the

section 4.5.7 "Checking and adjusting the alignment of the ear plugs" or
continue the adjustment procedure with the TSA sensor menu (see page
4-109).
4.5
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 99
Manual adjustment of the ceph quickshot
value in the CEPH QUICKSHOT submenu.
Determining the adjustment value for Measure distance S1 with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.
S1 manually
S1
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 100 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Overwriting the default value for S1 Replace the default value for S1 displayed in the text box of the CEPH
QUICKSHOT submenu with the measured value if necessary.
i NOTE
4.5
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 101
4.5.7 Checking and adjusting the alignment of the

ear plugs
Checking the ear plug alignment
i NOTE
The sensor must be plugged into the sensor slot on the cephalometer.
No sensor must be plugged into the slot on the panoramic X-ray unit.
Preparations For XGPlus / 3Dready:

Select the CEPHmode in the main menu on the Easypad.
For XG 5:
Select one of the ceph programs on the Multipad.
Position of the ear plug holders 1. Move the ear plug holders completely apart and
swing them into the beam direction.
Fitting the adjusting caps 2. Fit adjusting caps D onto the ear plugs and secure them with adhesive
tape.
Fit the black adjusting cap on the outside (sensor side)
Fit the transparent adjusting cap on the inside (tube assembly side).
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 102 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Removing the cover 3. Unscrew and remove the cover from the cephalometer.
Opening the SIDEXIS Service menu 4. Open the SIDEXIS Service menu: To do this, proceed as follows:
Opening the constancy test Select the constancy test in SIDEXIS XG:
Select UTILITIES CONSTANCY TEST
The classical SIDEXIS user interface is started.
Constancy test is already preset.
4.5
Starting the exposure mode Start the exposure mode:
Click XCXP
The dialog box for selecting the X-ray device appears
on the screen.
Select / confirm X-ray device Select/confirm the desired X-ray device:

Select e.g. ROOM 1 and click OK
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 103
Selecting/confirming the test type Select/confirm the test type:

The dialog box for selecting the service exposure appears on the
screen.
Selecting/confirming the service exposure Select/confirm the service exposure:

Click QUALITY TEST EXPOSURE
i NOTE
The ceph mode must be activated for the ceph quality test exposure
(see page 4-102).
i NOTE
If necessary, select the X-ray component.
appears in SIDEXIS.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 104 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Starting the exposure 5. Take an exposure:


WAIT! ready for exposure" appears on the touchscreen.
UNTIL UNIT IS IN STARTING POSITION For XG 5:
The procedure is completed when the progress indicator disappears.
dialog box.
Exposure The lead balls in the adjusting caps appear as dots on the image.
The two dots must be coincident.
i NOTE
If the two dots are not coincident, the ear plugs must be adjusted.
4.5
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 105
Adjusting the ear plug alignment
Horizontal correction 6. Loosen screws A slightly. Do not unscrew them completely!

7. Adjust the ear plugs in the horizontal direction by turning screw B coun-
terclockwise or clockwise. The direction of rotation corresponding to a unit
with the Ceph arm mounted on the left or on the right side is shown in the
following illustration:
Ceph arm mounted on Ceph arm mounted on

left-hand side right-hand side
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 106 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
4.5
C
approx. 100 degrees
Vertical correction 8. Turn the rotary table counterclockwise approx. 100 degrees until you can
see screw C through the opening in the cover plate.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 107
9. Loosen screw C slightly (do not unscrew it completely!) and adjust the
ear plugs in the vertical direction with knurled nut D. The direction of ro-
tation corresponding to a unit with the Ceph arm mounted on the left or on
the right side is shown in the following illustration:
Ceph arm mounted on Ceph arm mounted on

left-hand side right-hand side
Tighten screw C again.
Position of the ear plug holders 10. Turn the ear plug holders back into the beam direction. Make sure that the
black adjusting cap is located on the outside again.
Release radiation again to check the adjustment

(see page 4-103).
– If the two dots displayed on the screen are coincident, reattach the cov-
er (see page 4-103).
– If the two dots displayed on the screen are not yet coincident, repeat
the adjustment procedure.
Outside
The adjustment of the unit is now completed.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 108 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 4 4.6 TSA sensor adjustment (only for XGPlus with full version)

(only for XGPlus with full version)
Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment TSA sensor
4.6
Open the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu if it is not already
open (see page 4-5).
OPENING TSA sensor 1. Go to the TSA SENSOR submenu.

59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 109
4.6 TSA sensor adjustment (only for XGPlus with full version) Tab 4
appears in SIDEXIS.
XGPlus: Display on the Easypad Service routine S030.4 and its specific exposure
1 - 60 kV / 3 mA + S30
2 0.20 s 4

WAIT! parameters of service routine S030.4 are displayed.
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 110 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
A B
4.6

image field (A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the TSA sensor must be adjusted.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 111

i NOTE
The default values for S1 and S2 were automatically determined by SIDEXIS
based on the exposure and entered in the text box of the menu.

appears in SIDEXIS.
1 - 60 kV / 3 mA + S30
2 0.20 s 4

dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 112 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
4.6
Adjustment: OK
– The exposed diaphragm area must lie horizontally and vertically

centered in the image field (A).
i NOTE
with step 5.
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 113
the values:
Click SAVE VALUES
i NOTE
In SIDEXIS versions higher than V01.50, the values for Sx and Sy in the TSA
SENSOR submenu are set equal to zero with a correct adjustment, i.e. if they
are within the permissible tolerance. For versions < V01.50, the values in the
text boxes may deviate slightly from zero even with a correct adjustment.
The adjustment of the TSA sensor is completed.
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 114 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Manual adjustment of the TSA sensor
values in the TSA SENSOR submenu.
Determining adjustment values for Sx Measure distances Sx and Sy with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.
and Sy manually
i NOTE
Measure from the edge of the imaged diaphragm area roughly up to the edge
of the image area. Leave a small border, since a surrounding white border
should be present following the correction.
4.6
S2
Sy
Sx
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 115
Overwriting the default values for Sx Overwrite the default values for Sx and Sy with the measured values in
and Sy the text boxes of the TSA SENSOR submenu.
i NOTE
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 116 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 4 4.7 Resetting the adjustment (XGPlus / 3Dready / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)

(XGPlus / 3Dready / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
i NOTE
Important! Make sure to note down the values displayed in the text boxes
before modifying them. If necessary, you can reset the adjustment val-
ues to the factory settings then.
Contact the SIRONA Customer Service Center for more information (or
to enable the menu):
Tel.: +49 (0)62 5116 1670
The DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu offers you the possibility of

resetting or manually modifying any or all of the pan or ceph adjustment set-
tings you have made in very
exceptional cases.
Resetting the pan adjustment To reset the pan settings, open the
PAN - RESET ADJUSTMENT menu.
4.7
Ceph - Reset adjustment To reset the ceph settings, open the
(not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) CEPH - RESET ADJUSTMENT menu.
i NOTE
If the adjustment values have been reset, the unit must be readjusted.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 4 – 117
4.7 Resetting the adjustment (XGPlus / 3Dready / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) Tab 4
59 38 399 D3352
4 – 118 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
ORTHOPHOS XG
5 Service routines
Tab 5
Contents
5.1 Selecting the Service menu ..................................5 – 12
5.1.1 Selection on the Easypad (for XGPlus/3Dready) 5 – 12
5.1.2 Selection on the Multipad (for XG5/3/3 PPE) ... 5 – 15
5.2 Selecting a service routine ....................................5 – 17

5.2.1 Service routines with security access............... 5 – 19
5.3 Service routines with SIDEXIS ..............................5 – 20
5.4 Service routine S001 .............................................5 – 23

5.5.1 S002: Test step 1 ............................................. 5 – 26
5.5.2 S002: Test step 3 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) ......... 5 – 28
5.5.3 S002: Test step 4 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) ......... 5 – 29

5.6.1 S005: Test step 1 ............................................. 5 – 31
5.6.2 S005: Test step 2 ............................................. 5 – 33
5.6.3 S005: Test step 4 ............................................. 5 – 35
5.6.4 S005: Test step 5 ............................................. 5 – 37
5.6.5 S005: Test step 6 ............................................. 5 – 38
5.6.6 S005: Test step 7 ............................................. 5 – 41

5.7.1 S007: Test step 1 ............................................. 5 – 45
5.7.2 S007: Test step 2 ............................................. 5 – 48
5.7.3 S007: Test step 5 ............................................. 5 – 50

5.8.1 S008: Test step 2 ............................................. 5 – 53
5.8.2 S008: Test step 3 ............................................. 5 – 55
5.8.3 S008: Test step 4
(not for XG3 and XG3 PPE) ............................. 5 – 59

5.9.1 S009: Test step 4 ............................................. 5 – 61

5.10.1 S012: Test step 1 ............................................. 5 – 65
5.10.2 S012 Test step 2 .............................................. 5 – 67
5.10.3 S012: Test step 3 ............................................. 5 – 70
5.10.4 S012: Test step 4 ............................................. 5 – 72
59 38 399 D3352
5–2 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 5

5.11.1 S014: Test step 1 ............................................. 5 – 74
5.11.2 S014: Test step 2 ............................................. 5 – 76
5.11.3 S014: Test step 3 ............................................. 5 – 78
5.11.4 S014: Test step 4 ............................................. 5 – 80

5.12.1 S015: Test step 5 ............................................. 5 – 81

5.13.1 S017: Test step 2 ............................................. 5 – 85
5.13.2 S017: Test step 3 ............................................. 5 – 89
5.13.3 S017: Test step 4 (only for XGPlus / 3Dready).... 5 – 91
5.13.4 S017: Test step 5 (only for XGPlus / 3Dready).... 5 – 93
5.13.5 S017: Test step 6 ............................................. 5 – 94
5.13.6 S017: Test step 8 ............................................. 5 – 96
5.13.7 S017: Test step 9 ............................................. 5 – 98
5.13.8 S017: Test step 10 (only for XGPlus / 3Dready) 5 – 100
5.13.9 S017: Test step 11 (XG 5 only) ...................... 5 – 102
5.13.10 S017: Test step 12(only for XGPlus / 3Dready). 5 – 103
5.13.11 S017: Test step 13
(only for XGPlus full version / 3Dready)............. 5 – 104
5.13.12 S017: Test step 14
(only for XGPlus full version / 3Dready)............. 5 – 105
5.13.13 S017: Test step 15 ......................................... 5 – 108
5.13.14 S017: Test step 17
Setting the acceptance/constancy test,
RöV FRG........................................................ 5 – 110
5.13.15 S017: Test step 17
Checking and accepting the diaphragm
configuration, worldwide
(not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) .................................... 5 – 115
5.13.16 S017: Test step 18
(only for XGPlus / 3Dready with occlusal
bite block) ....................................................... 5 – 117
5.13.17 S017: Test step 22(XG 3 PPE only)............... 5 – 119
5.13.18 S017: Test step 23(XG 3 PPE only)............... 5 – 120
5.14 Service routine S018 ...........................................5 – 121

5.14.1 S018: Test step 2 ........................................... 5 – 122
5.14.2 S018: Test step 3 ........................................... 5 – 124
5.14.3 S018: Test step 4 ........................................... 5 – 125
5.14.4 S018: Test step 5 ........................................... 5 – 127
5.14.5 S018: Test step 6 ........................................... 5 – 129
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5–3
Tab 5
5.14.6 S018: Test step 7

(only for XGPlus / 3Dready with occlusal
bite block) ....................................................... 5 – 130
5.14.7 S018: Test step 8
(only for XGPlus / 3Dreadywith occlusal
bite block) ....................................................... 5 – 132
5.14.8 S018: Test step 9
bite block) ....................................................... 5 – 134
5.14.9 S018: Test step 10
bite block) ....................................................... 5 – 137
5.15 Service routine S020

(not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) ......................................... 5 – 139
5.15.1 S020: Test step 1 ........................................... 5 – 140
5.16 Service routine S021 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)....... 5 – 143

5.16.1 S021: Test step 1 ........................................... 5 – 143
5.16.2 S021: Test step 3 ........................................... 5 – 145
5.17 Service routine S032........................................... 5 – 148

5.17.1 S032: Test step 10 ......................................... 5 – 148
5.18 Service routine S033 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)....... 5 – 152

5.18.1 S033: Test step 10 ......................................... 5 – 152

5.19.1 S034: Test step 4 ........................................... 5 – 157
5.19.2 S034: Test step 5 ........................................... 5 – 161
5.19.3 S034: Test step 6 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) ....... 5 – 165
5.19.4 S034: Test step 7 (only for XGPlus / 3Dready).. 5 – 167
5.19.5 S034: Test step 8 )(only for XGPlus
full version / 3Dready) ...................................... 5 – 168
5.19.6 S034: Test step 9(only for XGPlus
full version / 3Dready) ...................................... 5 – 170

5.20.1 S037: Test step 1 ........................................... 5 – 174
5.20.2 S037: Test step 2 ........................................... 5 – 176
5.20.3 S037: Test step 3 ........................................... 5 – 179
5.20.4 S037: Test step 4 ........................................... 5 – 182
59 38 399 D3352
5–4 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 5
Directory of all available service routines
XG 5 XGPlus / Function
båÖäáëÜ
Service routine XG 3 XG 3 PPE Page
3Dready
S001 X X X X Radiation without rotary movement, fixed 5-23
radiation time
S002 X X X X Radiation without rotary movement, max- 5-25
imum radiation time can be selected
S002: Test step 1 X X X X Primary diaphragm remains in last position 5-26
selected
S002: Test step 3 (not – – X X Primary diaphragm opened fully 5-28
for XG 3 / 3 PPE)
S002: Test step 4 (not – – X X The primary diaphragm is set to a widened 5-29
for XG 3 / 3 PPE) opening symmetrical to the PAN setting so
that the step filter still remains covered.
S005 X X X X General X-ray tube assembly service 5-30
S005: Test step 1 X X X X Read out type of X-ray tube 5-31
S005: Test step 2 X X X X Automatic adjustment of preheating 5-33
S005: Test step 4 X X X X Fan test 5-35
S005: Test step 5 X X X X Temperature sensor test 5-37
S005: Test step 6 X X X X Switch off cool-down interval of the single 5-38
tank
S005: Test step 7 X X X X Setting continuous operation of the tube 5-41
assembly fan
S007 X X X X Error logging memory 5-44
S007: Test step 1 X X X X Display error logging memory 5-45
S007: Test step 2 X X X X Clearing error logging memory 5-48
S007: Test step 5 X X X X Enable the CAN bus logging in the Miniweb 5-50
S008 X X X X Update service 5-53
S008: Test step 2 X X X X Overview of the module software versions 5-53
S008: Test step 3 X X X X Input/confirmation of unit serial number 5-55
S008: Test step 4 – – X X Initializing the function activation 5-59
S009 X X X X Flash file system 5-61
S009: Test step 4 X X X X Formatting flash file system 5-61
S012 X X X X CAN bus service 5-64
S012: Test step 1 X X X X Presence display of modules 5-65
S012 Test step 2 X X X X Inquiry of the CAN status register of the 5-67
modules
S012: Test step 3 X X X X Resetting the CAN status register of the 5-70
modules
S012: Test step 4 X X X X Display of CAN bus cycle on the LEDs of the 5-72
modules
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5–5
Tab 5
Service routine XG 3 XG 3 PPE XG 5 XGPlus / Function Page

3Dready
S014 X X X X Rotation motor service 5-74
S014: Test step 1 X X X X Travel of rotational drive to the Pan home 5-74
position
S014: Test step 2 – – – X Travel of rotational drive to the Ceph home 5-76
position
S014: Test step 3 X X X X Free travel of rotational drive 5-78
S014: Test step 4 X X X X Display of light barrier signals of rotational 5-80
drive
S015 X X X X Actuator service 5-81
S015: Test step 5 X X X X Functional test of actuators 1 + 2 5-81
S017 X X X X Configuration service 5-84
S017: Test step 2 X X X X Configure hardware version (Ceph, Pan, 5-85
TSA)
S017: Test step 3 X X X X Enter the country group code 5-89
S017: Test step 4 – – – X Select the language index within a language 5-91
set
S017: Test step 5 – – – X Select the language set index within a lan- 5-93
guage set
S017: Test step 6 X X X X Activate the remote control display 5-94
S017: Test step 8 X X X X Selecting the kVmA level series 5-96
S017: Test step 9 X X X X Configuring operation without or with DX41 5-98
S017: Test step 10 X X X X Configuration of headrest 5-100
(only for XGPlus /
3Dready)
S017: Test step 11 (XG – – X – Selecting the image format 5-102
5 only)
S017: Test step – – – X Enabling/disabling the preview image 5-103
12(only for XGPlus /
3Dready)
S017: Test step 13 – – – X Enabling/disabling the welcome screen 5-104
(only for XGPlus full ver-
sion / 3Dready)
S017: Test step 14 – – – X Enabling/disabling certain lines of the wel- 5-105
(only for XGPlus full ver- come screen
sion / 3Dready)
S017: Test step 15 X X X X Enabling/disabling the acoustic signal for 5-108
the end of exposure
S017: Test step 17 – – X X Setting the acceptance/constancy test, 5-110
RöV FRG
Checking and accepting the diaphragm con- 5-115
figuration, worldwide
59 38 399 D3352
5–6 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 5

3Dready
båÖäáëÜ
S017: Test step 18 – – – X Activation/deactivation of occlusal bite block 5-117
(only for XGPlus / function
3Dready with occlusal
bite block) CAUTION
This routine may only be selected for units
with occlusal bite block; otherwise, the unit
will malfunction.
Occlusal bite
block
S017: Test step 22(XG – X – – Configuration of PPE display 5-119

3 PPE only)
S017: Test step 23(XG – X – – Configuration of PPE display warning level 5-120
3 PPE only)
S018 X X X X Service for height adjustment 5-121
S018: Test step 2 X X X X Set the maximum travel height 5-122
S018: Test step 3 X X X X Undo the maximum travel height setting 5-124
S018: Test step 4 X X X X Check the height adjustment sensor system 5-125
S018: Test step 5 X X X X Setting the minimum travel height 5-127
S018: Test step 6 X X X X Undoing the minimum travel height setting 5-129
S018: Test step 7 (only – – – X Set the nominal angle for the occlusal bite 5-130
for XGPlus / 3Dready block as required by the customer.
with occlusal bite
block) CAUTION
will malfunction.
Occlusal bite
block
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5–7
Tab 5

3Dready
S018: Test step 8 (only – – – X Functional test of the occlusal bite block 5-132
for XGPlus / 3Dreadywith
occlusal bite block) CAUTION
will malfunction.
Occlusal bite
block
S018: Test step 9 (only – – – X Adjustment of the AD acceptance angle val- 5-134
for XGPlus / 3Dreadywith ues and the zero point
occlusal bite block)
CAUTION
will malfunction.
Occlusal bite
block
59 38 399 D3352
5–8 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 5

3Dready
båÖäáëÜ
S018: Test step 10 – – – X Setting the PWM values for the height 5-137
(only for XGPlus / adjustment creep speed
3Dreadywith occlusal
bite block) CAUTION
will malfunction.
Occlusal bite
block
S020 X X X X Service for temple support 5-139

S020: Test step 1 – – X X Programming the switching thresholds of the 5-140
(not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) temple support
S021 – – X X Service for motor-driven diaphragm 5-143
S021: Test step 1 – – X X Initialization of diaphragm axis 5-143
S021: Test step 3 – – – X Function test (movement) of the TSA sensor 5-145
holder
S032 X X X X Test function for sensor in PAN slot 5-148
S032: Test step 10 X X X X Test function for sensor in PAN slot 5-148
S033 – – X X Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS 5-152
S033: Test step 10 – – X X Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS 5-152
S034 – – X X Service for the digital cephalometer 5-156
S034: Test step 4 – – X X Display/calibrate center position of Ceph 5-157
scan sensor axis
S034: Test step 5 – – X X Display/calibrate center position of Ceph 5-161
scan secondary diaphragm axis
S034: Test step 6 (not – – X X Moving to the Ceph packing position 5-165
for XG 3 / 3 PPE)
S034: Test step 7 (only – – – X Display/change ring type 5-167
for XGPlus / 3Dready)
S034: Test step 8 – – – X User-specific determination of the shadow- 5-168
)(only for XGPlus full ing limit for C1 and C2
version / 3Dready)
S034: Test step 9(only – – – X User-specific determination of the shadow- 5-170
for XGPlus full version / ing limit for C3 and C3 30x23
3Dready)
S037 X X X X Network service 5-173
S037: Test step 1 X X X X Displaying the network data 5-174
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5–9
Tab 5

3Dready
S037: Test step 2 X X X X Setting the default IP address, default gate- 5-176
way address and default subnet mask
S037: Test step 3 X X X X Toggling the DHCP and UDP boot mode 5-179
(DEFAULT/STATIC)
S037: Test step 4 X X X X Manual input of IP address, default gateway 5-182
address and subnet mask
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 10 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 5
5 Service routines
båÖäáëÜ
Using the service routines, you can check certain components and
modules of the unit for proper functioning.
This chapter describes all of the service routines which can be selected and
started via the service menu on the Easypad (XGPlus / 3Dready) and on the
Multipad (XG5/3/3 PPE).
i NOTE
Service routines S010 and S030 are not manually selectable and therefore
are not described here. They are used only for system adjustment (see chap-
ter 4).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 11
5.1 Selecting the Service menu Tab 5
5.1 Selecting the Service menu
5.1.1 Selection on the Easypad (for XGPlus / 3Dready)
Design of the user interface The touchscreen user interface of the Easypad is subdivided
into 4 levels:
Level 1: Main menu

Level 2: Program settings
Level 3: Basic settings
Level 4: Service menu
Main menu 1. To select level 2 (Program Settings menu), touch the blue arrow in the up-
per right corner of the touchscreen.
❶ 2.
Level 1
Program Settings menu 3. To select level 3 (Basic Settings menu), touch the left blue arrow in the
upper right corner of the touchscreen.
Level 2
Opens the info screen
Basic Settings menu 4. To select level 4 (Service menu/access), touch the wrench symbol.
❸
Level 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 12 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 5 5.1 Selecting the Service menu
Service menu/access 5. Access the service menu:

– Press and hold down the Service key until the patient symbol keys light
up (approx. 2 s).
båÖäáëÜ
– Then press the patient symbol keys in the following order within 4 s: b
– d – a.
Level 4
– Once you have entered the key combination correctly, the Service
a b c d menu appears. You can go to the next higher level with the double ar-
row key at any time.
approx. 2 s
Service menu To quit the Service menu and return to the main menu, press the double
arrow key .
➏
service menu
Level 4 /
5.1
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 13
Displays and symbols in the Service From the Service menu, you can run all available service routines and per-
menu form important system settings, tests and compensations.
Depending on the procedure step, different control symbols and display
E X RAY Active! fields are activated in a context-sensitive way in the Service menu on the
touchscreen:
1 - XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX + S2
2 - X + 1
3 - XXX +
T R
Display Title bar: X RAY Radiation can be released

X RAY Active! Caution, radiation active!
Selection fields 1 - 3: 1 - + Display fields for service routines,

Test steps, values, IDs,
2 - + etc.
3 - +
Buttons Patient Different functions,

symbol keys a - d: a b c d depending on the service routine
Memory key: For saving an input
Service key: different functions

dep. on service routine, however
usually for confirming a selection
or jumping to the next
Test step
Test key: T For starting a test
Return key: R For moving the unit to the

Starting position or confirming
a save operation
Double arrow key: Return to the main menu
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 14 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 5 5.1 Selecting the Service menu
5.1.2 Selection on the Multipad (for XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
båÖäáëÜ
1. Press the Service key until the LED above the
Service key lights up.
After the Service key is released, the LEDs above the patient
symbol keys light up.
approx. 2 s
2. Then press the patient symbol keys in the following order within 4 s: b – d
– a.
❶
After you have entered the key combination correctly, the
Service menu appears.
i NOTE
The service mode is signaled by a slow flashing of the Power LED ❶
a b c d .
Service menu To quit the Service menu and return to the Main menu, press the up arrow
key above selection field 3 (see section 5.1.2).
S001____________
1 2 3 5.1
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 15
Displays and keys on the Multipad From the Service menu, you can run all available service routines and per-
(for service only) form important system settings, tests and calibrations.
Depending on the procedure step, different hints, error messages and param-
eters are displayed in a context-sensitive way on the Multipad.
Prog. S kV mA
T R
Display Selection fields 1 - 3: Display fields for service routines,

test steps, values, IDs, etc.
1 2 3
8 digits 4 digits 4 digits
i NOTE
The empty digits in the single-line display of the Multipad are marked
With underscores in this Manual (see page 1-6). They have been added to en-
hance clarity and are not present on the real Multipad.
Prog. S kV mA
Keys Patient Different functions,

symbol keys a - d: a b c d depending on the service routine
Memory key: For saving an input
Service key: different functions

dep. on service routine, however
usually for confirming a selection
or jumping to the next
Test step
Test key: T For starting a test
Return key: R For moving the unit to the

Starting position or confirming
a save operation
Double arrow key: Return to the main menu
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 16 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 5 5.2 Selecting a service routine
5.2 Selecting a service routine
båÖäáëÜ
Select the Service menu (see section 5.1).
Selecting a service routine 1. Select the desired service routine using the arrow keys in selection field 1
and confirm this selection with the
Service key.
i NOTE
If the selected service routine comprises several test steps, the first selectable
test step is displayed in selection field 2.
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad
➊
1 - S005 + ➊
2 - 1 + S005_______1____
3
1 2 3
Selecting a test step 2. Select the desired test step using the arrow keys of selection field 2 and
confirm your selection by pressing the Service key.
XGPlus / 3Dready:
5.2
➊
1 - S005 +
2 - 4 + ➊
S005_______4____
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 17
5.2 Selecting a service routine Tab 5
For XGPlus / 3Dready: The selected service routine as well as the selected test step are
displayed in the right column (in our example S005, test step 4).
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: The parameters or IDs of the selected service routine are displayed
on the Multipad. The Multipad does not show which service routine or test
step is currently active.
XGPlus / 3Dready:
1 - 01 + S5
2 4 ________01______
3
1 2 3
R
Quitting the service routine For XGPlus / 3Dready:
Pressing the Service or double-arrow key returns you to the ser-

vice routine selection menu.
To quit the Service menu and return to the main menu, press the double
arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
To return to the service routine selection menu, press the up arrow key
above selection field 3.
To quit the Service menu and return to the Main menu, press the up arrow
key above selection field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 18 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 5 5.2 Selecting a service routine
5.2.1 Service routines with security access
i NOTE
båÖäáëÜ
A security code is required for accessing service routines involving functions
such as radiation release or editing of configuration data or stored values.
This procedure prevents the inadvertent selection or activation
of these service routines.
To select a service routine or test step with security access, proceed as fol-
lows:
WARNING
Be sure to observe the radiation protection regulations
applicable in your country.
Selecting the service routine/test step 1. Select the service routine or the test step, and confirm your selection with
the Service key.
XGPlus / 3Dready:
➊
1 - S002 + ➊
2 - 1 + S002_______1____
3
1 2 3
After you have confirmed your selection, a 0 appears in selection

field 2.
5.2
Confirming the security access 2. Confirm the security access by once again selecting the number of the
main routine (in our example 2) with the arrow keys of selection field 2
and then pressing the Service key.
XGPlus / 3Dready:
➊
1
2 - 2 + ➊ ___________2____
3
1 2 3
Following this double selection and confirmation, the service routine is ac-
tivated.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 19
5.3 Service routines with SIDEXIS Tab 5
5.3 Service routines with SIDEXIS
WARNING
Be sure to observe the radiation protection regulations applicable in
your country.
ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / 3Dready The X-Ray radiation indicator lights up briefly.

After approx. 2 s, the green LED in the upper right corner of the Easypad
➊ lights up. This LED remains permanently lit as long as the unit is ON.
The start screen appears on the touchscreen of the Easypad and the sys-
tem’s self-adjustment routine starts running (for approx. 1 min.). At the
same time, the rotating element rotates briefly clockwise and counter-
clockwise and the diaphragm is positioned. The forehead and temple sup-
ports on the panoramic unit open and close and then stop moving in fully
opened position.
Once the self-adjustment routine is completed, the main menu appears
on the touchscreen and help message H301 prompts you to move the unit
to the starting position.
ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE All LEDs and the LED display on the Multipad light up briefly.
The green LED in the upper right corner of the Multipad ➊ remains per-
manently lit as long as the unit is ON.
The initialization status is visualized by a progress indicator while the unit
performs a self-adjustment routine (approx. 1 min.). At the same time, the
rotating element rotates briefly clockwise and counterclockwise and the
diaphragm is positioned. The forehead and temple supports on the pan-
oramic unit open and close and then stop moving in fully opened position.
Once the self-adjustment routine is completed, help message H301
prompts you to move the unit to the starting position.
2. Press the R key to move the unit back to the starting position.
XGPlus / 3Dready:
G
Switch the PC ON and start SIDEXIS.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 20 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 5 5.3 Service routines with SIDEXIS
3. Select the constancy test in SIDEXIS XG:

UTILITIES CONSTANCY TEST
The classical SIDEXIS user interface is started.
båÖäáëÜ
Constancy test is already preset.
4. Start the exposure mode:

Click XCXP
The dialog box for selecting the X-ray device appears on the screen.
5. Select/confirm the X-ray device:

Select the desired X-RAY DEVICE and click OK
i NOTE
Under certain circumstances, the dialog box for selecting the X-ray device may
be skipped by the software and the dialog box for selecting the test type ap-
pears immediately.
6. Select/confirm the test type:

The dialog box for selecting the service exposure appears on the
screen.
5.3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 21
5.3 Service routines with SIDEXIS Tab 5
7. Select/confirm the SERVICE EXPOSURE.

The following service exposures service exposures are available for se-
lection:
DIGITAL TEST IMAGE: Checks the data transmission
path between PC and sensor
FACTORY SERVICE: sets interlock signal for
service programs (only for D3297)
DIAPHRAGM TEST EXPOSURE: Check of pan and
Ceph adjustment
DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT:Adjustment
QUALITY TEST EXPOSURE: Test exposure not stored in
PDATA
If several different X-ray components are available, a dialog box
for selecting the X-ray device appears on the screen. In this case, select/
confirm the required component.
If only one X-ray component is available, the exposure readiness dialog
box appears on the screen and shows the status of the exposure.
i NOTE
During operation in the service mode, the unit switches from the user mode to
the PC service mode logged by the PC (see section 4.2).
When you select the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu...
the dialog box for entering the service password appears on the screen.
Enter the service password and confirm your input by clicking OK.
i NOTE
For the service password, enter the first 4 digits of the current system date in
reverse order (e.g. on 05/24/1995, 5042 must be entered as the service pass-
word.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 22 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S001: Radiation without rotary movement, fixed radiation time
Tab 5 5.4 Service routine S001
Radiation without rotary movement, fixed radiation time
båÖäáëÜ
WARNING
Function S001: Test of X-ray beam and kV/mA levels
Radiation with selected kV/mA level Security access

Radiation time cannot be selected, max. 14.0 sec.
Primary diaphragm remains in last position selected
Select the Service menu (see page 5-12).
Selecting service routine S001 1. Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select service routine S001 and
confirm this selection with the Service key .
XGPlus / 3Dready: XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S001 + ➊
2 S001____________
3
1 2 3
5.4
main routine (1) with the arrow keys of selection field 2 and then pressing
theService key .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1
___________1____
2 - 1 + ➊
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 23
S001: Radiation without rotary movement, fixed radiation time
5.4 Service routine S001 Tab 5
Selecting the kV/mA level 3. Select the desired kV/mA level using the arrow keys in selection field 1
i NOTE
The maximum radiation time is displayed in selection field 2. The maximum ra-
diation time cannot be changed in this service routine and equals 14.0 sec-
onds.
Radiation is emitted as long as the release button remains pressed until

the maximum time of 14.0 seconds is reached.

Easypad touchscreen
E X RAY ➊
1 - 60kV/8mA + ➊
2 14.0s 60/8____14.0____
3
1 2 3
Trigger radiation 4. Release radiation by pressing the release button.
Radiation from any tube assembly position, no rotary movement

The primary diaphragm remains in the last position set
The radiation time is 14.0 seconds
i NOTE
If you let go of the release button before the maximum radiation time has
elapsed, radiation is terminated prematurely and the exposure is interrupted.
The actual radiation time is not displayed.
When you release radiation during the cool-down interval, a countdown of

the remaining waiting time is displayed in selection field 2 on the Multipad (au-
tomatic exposure blocking).
Pressing the Service or double-arrow key returns you to the service

routine selection menu.
arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 24 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S002: Radiation without rotary movement, maximum radiation time can be selected
Radiation without rotary movement, maximum radiation time
båÖäáëÜ
can be selected
WARNING
Function S002 X-ray beam test
Radiation with selected kV/mA level

Maximum radiation time selectable
Radiation from any position
Test step 1 Primary diaphragm remains in last position selected Security access
Test step 3 Primary diaphragm opened fully Security access
Test step 4 The primary diaphragm is set to a widened opening symmetrical to the Security access
PAN setting so that the step filter still remains covered.
Selecting service routine S002 1. Select service routine S002 using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S002 + ➊
5.5
2 - 1 + S002_______1____
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 25
S002.1: Radiation w/o rot. movement, max. radiation time selectable, prim. diaphr. in last
5.5.1 S002: Test step 1
Selecting test step 1 1. Select test step 1 in selection field 2 with the arrow keys and confirm your
selection by pressing the Service key .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S002 +
2 - 1 + ➊ S002_______1____
3
1 2 3
Confirming the security access 2. Confirm security access by once again selecting the number of the main
routine (2) with the arrow keys of selection field 2 and then pressing the
Service key .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1
___________2____
2 - 2 + ➊
3
1 2 3
Selecting the kV/mA level and radiation 3. Use the arrow keys of
time – Selection field 1 to select the desired kV/mA level and
– Selection field 2 to select the desired radiation time.

Easypad touchscreen
E X RAY ➊
1 - 60kV/8mA + ➊
2 - 2.0 s + 60/8____2.00____
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 26 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S002.1: Radiation w/o rot. movement, max. radiation time selectable, prim. diaphr. in last pos.
Trigger radiation 4. Release radiation by pressing the release button.
Radiation from any tube assembly position, no rotary movement
båÖäáëÜ
The primary diaphragm remains in the last position set
The maximum radiation time corresponds to the selected radiation
time.
i NOTE
If you let go of the release button before the maximum radiation time has
elapsed, radiation is terminated prematurely and the exposure is interrupted.
The actual radiation time is not displayed.
When you release radiation during the cool-down interval, a countdown of

the remaining waiting time is displayed in selection field 2 on the Multipad (au-
tomatic exposure blocking).

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.5
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 27
S002.3: Radiation w/o rot. movement, max. radiation time selectable, prim. diaphr. opened
5.5.2 S002: Test step 3 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)
Difference from S002, test step 1:

Primary diaphragm is opened fully
i NOTE
For selection and operating sequence, see S002, test step 1.
After you have selected test step 3, the primary diaphragm is moved to
The new position (opened fully). During this time, a progress indicator is dis-
played in selection field 1.

Easypad touchscreen
1 S2
2 3
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 28 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S002.4: Radiation without rotary movement, maximum radiation time can be selected
båÖäáëÜ
Difference from S002, test step 1:
The step filter is brought into the beam path
The primary diaphragm is set to a widened opening symmetrical to
the PAN setting so that the step filter still remains covered
i NOTE
For selection and operating sequence, see S002, test step 1.
After you have selected test step 4, the primary diaphragm is moved to
the new position (opened fully and symmetrical to PAN position). During this
time, a progress indicator is displayed in selection field 1.

Easypad touchscreen
1 S2
2 4
3
1 2 3
5.5
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 29
S005: General X-ray tube assembly service
General X-ray tube assembly service
WARNING
applicable in your country
Function S005 General X-ray tube assembly service
Test step 1 If the tube type is correct: Read out type of X-ray tube
If the tube type is incorrect: Select type of X-ray tube Security access
Test step 2 Automatic compensation of preheating Security access
Test step 4 Fan test
Test step 5 Temperature sensor test
Test step 6 Switch off cool-down interval of the single tank Security access
Test step 7 Configuring continuous operation of the tube assembly fan Security access
Selecting service routine S005 1. Use the arrow keys to select service routine S005.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S005 + ➊
2 - 1 + S005_______1____
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 30 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S005.2: Automatic adjustment of preheating
5.6.1 S005: Test step 1

Read or select the X-ray tube assembly type
båÖäáëÜ
Selection field Code Tube type
1 00 Siemens tube 90/15
01 CEI OPX 100
02 Toshiba tube DO 56
03 CB tube D 151 R
04 Siemens tube 90/15 in 3D single tank
(only ORTHOPHOS XG3D

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S005 +
2 - 1 + ➊ S005_______1____
3
1 2 3
Selection field 1 shows the indicator number of the installed tube type.
i NOTE
5.6
The X-ray tube assembly automatically queries the tube type information. If no
defined value is saved, the security access will be shown instead of the tube
type.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 31
If the tube type is invalid, confirm secu- 2. Confirm security access by once again selecting the number of the main
rity access routine (5) with the arrow keys of selection field 2 and then pressing the
Service key .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1
___________5____
2 - 5 + ➊
3
1 2 3
Selection field 1 shows the indicator number of the (invalid) tube type de-
tected by the X-ray tube assembly.
3. Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select the code for the tube type
(see table).
The Memory key lights up.
4. Save the selected parameter.

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 32 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
5.6.2 S005: Test step 2
båÖäáëÜ

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S005 +
2 - 2 + ➊ S005_______2____
3
1 2 3
Service key .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1
___________5____
2 - 5 + ➊
3
1 2 3
5.6
An inactive progress indicator in selection field 1 and the message FFFF
in selection field 2 signal that the system is ready for compensation.

Easypad touchscreen
E X RAY
1 S5
2 FFFF 2 _______FFFF____
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 33
Performing the compensation 3. Start the automatic adjustment by pressing the release button.
CAUTION
The tube assembly must be at operating temperature before the compensa-
tion. To do this, release radiation once for 14.0 s at kV/mA level 60/9 via
service routine S001 (see page 5-23).
i NOTE
Keep pressing the release button until adjustment is completed and the new
offset value for preheating is displayed. During the adjustment procedure, a
progress indicator is displayed in selection field 1.

Easypad touchscreen
E X RAY Active!
1 S5
2 2 mV(VH) 2 __________2____
3
1 2 3
i NOTE
If you interrupt the adjustment procedure prematurely by letting go of the re-
lease button, the message EEEE appears in selection field 2. This message
must be acknowledged by pressing the R key.

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 34 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S005.4: Fan test
5.6.3 S005: Test step 4
båÖäáëÜ

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S005 +
2 - 4 + ➊
S005_______4____
3
1 2 3
Testing the fan 2. Switch the fan ON by selecting code 01 with the arrow keys and confirm-
ing with the R key R R .
Code: 00 = Fan OFF

01 = Fan ON

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 01 + ➊
2 __01____________
3
5.6
1 2 3
R
R
Check the fan for running noise.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 35
S005.4: Fan test

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
i NOTE
When you quit the service routine the fan is automatically switched OFF again.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 36 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S005.5: Temperature sensor test
5.6.4 S005: Test step 5
båÖäáëÜ

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S005 +
2 - 5 + ➊
S005_______5____
3
1 2 3
After test step 5 is selected, selection field 1 displays the

Single-tank temperature displayed in °C. The display is updated once
per second.

Easypad touchscreen
1 31.5C S5
2 5 __31.5_C________
3
1 2 3
5.6

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 37
S005.6: Switch off cool-down interval of the single tank
5.6.5 S005: Test step 6

Upon explicit customer request, the monitored pulse/pause ratio can be dis-
abled in exceptional cases. This can be done one time via service routine
S005, test step 6. Re-enabling the pulse/pause monitoring function is not
possible, though. A "PulsePause-Disable" entry is set on the info screen and
in the detail query.
CAUTION
The execution of this service routine is irreversible. The unit is operated
beyond its specifications afterwards. This may result in an X-ray tube as-
sembly failure. As a result, the system warranty expires. SIRONA is able
to prove this system setting
after a system failure.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S005 +
2 - 6 + ➊ S005_______6____
3
1 2 3
Service key .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1
___________5____
2 - 5 + ➊
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 38 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
The status of the pulse/pause treatment is displayed in the selection field

1:
båÖäáëÜ
01 = Pulse/pause monitoring enabled
00 = Pulse/pause monitoring disabled

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 01 + ➊
2 6
______01________
3
1 2 3
R
CAUTION
Disabling the pulse/pause monitoring The execution of this service routine is irreversible. The unit is operated
beyond its specifications afterwards. This may result in an X-ray tube as-
sembly failure. As a result, the system warranty expires. SIRONA is able
to prove this system setting
after a system failure.
3. To disable the pulse/pause monitoring, select code 00 in selection field 1

with the arrow keys.
The memory key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the
memory key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.
XGPlus / 3Dready:
5.6
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad
Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 00 + ➊
2 6
______00________
3
1 2 3
R
4. To save the selection, first press the memory key (R key (XGPlus
ready
/ 3D ) and the LED above the R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) light up) and
then the R key R R .
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 39

Easypad touchscreen
1 - 00 + S5
2 6
______00________
3
1 2 3
➊
R
➊
R
i NOTE
If pulse/pause monitoring has been disabled before already, this service rou-
tine serves as a mere status display. The arrow keys, Memory key, and R key
are not displayed by the XGPlus / 3Dready. These keys are then disabled on the
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE.

Easypad touchscreen
1 00 S5
2 6
______00________
3
1 2 3

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 40 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S005.7: Setting continuous operation of the tube assembly fan
5.6.6 S005: Test step 7

The tube assembly fan can be configured for continuous operation at the
båÖäáëÜ
express wish of the customer. This can be done via service routine S005, test
step 7. The customer should be informed in advance about the increased
noise generation to be expected. A demonstration of the fan noise can be
made with service routine S005.4.
CAUTION
Because of the expected greater contamination of the fan and of the sin-
gle tank housing, the configuration of continuous operation is docu-
mented irreversibly on the tube assembly in order to obtain additional in-
formation in the case of returned goods.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S005 +
2 - 7 + ➊ S005_______7____
3
1 2 3
Service key .

Easypad touchscreen
5.6
➊
1
___________5____
2 - 5 + ➊
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 41
The operating mode of the fan is displayed in selection field 1:
01 = continuous operation of the fan

00 = controlled operation of the fan

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 00 + ➊
2 7
00____________
3
1 2 3
R
Switching on continuous fan operation 3. To switch the fan to continuous operation, select code 01 in selection field
1 with the arrow keys.
The memory key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the
memory key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 01 + ➊
2 00____________
7
3
1 2 3
R
/ 3Dready) and the LED above the R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) light up) and

Easypad touchscreen
1 - 01 + S5
2 7
______01________
3
1 2 3
➊
R
➊
R
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 42 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
båÖäáëÜ
arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.6
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 43
S007: Error logging memory
Error logging memory
Function S007 Error logging memory
Test step 1 Display error logging memory
Test step 2 Clearing error logging memory Security access
Test step 5 Enable the CAN bus logging in the Miniweb
i NOTE
In addition to service routine S007.1, you can also use DETAILS to query the
error logging memory.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S007 +
2 - 1 + S007_______7____
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 44 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S007.1: Display error logging memory
5.7.1 S007: Test step 1
båÖäáëÜ

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S007 +
2 - 1 + ➊
S007_______1____
3
1 2 3
2. Select the desired error event (in example 66).
XGPlus / 3Dready: You can browse between the different error numbers that have occurred with
Easypad touchscreen the arrow keys in selection field 1.
The corresponding error message is displayed in selection field 2 (see section
2.5). Selection field 3 displays the date and time of the error event.
1 - 66 + ➊ You can set the step width for browsing between the error numbers with the
patient symbol keys.
2 E6 81 07 1
3 2004-12-14; 12:31:09
Step width 100

Step width 10
Step width 1
5.7
The currently selected patient symbol key is lit. A step width of 1 is preset (left
patient symbol key is lit).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 45
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad You can browse between the different error numbers that have occurred with
the arrow keys in selection field 1. You can display the error code, time or date
of the error event with the arrow keys in selection field 2.
66______E6_81_07
Date
66______05-01-17
1 2 3
1 2 3
Time
66______13:30:57
1 2 3 Browse forward
Error code
66______E6_81_07 65______E7_11_08
1 2 3 1 2 3
Browse back
You can set the step width for browsing between the error numbers with the
first three patient symbol keys (starting from the left).
Step width 100

Step width 10
Step width 1
The LED above the selected patient symbol key is lit. A step width of 1 is pre-
set (the LED above the left patient symbol key is lit).
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 46 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
båÖäáëÜ
arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.7
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 47
S007.2: Clearing error logging memory
5.7.2 S007: Test step 2

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S007 +
2 - 2 + ➊
S007_______2____
3
1 2 3
Service key .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1
___________7____
2 - 7 + ➊
3
1 2 3
The system's readiness to clear the memory is indicated by the display mes-
sage FFFF in selection field 1. If the error logging memory does not contain
any data, 0000 is displayed.

Easypad touchscreen
1 FFFF S7
2 2 ____FFFF________
3
1 2 3
R
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 48 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Clearing error logging memory 3. To clear the memory, first press the memory key (R key (XGPlus /
ready
3D ) / LED above the R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the
R key R R .
båÖäáëÜ
Easypad touchscreen
1 FFFF S7
2 2 ____FFFF________
3
1 2 3
➊
R
➊
R

Easypad touchscreen
1 0000 S7
2 2 ____0000________
3
1 2 3
R
5.7
arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 49
5.7.3 S007: Test step 5
CAUTION
This service routine should be executed only in consultation with and
with the support of the SIRONA Customer Service Center!

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S007 +
2 - 5 + ➊
S007_______5____
3
1 2 3
Activation of logging 2. Select the desired setting using the arrow keys of selection field 1:
– WS CAN bus off (factory setting): Logging switched off

– WS CAN bus on: Logging switched on
– WS CAN bus Ex. on: Extended protocoling switched on
After the test step has been selected the test key T (XGPlus) / the LED
above the test key T (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.
3. To activate the logging function, press the
Test key T T .

Easypad touchscreen
11 - WS CAN bus on + S7
2 5 WS_CAN-B US _ ON
3
1 2 3
➊
T
T
All CAN bus events occurring from now on during operation of the system
will be logged and can be displayed with a web browser (e.g. Internet Ex-
plorer). This log will help you when consulting the SIRONA Customer Ser-
vice Center for error diagnostics.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 50 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Displaying the log with a web browser 1. Enter the following web address on a PC (with Internet access) integrated
in a system network:
båÖäáëÜ
https://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX/info/can.htm
IP address of the unit
The CAN bus browser opens.

2. In the lower area, select the "CAN bus" link.
The CAN bus protocol is displayed in the browser and can be saved as
HTML page, printed out of sent to the SIRONA customer service center.
Example for the first 4 pages of an extended log

(WS CAN bus Ex. on)
Receiver Warn. 0 0758148.440; Rx; 0x101; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
CAN-Bus State Bit Wert
5.7
0758150.461; Rx; 0x201; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x00 0x00
CAN-Error Comp. 0 Receiver Error 0 0758154.440; Rx; 0x301; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x03 0x00 0x00
Overrun Error 0 Tramsmit Warn. 0 0758156.441; Rx; 0x401; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0758158.441; Rx; 0x501; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Management Receiver Warn. 0 Tramsmit Error 0
0758160.464; Rx; 0x481; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x00
Receiver Error 0 Bus Off 0 0758170.458; Tx; 0x001; 0x08; 0x26 0x3b 0x0f 0x01 0x0b 0x49 0x00 0x0a
Tramsmit Warn. 0 0758172.450; Tx; 0x080; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Busmode: STTP-Auto Status-Register DX81P 0758174.436; Tx; 0x100; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Tramsmit Error 0
0758176.469; Tx; 0x200; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Bus Off 0
CAN-Controller Bit Wert 0758178.436; Tx; 0x280; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
0758180.451; Tx; 0x361; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Status-Register DX42 CAN-Error Comp. 0 0758182.438; Tx; 0x400; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Overrun Error 0 0758184.438; Tx; 0x500; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Bit Wert Receiver Warn. 0 0758186.439; Tx; 0x480; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Mode-Register Status-Register Interrupt-Register 0758188.439; Tx; 0x680; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
CAN-Error Comp. 0 Receiver Error 0 0758190.468; Tx; 0x700; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Bit Wert Bit Wert Bit Wert Overrun Error 0 Tramsmit Warn. 0 0758192.440; Tx; 0x780; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
SleepMode no Bus status bus-on Bus Error Intr no Receiver Warn. 0 Tramsmit Error 0 0758196.450; Rx; 0x081; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0758198.450; Rx; 0x101; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
AccFilter Mode single Error status no error Arbitration Lost Intr no Receiver Error 0 Bus Off 0 0758200.451; Rx; 0x201; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x00 0x00
SelfTest Mode no Transmit Error Passive Tramsmit Warn. 0 0758204.450; Rx; 0x337; 0x08; 0xc7 0x32 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
transmitting no
ListenOnly Mode no status Interrupt Tramsmit Error 0 Status-Register DX91 0758206.464; Rx; 0x401; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Receive Wake-Up Iterrupt no 0758208.455; Rx; 0x501; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Reset Mode no idle Bus Off 0 0758210.468; Rx; 0x481; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x00
status Data Overrun Bit Wert
no 0758220.467; Tx; 0x001; 0x08; 0x27 0x3b 0x0f 0x01 0x0b 0x49 0x1b 0xe0
Tx complete incomplete Interrupt CAN-Error Comp. 0 0758222.446; Tx; 0x080; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Status-Register DX6
Tx buffer released Error Warning Overrun Error 0 0758224.445; Tx; 0x100; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
no
Data overrun no Interrupt 0758226.461; Tx; 0x200; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Bit Wert Receiver Warn. 0
Transmit Interrupt no 0758228.447; Tx; 0x280; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Rx buffer empty CAN-Error Comp. 0 Receiver Error 0 0758230.450; Tx; 0x300; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Receive Interrupt no 0758232.447; Tx; 0x400; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Overrun Error 0 Tramsmit Warn. 0
Receiver Warn. 0 Tramsmit Error 0 0758234.447; Tx; 0x500; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Interrupt-Enable (nur PeliCAN- Sonst. Register 0758236.476; Tx; 0x480; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Receiver Error 0 Bus Off 0 0758238.449; Tx; 0x680; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Mode)
Tramsmit Warn. 0 TimeStamp; Typ; ID; Len; ;Data 0758240.465; Tx; 0x700; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Register Wert
Tramsmit Error 0 0758084.419; Tx; 0x500; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758242.450; Tx; 0x780; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Bit Wert Clock divider (CDR): 0xc0 0758086.420; Tx; 0x480; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758246.464; Rx; 0x081; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Clock divider (CDR) Bus Off 0
Bus Error Intr enabled (PeliCAN-Mode) 0758088.420; Tx; 0x680; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758248.460; Rx; 0x101; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Arbitration Lost Intr enabled RX ErrorCounter 0 0758090.435; Tx; 0x700; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758250.475; Rx; 0x201; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x00 0x00
Status-Register DX61 0758092.421; Tx; 0x780; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758254.461; Rx; 0x301; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x02 0x03 0x00 0x61
Error Passive Interrupt enabled TX ErrorCounter 0
0758096.435; Rx; 0x081; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0758256.471; Rx; 0x401; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Wake-Up Iterrupt disabled ErrorCodeCapture 0x00 0758098.431; Rx; 0x101; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0758258.464; Rx; 0x501; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Bit Wert
Data Overrun Interrupt enabled Bus-Timing 0 (BTR0) 0x03 0758100.445; Rx; 0x201; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x00 0x00 0758260.463; Rx; 0x481; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x00
CAN-Error Comp. 0 0758104.432; Rx; 0x301; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x03 0x00 0x00 0758270.488; Tx; 0x001; 0x08; 0x27 0x3b 0x0f 0x01 0x0b 0x49 0x00 0x07
Error Warning Interrupt enabled Bus-Timing 1 (BTR1) 0x18
Overrun Error 0 0758106.432; Rx; 0x401; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0758272.454; Tx; 0x080; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Transmit Interrupt disabled 0758108.432; Rx; 0x501; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0758274.455; Tx; 0x100; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Receiver Warn. 0
Receive Interrupt disabled 0758110.434; Rx; 0x481; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x00 0758276.469; Tx; 0x200; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Receiver Error 0 0758120.453; Tx; 0x001; 0x08; 0x26 0x3b 0x0f 0x01 0x0b 0x49 0x1b 0xe0 0758278.455; Tx; 0x280; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Tramsmit Warn. 0 0758122.425; Tx; 0x080; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758280.478; Tx; 0x300; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
ErrCnt = 0 0758124.425; Tx; 0x100; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758282.457; Tx; 0x400; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Tramsmit Error 0
0758126.439; Tx; 0x200; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758284.457; Tx; 0x500; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
ErrCnt0 = 0 Bus Off 0 0758128.426; Tx; 0x280; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758286.459; Tx; 0x4df; 0x08; 0xc7 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
ErrCnt1 = 0 0758132.461; Tx; 0x400; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758290.460; Tx; 0x700; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55
Status-Register DX7
ErrCnt2 = 0 0758136.430; Tx; 0x480; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758296.470; Rx; 0x081; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Bit Wert 0758138.429; Tx; 0x680; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758298.468; Rx; 0x101; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
ErrCnt3 = 0 CAN-Error Comp. 0 0758140.431; Tx; 0x700; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758300.486; Rx; 0x201; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x00 0x00
Overrun Error 0 0758142.429; Tx; 0x780; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0758304.469; Rx; 0x301; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x03 0x00 0x61
Status-Register DX41 0758146.442; Rx; 0x081; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0758306.478; Rx; 0x401; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
etc.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 51

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
i NOTE
After the unit is switched off, the logging function will be deactivated
again automatically.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 52 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S008: Update service
Update service
båÖäáëÜ
Function S008 Checking the software versions
Test step 2 Overview of the module software versions
Test step 3 Entry of a unit serial number
Test step 4 Initializing the function activation

(not for XG3 and XG3
PPE)

Easypad touchscreen
➊
➊
1 - S008 +
2 - 2 + S008_______2____
3
1 2 3
5.8
5.8.1 S008: Test step 2
selection by pressing the service key .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S008 +
2 - 2 + ➊
S008_______2____
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 53
S008.2: Overview of the module software versions
XGPlus / 3Dready: The software versions currently installed in the modules are displayed on the
Easypad touchscreen info screen of the touchscreen display.
System : V02.20.00
DX11 : V00.02.56
DX6 : V00.02.35
DX7 : V00.02.56
DX41 : V00.02.33
DX42 : V00.02.22
DX61 : V00.02.26 65
DX81 : V00.02.28
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad shows the message SYSTEM SOFT-
WARE
Select the desired module using the arrow keys of selection field 1 and con-
firm your selection by pressing the memory key .
SYSTEMSOFTWARE __ The software version of the selected module is displayed in selection field 1.
1 2 3
➊
DX11____________ V02.18.00_______
1 2 3 1 2 3
To return to the module selection menu, press the Service key .
To return to the Main menu, press the arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
To return to the module selection menu, press the up arrow key above
selection field 3.
To return to the service routine selection menu and then to the Main menu,
press the up arrow key above selection field 3 repeatedly.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 54 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S008.3: Entering / confirming the unit serial number
5.8.2 S008: Test step 3
båÖäáëÜ

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S008 +
2 - 3 + ➊
S008_______3____
3
1 2 3
This test step is required...

if a software update is performed...
for XG 5/3/3 PPE: from V02.18.1 to a higher version

for XGPlus / 3Dready: from V02.19 to a higher
version.
The value X is then displayed in selection field 1 of service routine
S008.3 (and with the arrow keys for the XGPlus ). When opened, the rou-
tine is initially in the editing mode for entry of the unit serial number (case
A).
if modules have been replaced. In this case, the backup copy of the unit
serial number still stored in the unit must be reconfirmed (case B).
If this service routine is called up with a valid unit serial number, the possibility
of entering or confirming the serial number will be deactivated. The valid serial
5.8
number is displayed in selection field 1.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 55
Case A: 1. Get the unit serial number from the rating plate of the unit
Entry of a unit serial number (e.g. 00123).
2. Select the first digit of the serial number with the arrow keys in selection
field 1 (from the left in example 1) and accept this value with the R key
R R .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 1 + ➊
2 3 1______________
3
1 2 3
R
R
1X is now displayed in selection field 1 and the second digit of the serial num-
ber can be selected.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 1X + ➊
2 3 1X_____________
3
1 2 3
R
3. Select the second digit of the serial number with the arrow keys in selec-
tion field 1 (from the left in example 2) and accept this value with the R key
R R .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 12 + ➊
2 3 12______________
3
1 2 3
R
R
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 56 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
12X is now displayed in selection field 1 and the third digit of the serial number
can be selected.
båÖäáëÜ
Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 12X + ➊
2 3 12X_____________
3
1 2 3
R
4. Repeat this procedure until the complete unit serial number has been en-
tered.
5. Save the unit serial number with the memory key .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 123X + ➊
2 3 123X____________
3
1 2 3
➊
R
The complete serial number is displayed for review. The system automatically
changes the entry to a 9-digit number by adding leading zeros at the left.
5.8
Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 000000123 + ➊
2 3 000000123_______
3
1 2 3
R
i NOTE
At this point you have the possibility of discarding an incorrectly entered serial
number. This is done by quitting the service routine without finally confirming
the serial number via the R key.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 57
6. Check the correctness of the unit serial number you have entered and, if it
is OK, confirm this by pressing the R key R R .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 000000123 S8
2 3 000000123_______
3
1 2 3
R
R ➊
CAUTION
Make sure that you do not accidentally press the R key and/or the Memory key
before all digits of the serial number have been entered. Otherwise an incor-
rect serial number will be irreversibly entered.
Case B: 1. To confirm the displayed serial number, press the R key R R .

Confirming the unit serial number
XGPlus / 3Dready: XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:Multipad
Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 000000123 S8
2 3 000000123_______
3
1 2 3
R
R
You can interrupt this procedure with the Service key .

The unit serial number will then not be confirmed.

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 58 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S008.4: Initializing the function activation
5.8.3 S008: Test step 4

(not for XG3 and XG3 PPE)
båÖäáëÜ
XGPlus / 3Dready: XG 5: Multipad

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S008 + S8
S008_______4____
2 - 4 +
➊
3
1 2 3
After the test step has been selected, there are two possibilities:
It is possible to initialize the function activation (case A)
It is not possible to initialize the function activation (case B)
Case A: It is possible to initialize the func-

tion activation Easypad touchscreen
1 S8
2 4 _________________
3
1 2 3
R
5.8
Case B: It is not possible to initialize the
function activation XGPlus / 3Dready: XG 5: Multipad
Easypad touchscreen
1 FFFF S8
2 4 FFFF____________
3
1 2 3
i NOTE
If it is possible to initialize the function activation, then the memory key
(XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the memory key (XG5) will light
up at this point.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 59
S008.4: Initializing the function activation
Performing initialization 2. To initialize the function activation, first press the memory key (R
key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the R key (XG5) lights up) and
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen XG 5: Multipad
1 S8
2 4 _________________
3
1 2 3
R
➊
➊ R

arrow key .
For XG 5:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 60 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S009: Initializing the flash file system
Flash file system
båÖäáëÜ
Function S009 Flash file system
Test step 4 Initializing the flash file system Security access
i NOTE
If the flash file system is initialized, the contents of the Error logging
memory are also lost.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
➊
1 - S009 +
2 - 4 + S009_______4____
3
1 2 3
5.9.1 S009: Test step 4
5.9

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S009 +
S009_______4____
2 - 4 +
➊
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 61
S009.4: Initializing the flash file system
Service key .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1
___________9____
2 - 9 +
➊
3
1 2 3
After the test step has been selected the memory key (XGPlus / 3Dready)
or the LED above the memory key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.
Initializing the flash file system 3. To initialize the flash file system, first press the memory key (R
key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights
up) and then the R key R R .

Easypad touchscreen
1 S9
2 4
3
1 2 3
➊
R
➊
R
Flash file system formatting in progress. This process takes approx. 5 - 6 min.
and is visualized by a progress indicator. The end of this process is indicated
by the message 0000 in selection field 2. The memory key (XGPlus /
ready
3D ) and the LED above the memory key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) light up.

Easypad touchscreen
1 S9
2 4
3
1 2 3
R
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 62 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S009.4: Initializing the flash file system
When the initialization has been completed, 0000 is displayed in the selection
field.
XGPlus / 3Dready:
båÖäáëÜ
Easypad touchscreen
1 S9
2 0000 4 0000____
3
1 2 3
R

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.9
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 63
S012: CAN bus service

CAN bus service
Function S012 CAN bus service
Test step 1 Presence display of modules
Test step 2 Inquiry of the CAN status register of the modules
Test step 3 Resetting the CAN status register of the modules
Test step 4 Display of CAN bus cycle on LEDs of modules
i NOTE
The CAN bus service is not yet implemented for module
implemented:

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S012 + ➊
2 S012_______2____
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 64 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S012.2: Inquiry of the CAN status register of the modules
5.10.1 S012: Test step 1

Presence display of modules
båÖäáëÜ
Selection field Parameter/Display Range of values
1 Subunit DX1 - DX88
2 Counter value
of CAN bus events
Presence code behind
the counter value:
P = Module is "present"
L = Module is "lost"

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S012 + S12
S012_______1____
2 - 1 +
➊
3
1 2 3
Checking the module 2. Select the desired module using the arrow keys of selection field 1.
The counter value of the CAN bus events processed so far (since the last
switch-on of the unit) of the selected module is displayed in selection field
2 with the presence code of the module ("L" or "P") (see table).
5.10
Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - DX61 + ➊
2 1234P DX61___OP________
3
1 2 3
T
After the required module has been selected the test key T
(XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the test key T (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 65
Clearing the counter for the module 3. To delete the counter, press the T key T T .
The counter is then reset to "0".

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - DX61 + ➊
2 OP DX61___OP________
3
1 2 3
➊
T
T

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 66 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
5.10.2 S012 Test step 2
i NOTE
båÖäáëÜ
Before querying the CAN status register for the modules, you should first reset
the registers via service routine S012.3 (see page 5-70).

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S012 + S12
S012_______2____
2 - 2 +
➊
3
1 2 3
The selected module is displayed in the selection field 1.
Selecting a module 2. Select the desired module using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - DX61 + ➊
2 DX61____________
3
5.10
1 2 3
T
After the required module has been selected the test key T (XGPlus /
3Dready) or the LED above the test key T (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 67
Selecting the register 3. Press the Test key T T .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - DX6 + ➊
2 DX6____________
3
1 2 3
➊
T
T
XGPlus / 3Dready: The CAN status registers of the currently selected module, e.g. "CAN-State
Easypad touchscreen DX6", are displayed.
i NOTE
CAN-State DX6 Values not equal to zero indicate a problem with the CAN bus connection.
CAN-Error Comp. : 0
Overrun Error : 0
Receiver Warn. : 0
Receiver Error : 0
Transmit Warn. : 0
Transmit Error : 0 65
Bus off : 0
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad The first CAN status register of the currently selected module, e.g.
"CAN-State DX6", is displayed.
➊ Select the desired CAN status register using the arrow keys in selection field
1 and confirm your selection with the memory key .
CAN _ ERROR _ COMP .__
1 2 3
The value of the selected CAN status register is displayed.

➊
Using the up arrow key in selection field 3 or the
Service key you can return to the CAN status register selection menu.
0_____________
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 68 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
båÖäáëÜ
arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.10
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 69
S012.3: Resetting the CAN status register of the modules
5.10.3 S012: Test step 3
i NOTE
Perform this service routine as required prior to service routine
S012.2.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S012 + S12
S012_______3____
2 - 3 +
➊
3
1 2 3
After the selection of the test step, the Memory and the
R key R (XGPlus / 3Dready) and the LEDs above the Memory
and the R key R (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) light up.
Clearing the CAN bus registers 2. To clear the CAN bus registers, first press the
Memory key (R key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the R
key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key R R .

Easypad touchscreen
1 S12
2 3 ________________
3
1 2 3
R
➊
➊
R
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 70 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S012.3: Resetting the CAN status register of the modules
båÖäáëÜ
arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.10
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 71
S012.4: Display of CAN bus cycles on the LEDs of the modules
5.10.4 S012: Test step 4

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S012 + S12
S012_______4____
2 - 4 +
➊
3
1 2 3
After the test step is selected, the code for the current setting of the display
appears in selection field 1:
00 = LED display on the modules switched OFF
01 = LED display on the modules switched ON
Switching LED display on/off 2. Select the desired code using the arrow keys of selection field 1 and con-
firm your selection by pressing the Test key T T

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 01 + ➊
2 01______________
3
1 2 3
T
T
i NOTE
The LEDs on the modules normally flash slowly (1 Hz) (for code 00). When
code 01 has been selected and confirmed, the CAN bus clock pulse of the
TTP protocol, which is output by the master module as a broadcast with a fre-
quency of 20 Hz, is output on the LEDs (the green life LED flashes on DX7).
Thus by "rocking through" the connectors, you can detect directly the contact
loss of the module on the CAN bus. The activation or deactivation of this func-
tion simultaneously acts on all modules.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 72 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S012.4: Display of CAN bus cycles on the LEDs of the modules
båÖäáëÜ
arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.10
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 73
S014: Rotation motor service

Rotation motor service
Function S014 Rotation motor service
Test step 1 Travel of rotational drive to the Pan home position
Test step 2 Travel of rotational drive to the ceph home position
Test step 3 Free travel of rotational drive
Test step 4 Display of light barrier signals of rotational drive

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S014 + ➊
2 - 1 + S014_______1____
3
1 2 3
5.11.1 S014: Test step 1

This test step is no longer offered in all software versions.
This test step realizes "isolated" travel of the rotation motor to the pan home
position. Actuators 1 and 2 remain in their current positions.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S014 +
S014_______1____
2 - 1 +
➊
3
1 2 3
After the test step is selected, selection field 1 displays the current status:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 74 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S014.1: Travel of rotational drive to the Pan home position

Easypad touchscreen
båÖäáëÜ
➊
1 - FFFF + S14
2 1 ____FFFF________
3
1 2 3
R
FFFF = Position of rotation undefined

(following activation of service routine)
Moving the ring 2. Press the R key R R to move the ring to the pan home position.

Easypad touchscreen
1 - FFFF + S14
2 1 ____FFFF________
3
1 2 3
R R ➊
5.11

0000 = Pan home position reached
EEEE = Pan home position not reached due to an
error state
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 75
S014.2: Travel of rotational drive to the ceph home position

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.11.2 S014: Test step 2

This test step is no longer offered in all software versions.
This test step realizes "isolated" travel of the rotation motor to the ceph home
position (with the arm in the right or the left position, depending on the config-
uration). Actuators 1 and 2 remain in their current positions.
Travel to the ceph home position is also possible without configuring the sys-
tem version for the cephalometer mode.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S014 +
S014_______2____
2 - 2 +
➊
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 76 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S014.2: Travel of rotational drive to the ceph home position
XGPlus / 3Dready:
båÖäáëÜ
Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - FFFF + S14
2 2 ____FFFF________
3
1 2 3
R

Moving the ring 2. Press the R key R R to move the ring to the ceph home position.

Easypad touchscreen
1 - FFFF + S14
2 2 ____FFFF________
3
1 2 3
R R ➊
5.11

0000 = Ceph home position reached
EEEE = Ceph home position not reached due to an
error state
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 77
S014.3: Free travel of rotational drive

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.11.3 S014: Test step 3

This test step realizes "isolated" travel of the rotation motor to the ceph home
position (with the arm in the right or the left position, depending on the config-
uration). Actuators 1 and 2 remain in their current positions.
Travel to the ceph home position is also possible without configuring the sys-
tem version for the cephalometer mode.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S014 +
S014_______3____
2 - 3 +
➊
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 78 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S014.3: Free travel of rotational drive
After the test step is selected, selection field 1 displays the arrow keys (for
XGPlus / 3Dready):
båÖäáëÜ
Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - + S14
2 3 ________________
3
1 2 3
Moving the ring 2. Press the arrow keys to move the ring to the right (+) or to the left (-). The
ring keeps moving as long as the key remains pressed.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - + ➊
2 3 ________________
3
1 2 3
5.11
arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 79
S014.4: Display of light barrier signal of rotational drive
5.11.4 S014: Test step 4

This test step realizes display of the switching state of rotation motor light bar-
rier V1_3.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S014 +
S014_______4____
2 - 4 +
➊
3
1 2 3
After the test step is selected on the Easypad (with XGPlus / 3Dready) the ser-
vice key and patient symbol key 1 are displayed:

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - + S14
2 4 ________________
3
1 2 3
Checking the light barrier 2. Move the ring manually. Tripping of the light barrier is indicated by illumi-
nation of the patient symbol key (on XGPlus / 3Dready) or by illumination of
the LED above patient symbol key 1 (on XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE).

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 80 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S015: Actuator service

Actuator service
båÖäáëÜ
Function S015 Actuator service
Test step 5 Testing of actuators 1 and 2

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S015 + ➊
2 - 5 + S015_______5____
3
1 2 3
5.12.1 S015: Test step 5

The use of this service routine is suitable for troubleshooting motor and cable
defects. Furthermore, the possibility of performing isolated travel with an indi-
vidual drive makes it possible to release the clamping of the actuator/rotation
system and check the stiffness of the individual adjusting axes.
5.12

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S015 +
S015_______5____
2 - 5 +
➊
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 81
S015.1: Testing of actuators 1 and 2
After the test step is selected, selection field 1 displays the arrow keys (for
XGPlus / 3Dready):

Easypad touchscreen
1 - + S15
2 5 _______________
3
1 2 3
R
Patient symbol key 1 indicates the switching state of the light barrier for actu-
ator 1; patient symbol key 2 indicates the switching state of the light barrier for
actuator 2:
Patient symbol key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or = Light barrier located in

LED above patient symbol key switching plate
(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lit
Patient symbol key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or = Light barrier not located in

LED above patient symbol key switching plate
(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) not lit
Moving the actuators 2. Press the arrow keys in selection field 1 (for actuator 1) or selection field 2
(for actuator 2) to move the actuator to the right (+) or to the left (-). The ac-
tuator keeps moving as long as the key remains pressed.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - + ➊
2 - + 5 _______________
3
1 2 3
R
Using the R key R R the system (actuators 1 and 2) can be moved back
to the pan home position. In this position, patient symbol keys 1 and 2 (XGPlus
/ 3Dready) and the LEDs above patient symbol keys 1 and 2 (XG 5/3/3 PPE)
light up.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 82 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S015.1: Testing of actuators 1 and 2
båÖäáëÜ
arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.12
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 83
S017: Configuration service

Configuration service
Function S017 Unit configuration
Test step 2 Configuring the hardware version Security access
Test step 3 Enter the country group code Security access
Test step 4 Select a language index within the language set Security access
(only XGPlus / 3Dready)
Test step 5 Select a language set index within the language set Security access
Test step 6 Activate the remote control display Security access
Test step 8 Selecting the kVmA level series Security access
Test step 9 Configuring operation without board DX41 Security access
Test step 10 Configuring the headrest Security access
Test step 11 Selecting the image format Security access
Test step 12 Enabling/disabling the preview image Security access

Test step 13 Enabling/disabling the welcome screen Security access

Test step 14 Enabling/disabling certain lines of the welcome screen Security access
Test step 15 Activating/deactivating the acoustic signal for the end of exposure Security access
Test step 17 Setting the acceptance/constancy test, RöV FRG Security access
Checking and accepting the diaphragm configuration, worldwide
Test step 18 Activation of the occlusal bite block function Security access
(only for XGPlus /
3Dready) This routine may only be selected for units with occlusal bite block; oth-
erwise, the unit will malfunction.
Occlusal bite
block
Test step 22 Deactivating/activating the PPE display after each Security access
(XG 3 PPE only) unit power-up
Test step 23 Defining the PPE display warning level after each exposure Security access
(XG 3 PPE only)
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 84 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S017.2: Configuring the hardware version
XGPlus / 3Dready:
båÖäáëÜ
Easypad touchscreen
➊
➊
1 - S017 +
2 - 2 + S017_______2____
3
1 2 3
5.13.1 S017: Test step 2

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S017 +
S017_______2____
2 - 2 +
➊
3
1 2 3
5.13
Service key .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1
__________17____
2 - 17 +
➊
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 85
Selecting the system version 3. Select the desired service routine using the arrow keys in
selection field 1
0001 = panoramic digital

0003 = panoramic digital/ceph left digital
0005 = panoramic digital/ceph right digital
0041 = panoramic digital, TSA (only for XGPlus)
0043 = panoramic digital, ceph left digital, TSA (only for XGPlus)
0045 = panoramic digital, ceph right digital, TSA (only for XGPlus)
0081 = system version XG 3/3 PPE

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 0003 + ➊
2 2 ____0003________
3
1 2 3
R
After the unit version has been selected the memory key (XGPlus /
ready) or the LED above the memory key
3D (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights
up.
4. To save the selected system version, first press the
memory key (R key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the R

Easypad touchscreen
1 - 0003 + S17
2 2 ____0003________
3
1 2 3
R
➊
R
➊
i NOTE
The set value is permanently saved as the relevant system version.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 86 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Checking/setting the jumper position 5. Check the jumper settings of sockets
306 (DX61, diaphragm)(only if XG 3/3 PPE= 0081),
båÖäáëÜ
309 (DX91, ceph sensor) and
503 (DX81, ceph sensor)
on board DX1.
0001 and 0041
Socket X309 Socket X503
DX1 Jumper inside

Cephalometer not connected, i.e.
connector not plugged in
i NOTE 0003, 000, 0043 and 0045

For more information on the correct jumper
positions and CAN bus wiring, refer to sec-
tion 3.2.2. Socket X309 Socket X503
5.13
Jumper out-
Cephalometer connected,
i.e. connector plugged in
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 87
0081 = XG 3 / 3 PPE
Socket X306 Socket X309
Jumper inside Jumper inside
Socket X503
Jumper inside
Cephalometer and motor-driven diaphragm not connected,

i.e. connector not plugged in
To go on to the next test step, press the Service key .

To return to the Service menu, press the double arrow key .
arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

To return to the Service menu, press the up arrow key above selection
field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 88 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S017.3: Enter the country group code
5.13.2 S017: Test step 3
båÖäáëÜ
Start test step 3 in the same way as described on page 5-85 or by press-
ing the Service key in test step 2.
i NOTE
If you go to test step 3 from test step 2 by pressing the Service key, the security
access confirmation will be skipped.
Selecting the country group code 1. Select the desired country group code using the arrow keys in selection
field 1.
00 = worldwide
01 = Asia
02 = USA
03 = France CTDI-DAP

Easypad touchscreen
➊
➊
1 - 00 +
2 3 ______00________
3
1 2 3
R
After the country group code is selected, the

memory key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the memory key
(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.
5.13
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 89
S017.3: Enter the country group code
2. To save the selected country group code, first press the


Easypad touchscreen
1 - 00 + S17
2 3 ______00________
3
1 2 3
R
➊
➊
R
i NOTE
The setting is permanently saved.

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 90 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S017.4: Select the language index within a language set
5.13.3 S017: Test step 4 (only for XGPlus / 3Dready)
båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
Selecting a language index 1. Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select the
desired language index.
00 = English
01 = German
02 = French
03 = Italian
04 = Dutch
05 = Spanish
06 = Russian
07 = Norwegian
08 = Portuguese
09 = Swedish
10 = Chinese
11 = Korean
12 = Japanese
13 = Chinese (Taiwan)
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - 01 + ➊
5.13
2 4
3
After the language index is selected, the memory key lights up.
2. To save the selected language index, first press the memory key (the
R key lights up) and then the R key R .
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 91
S017.4: Select the language index within a language set
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - 01 + S17
2 4
3
i NOTE
i NOTE
If the selected language is not contained in the installed language set, English
is set as the default language.
Quitting the service routine To go on to the next test step, press the Service key .
arrow key .
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 92 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S017.5: Select the language set index within a language set

båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
Selecting a language set index 1. Select the desired language set index using the arrow keys of selection
field 1.
00 = German, English, French, Italian

01 = German, English, French, Dutch
02 = German, English, Spanish, Russian
03 = German, English, Korean, Japanese
04 = German, English, Spanish, Portuguese
05 = German, English, Chinese (PRC), Chinese (Taiwan)
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - 00 + ➊
2 5
After the language set index is selected, the memory key lights up.
2. To save the selected language set index, first press the
memory key (R key lights up) and then press the
R key R .
5.13
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - 00 + S17
2 5
➊
i NOTE
Perform a software update to install the corresponding languages in the

system (see section 1.7).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 93
S017.6: Activate the remote control display

arrow key .
5.13.5 S017: Test step 6
i NOTE
Selecting the device status 1. Select the desired device status using the arrow keys of selection field 1.
00 = Remote control inactive

01 = Remote control active

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 00 + ➊
2 6 ______00________
3
1 2 3
R
After the device status is selected, the

2. To save the selected device status, first press the
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 94 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S017.6: Activate the remote control display

Easypad touchscreen
båÖäáëÜ
1 - 00 + S17
2 6 ______00________
3
1 2 3
➊
R
➊
R
i NOTE

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

field 3.
5.13
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 95
S017.8: Selecting the kV/mA level series
5.13.6 S017: Test step 8
i NOTE
Selecting the kV/mA level series 1. Select the desired kV/mA level series using the arrow keys of
selection field 1.
1A = 16mA series for PAN

16 mA series for ceph
8/10mA series for TSA (only XGPlus)
2A = 8mA series for PAN

4A = 8/16mA series for PAN


Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 1A + ➊
2 8 ______1A________
3
1 2 3
R
After the kV/mA level series are selected, the

2. To save the selected kV/mA level series, first press the
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 96 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S017.8: Selecting the kV/mA level series

Easypad touchscreen
båÖäáëÜ
1 - 1A + S17
2 8 ______1A________
3
1 2 3
➊
R
➊
R

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

field 3.
5.13
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 97
S017.9: Configuring operation without DX41
5.13.7 S017: Test step 9

This service routine is used to configure operation of the system with or with-
out the module DX41. This configuration is necessary for software updates
and module replacement or board DX11 if systems with or without board
DX41 should be supported.
i NOTE
Setting configuration without DX41 1. Select the desired device status using the arrow keys of selection field 1.
00 = operation without DX41

(Factory setting, for device hardware version ≥ BA)
01 = operation with DX41
(Factory setting, for device hardware version ≤AG)

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 00 + ➊
2 9 _______00________
3
1 2 3
R

memory key (R key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the R key
(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key R R .

Easypad touchscreen
1 - 00 + S17
2 9 ______00________
3
1 2 3
➊
R
➊
R
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 98 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S017.9: Configuring operation without DX41
i NOTE
båÖäáëÜ

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

field 3.
5.13
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 99
S017.10: Configuration of headrest

The operation of the unit for the installed headrest version is configured with
this service routine.
This configuration is required for replacement of board DX11 and a unit hard-
ware version ≥ AG (for XGPlusunits) as well as for the installation of headrest
version 2 in units with a hardware version ≤ AG.
Start test step 10 as described on page 5-80 or by pressing the Service
key in test step 9.
i NOTE
If you go to test step 10 from test step 9 by pressing the Service key, the secu-
rity access confirmation will be skipped.
Configuring the headrest 1. Select the currently installed headrest using the arrow keys in selection
field 1.
00 = operation with headrest version 1 (until approx. October 2006)

(Factory setting for unit hardware versions ≤ AG)
01 = operation with headrest version 2 (from approx. November 2006)
(Factory setting, for device hardware version ≥ BA)
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Vertical Easypad touchscreen
Headrest version 1
(will be replaced by headrest version 2
➊
1 - 01 +
in 2007 and will then no longer be avail-
able as a repair part)
2 10
3
After the headrest version is selected, the

Memory key lights up.
Slanted toward
the rear 2. To save the selected headrest version, first press the
Headrest version 2 memory key (R key lights up) and then press the
(will be available (from 2007 on) under R key R .
the part no.: 5969741)
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 100 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S017.10: Configuration of headrest
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
båÖäáëÜ
1 - 01 + S17
2 10
3
i NOTE
arrow key .
5.13
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 101
S017.11: Selecting the image format
5.13.9 S017: Test step 11 (XG 5 only)
i NOTE
If you go to test step 11 from test step 8 by pressing the Service key, the secu-
rity access confirmation will be skipped.
Selecting the image format 1. Select the desired image format using the arrow keys of selection field 1.
00 = C3 = 18 x 23 cm
01 = C3F = 30 x 23 cm
XG 5: Multipad
______01________
1 2 3
After the image format is selected, the LED above the

2. To save the selected image format, first press the
memory key (LED above the R key lights up) and then the R key
R .
XG 5: Multipad
______00________
1 2 3
➊
R
field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 102 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S017.12: Enabling/disabling the preview image
5.13.10 S017: Test step 12(only for XGPlus / 3Dready)
båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
If you go to test step 12 from test step 11 by pressing the Service key, the se-
curity access confirmation will be skipped.
Preview image, enable/disable 1. Select the code for displaying the preview image using the arrow keys of
selection field 1.
00 = Preview image disabled

01 = Preview image enabled
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 01 +
2 12
After the code is selected, the memory key lights up.

2. To save the selection, press the memory key (the R key lights up) and
then the R key R .
5.13
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - 01 + S17
2 12
arrow key .
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 103
S017.13: Enabling/disabling the welcome screen
5.13.11 S017: Test step 13

i NOTE
Enable/disable the welcome screen 1. Select the code for enabling or disabling the welcome screen using the ar-
row keys of selection field 1.
00 = Welcome screen disabled

01 = Welcome screen enabled
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 01 +
2 13
3
2. After the code is selected the memory key lights up. To save the se-
lection, first press the memory key (the R key lights up) and then the
R key R .
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - 01 + S17
2 13
➊
The welcome screen is enabled or disabled.
i NOTE
After the welcome screen is disabled all parameters of the service routine
S017.14 are reset back to the factory setting.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 104 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S017.14: Enabling/disabling certain lines of the welcome screen
båÖäáëÜ
arrow key .
5.13.12 S017: Test step 14

i NOTE
After the test step is selected, a welcome screen line ID appears in selection
field 1.
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - 1 + 17
2 - 0 + 14
5.13
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 105
Enable/disable certain lines of the wel- 1. Select the code of the desired line using the arrow keys of selection field
come screen 1.
1 = First name
2 = Surname
3 = Date of birth
4 = Patient number
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - 1 + ➊
2 - 0 + 14
The activation status code is displayed in selection field 2.
0 = disabled
1 = enabled
2. Select the desired status using the arrow keys of selection field 2.
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - 1 + 17
2 - 1 + 14 ➊
3
R key R .
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 106 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
båÖäáëÜ
1 - 1 + 17
2 - 1 + 14
arrow key .
5.13
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 107
S017.15: Activating/deactivating the acoustic signal for the end of exposure
5.13.13 S017: Test step 15

i NOTE
Activate/deactivate the acoustic signal 1. Select the code for activating or deactivating the acoustic signal using the
for end of exposure arrow keys of selection field 1.
00 = acoustic signal for end of exposure = OFF

01 = acoustic signal for end of exposure = ON

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 00 +
2 15 ______00________
3
1 2 3
R
R key R .

Easypad touchscreen
1 - 01 + S17
2 15 ______01________
3
1 2 3
➊
R
➊
R
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 108 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S017.15: Activating/deactivating the acoustic signal for the end of exposure
båÖäáëÜ
arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

field 3.
5.13
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 109
S017.17: Setting the standard for the acceptance/constancy test, RöV FRG
5.13.14 S017: Test step 17Setting the acceptance/

constancy test, RöV FRG
Selection field Parameter/Display Meaning/Range of values

1 FILTER Type of filter*
MECHANICS Type of mechanics
2 For FILTER setting:
F 01 0.8 mm Cu (worldwide)
F 02 1.8mm Cu (FRG)*
For MECHANICS setting:
01 ORTHOPHOS XG3Dready
02 ORTHOPHOS XG 3D*
03 Not in use
3 61 → 11 Direction of data transfer =
DX61 → DX11
11 → 61 Direction of data transfer =
DX61 → DX11
Selecting test step 17 1. Use the arrow keys in selection field 2 to select test step 17 and confirm
your selection via the Service key .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S017 + S17
S017______17____
2 - 17 + ➊
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 110 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
For XG 3 units
For XG 3 units, the standard must be set via the arrow keys:
båÖäáëÜ
XG 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad
_____F 01________
1 2 3
2. Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select the standard for the accep-
tance/constancy test:
F 01=Old standard: 0.8 mm Cu

F 02=New standard: 1.8 mm Cu
_____F 02________
1 2 3
➊
3. To save the setting, first press the memory key (the LED above the R
5.13
key lights up) and then the R key R .
_____F 02________
1 2 3
➊
R
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 111
For XGPlus / 3Dready and XG 5 devices

A distinction must be made between two cases for XGPlus / 3Dready and XG 5
devices:
Case A:
After replacing board DX11 or the com- XGPlus / 3Dready: XG 5: Multipad
plete diaphragm mechanism ex works Easypad touchscreen
data must be transferred from DX61 to
DX11.
1
02 S17
02____61 11_____
2 61 17
3 11
1 2 3
T R
2. To transfer data from board DX61 to board DX11 and save them there,
first press the memory key (R key or LED above R key lights up)
and then the R key R R .

Easypad touchscreen
1
02 S17
2 61 17 02____61 11_____
3 11
1 2 3
T R
CAUTION
➊ The T key must not be pressed. Press-
ing the T key reverses the direction of
data transfer (see Case B).
Case B:
After replacing board DX61 in a XGPlus / 3Dready: XG 5: Multipad
pre-installed diaphragm unit data must Easypad touchscreen
be transferred from the DX11 to the DX61.
1
02 S17
02____61 11_____
2 61 17
3 11
1 2 3
R
2. Press the T key T T

This changes the direction of data transfer.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 112 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

Easypad touchscreen
båÖäáëÜ
1
02 S17
2 61 17 02____61 11_____
3 11
1 2 3
T R
T
➊
➊

Easypad touchscreen
1
02 S17
2 11 17 02____11 61_____
3 61
1 2 3
T R
After the data have been transferred and saved, only service routine 02 is
5.13
displayed in selection field 1 and (only for the XGPlus / 3Dready) the Ser-
vice key is displayed on the touchscreen:

Easypad touchscreen
1
02 S17
2 17 ______02________
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 113

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 114 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S017.17: Checking and accepting the diaphragm configuration, worldwide
5.13.15 S017: Test step 17

Checking and accepting the diaphragm con-
figuration, worldwide
båÖäáëÜ
(not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)
Selecting test step 17 1. Use the arrow keys in selection field 2 to select test step 17 and confirm
your selection via the Service key .
Once this service routine has been selected, the data of boards DX61 and
DX11 are checked for agreement.
Case A:
The data of boards DX11 and DX61 agree. XGPlus / 3Dready: XG 5: Multipad
Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 01 S17
2 17 ______01________
3
1 2 3
No further action is required.
Case B:
The data of boards DX11 and DX61 do not XGPlus / 3Dready: XG 5: Multipad
match Data must be transferred from Easypad touchscreen
DX61 to DX11.
1
01 S17
01____61 11_____
2 61 17
3 11
5.13
1 2 3
T R
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 115
S017.17: Checking and accepting the diaphragm configuration, worldwide

Easypad touchscreen
1
01 S17
2 61 17 01____61 11_____
3 11
1 2 3
T R
CAUTION
➊ The T key must not be pressed. Press-
ing the T key reverses the direction of
data transfer (see Section 5.13.14,
Case B).

arrow key .
For XG 5:

field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 116 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S017.18: Activation/deactivation of occlusal bite block function
5.13.16 S017: Test step 18

(only for XGPlus / 3Dready with occlusal bite block)
båÖäáëÜ
Occlusal bite ing the Service key in test step 17.
block
i NOTE
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 00 +
2 18
3
Selecting the device status 1. Select the desired device status using the arrow keys of selection field 1.
00 = Occlusal bite block function deactivated

01 = Occlusal bite block function activated
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - 01 + ➊
5.13
2 18
3

memory key (R key lights up) and then press the R key R .
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 117
S017.18: Activation/deactivation of occlusal bite block function
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - 01 + S17
2 18
3
CAUTION
When the occlusal bite block function is activated, all previously existing cali-
bration values are overwritten with default data (factory setting) where applica-
ble. Once the function has been activated, the unit sends error message E1 11
18 to indicate the need for adjustment.
Following activation of the function, service routine S018.9 also has to be run
to check or execute the adjustment function (see page 5-134).
A check also has to be made to ascertain whether the creep speed required
for operation has been configured on this unit. To do this, execute service rou-
tine S18.10 (see page 5-137).
Error message E1 11 18 disappears as soon as the two service routines

above have been run.
i NOTE
If the customer requires a nominal angle which differs from the factory setting
(7°) , then configure it via service routine S18.7 (see page 5-130).
arrow key .
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 118 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S017.22: Configuration of PPE display
5.13.17 S017: Test step 22(XG 3 PPE only)

Start test step 22 as described on page 5-85.
båÖäáëÜ
Enabling/disabling display of the 1. Select the code for displaying the number of remaining exposures using
remaining exposures after each the arrow keys of selection field 1.
power-on
00 = display of remaining exposures = OFF
01 = display of remaining exposures = ON (factory setting)
XG 3 PPE: Multipad
______01________
1 2 3
R key R .
XG 3 PPE: Multipad
______00________
5.13
1 2 3
➊
R
arrow key .
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 119
Configuration of PPE display warning level
5.13.18 S017: Test step 23(XG 3 PPE only)

i NOTE
Defining the warning level for display of 1. Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select the number of remaining
remaining exposures after each expo- exposures starting with which the warning (indicating the number of expo-
sure sures left) will be displayed after each exposure.
XG 3_PPE: Multipad
______30________
1 2 3
2. To save your selection, first press the memory key (the R key lights
up) and then press the R key R .
XG 3_PPE: Multipad
______50________
1 2 3
➊
R
Quitting the service routine To return to the Service menu, press the double arrow key .
arrow key .
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 120 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S018: Service for height adjustment

Service for height adjustment
båÖäáëÜ
Function S018 Service for height adjustment
Test step 2 Limitation of the maximum travel height
Test step 3 Undoing the maximum travel height setting
Test step 4 Check the height adjustment sensor system
Test step 5 Setting of the minimum travel height
Test step 6 Canceling the limitation of minimum travel height setting
Test step 7 Nominal angle setting for the occlusal bite block (as required by the customer)
This routine may only be selected for units with occlusal bite block; otherwise, the unit will mal-
function.
Occlusal bite
block
Test step 8 Functional test of the occlusal bite block

function.
Test step 9 Adjustment of the AD acceptance angle values and the zero point
5.14
function.
Test step 10 Setting the PWM values for the height adjustment creep speed
function.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 121
S018.2: Set the maximum travel height

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S018 + ➊
2 - 2 + S018_______2____
3
1 2 3
5.14.1 S018: Test step 2
Moving the unit 1. Move the unit to the required maximum travel height by pressing the Up/
Down keys in the user mode.
i NOTE
Programming the maximum travel height is possible only for a system height
above the upper correction switch level (> position value of 1500)!
➊ ➊
Prog. S kV mA
T R
Selecting test step 2 2. Select test step 2 using the arrow keys in selection field 2
and then confirm your selection with the Service key .
The current height position is displayed in selection field 1. The memory
key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the memory key (XG 5 /
3 / 3 PPE) lights up.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S018 +
S018_______2____
2 - 2 +
➊
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 122 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S018.2: Set the maximum travel height
Saving the maximum travel height 3. To save the maximum travel height, first press the
båÖäáëÜ
Easypad touchscreen
1 1,342 mm S18
2 2 _1342_ MM ________
3
1 2 3
➊
R
➊
R
Setting the mechanical limit stop on the 4. Loosen nut A and slide mechanical limit stop B for the limit switch until it
unit switches. Retighten nut A.
A i NOTE
The next time the Up key is pressed, the unit will stop 10 mm below the limit
switch.
5.14

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 123
S018.3: Undo the maximum travel height setting
5.14.2 S018: Test step 3
The current height position is displayed in selection field 1. The
Memory key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the memory key
(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) light up.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S018 +
S018_______3____
2 - 3 +
➊
3
1 2 3
Undo the maximum travel height setting 2. To undo the maximum travel height setting, first press the memory key
(R key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3
PPE) lights up) and then the R key R R .

Easypad touchscreen
1 1,342 mm S18
2 3 _1342_ MM ________
3
1 2 3
➊
R
➊
R

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 124 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S018.4: Check the height adjustment sensor system
5.14.3 S018: Test step 4
båÖäáëÜ

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S018 +
S018_______4____
2 - 4 +
➊
3
1 2 3
The current height position is displayed in selection field 1.

Easypad touchscreen
1 1,342 mm S18
2 4 _1342_ MM ________
3
1 2 3
i NOTE
5.14
Following the selection of the service routine, the stand can be
moved up or down up to the limit switches using the UP/DOWN keys
on the control console. The "soft limit positions" set by the software are ig-
nored in this case.
The first three patient symbol keys (from the left) indicate the switching state
of the limit switches:
First patient symbol key = State of correction switch

Second patient symbol key = State of bottom limit switch
Third patient symbol key = State of top limit switch
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 125
S018.4: Check the height adjustment sensor system
If the key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the key (XG 5/3/3 PPE) lights
up, the switch is actuated, i.e. the unit is located above the position value
1500.
XGPlus / 3Dready XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 126 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S018.2: Setting the minimum travel height
5.14.4 S018: Test step 5
Moving the unit 1. Move the unit to the required minimum travel height by pressing the Up/
båÖäáëÜ
Down keys in the user mode.
i NOTE
Programming the minimum travel height is possible only for a system height that is
below the lower correction switch level (< position value of 1500)!
➊ ➊
Prog. S kV mA
T R
Selecting test step 5 2. Select test step 2 using the arrow keys in selection field 5
and then confirm your selection with the Service key .
The current height position is displayed in selection field 1. The memory
key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the memory key (XG 5 /
3 / 3 PPE) lights up.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S018 +
S018_______5____
2 - 5 +
➊
3
5.14
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 127
S018.2: Setting the minimum travel height
Saving the minimum travel height 3. To save the minimum travel height, first press the

Easypad touchscreen
1 200 mm S18
2 5 __200_ MM ________
3
1 2 3
➊
R
➊
R
i NOTE
The limitation of the minimum travel height is purely software based. The lower
limit switch is not adapted to the new minimum travel height!

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 128 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S018.6: Undoing the minimum travel height setting
5.14.5 S018: Test step 6
båÖäáëÜ
The current height position is displayed in selection field 1. The
Memory key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the memory key
(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) light up.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S018 +
S018_______6____
2 - 6 +
➊
3
1 2 3
Undoing the minimum travel height set- 2. To undo the minimum travel height setting, first press the memory key
ting (R key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3
PPE) lights up) and then the R key R R .

Easypad touchscreen
1 200 S18
2 6 __200_ MM ________
3
5.14
1 2 3
➊
R
➊
R

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 129
S018.7: Setting the nominal angle for the occlusal bite block
5.14.6 S018: Test step 7

(only for XGPlus / 3Dready with occlusal bite block)
Occlusal bite selection by pressing the Service key .
block The currently measured angle of the bite block plate is displayed and per-
manently updated in selection field 2 (possible deflections: +22° to -17°).
The display of patient symbol key 1 indicates whether or not the occlusal
bite block is plugged in:
– Patient symbol key 1 visible: Bite block is plugged in
– Patient symbol key 1 not visible: Bite block is not plugged in
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - 7 deg + S18
2 20 deg 7
3
T R
Setting the nominal angle for the occlu- There are two ways for you to set the nominal angle:
sal bite block
Numeric adjustment
via the arrow keys in selection field 1 on the control panel.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 130 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S018.7: Setting the nominal angle for the occlusal bite block
Numeric adjustment
2. Select the desired nominal angle using the arrow keys of selection field 1.
båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
The nominal angle can be set and stored within a range of -17° to +22° .
i NOTE
You can also set the desired angle manually on the occlusal bite block and
transfer this angle setting to selection field 1 by pressing the T key T .
By pressing patient symbol key 1, you can switch the laser light localizer on
and off. You can use the laser light as a reference for the angle adjustment.
When the laser light localizer is activated, the
patient symbol key 1 is lit.
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - 10 deg + ➊
2 20 deg 7
3
T R
The memory key is lit.

3. To save the nominal value, first press the memory key (the R key
lights up) and then the R key R .
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
5.14
1 - 10 deg + S18
2 20 deg 7
3
T R
Quitting the service routine Pressing the Service or double-arrow key returns you to the service
arrow key .
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 131
S018.8: Functional test of the occlusal bite block
5.14.7 S018: Test step 8

(only for XGPlus / 3Dreadywith occlusal bite block)
Occlusal bite selection by pressing the Service key .
block
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - 6 deg + S18
2 2000 8
3 10
The current angle of the bite block plate or the one calculated based on
the calibration is displayed in selection field 1.
The currently measured AD value leading to the angle calculation is dis-
played in selection field 2.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 132 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S018.8: Functional test of the occlusal bite block
All of the monitoring functions of the bite block electronics are active
in this service routine. The codes of the possible error modes of the acqui-
sition electronics are displayed in selection field 3.
båÖäáëÜ
Display Errors Troubleshooting measures
01 Normal state No action
02 Plug X1000 is not plugged in on Check plug for occlusal bite block on board DX1
board DX1
03 Persistent ADC values Perform readjustment via service routine S018.9
04 Interruption of the 5 V line Check cabling and plug connections on board DX1 and occlusal bite
05 Interruption of Vref line block electronics.
06 Interruption of Vout line

07 Interruption of VGND line
08 Interruption of "Connect" line
09 Defective choke, pin 3 detached Replace occlusal bite block electronics (board DX51)
10 Defective choke, pin 1 detached
11 Defective clock generator
12 Resistor R11 not soldered
13 Plug not plugged in on occlusal bite Check plug for occlusal bite block on occlusal bite block electronics
block (board DX51)
14 Composite error Check cabling and plug connections on board DX1 and occlusal bite
block electronics.
15 Calculated angle too small Perform readjustment via service routine S018.9
16 Calculated angle too large
17 Error on ADC channel 2 Replace occlusal bite block electronics (board DX51); check cabling
and plug connections on board DX1 and occlusal bite block electron-
ics.
You can draw conclusions concerning the correctness of the angle acquisition
5.14
based on the plausibility of these displays.
A plausible constellation (reference unit) would be:
+22° AD = 1273
-17° AD = 3124
i NOTE
The settings may differ unit specifically.
arrow key .
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 133
S018.9: Adjustment of the AD acceptance angle values and the zero point
5.14.8 S018: Test step 9

In the adjustment of the AD acceptance angle values, three AD values must
be adjusted and saved:
Occlusal bite
block ZP (zero point): Zero point: applied whenever no bite block is plugged in.
U (Upper): Upper value; applied whenever the bite block is plugged in and
the bite block plate is deflected all the way up.
L (Lower): Lower value; applied whenever the bite block is plugged in and
the bite block plate is deflected all the way down.
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 ZP S18
2 9
3
The data type intended for the next storage function is displayed in selec-
tion field 1.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 134 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Adjusting and saving AD values "ZP": Adjusting and saving the zero point
2. Remove the bite block from the bite block holder.
båÖäáëÜ
"ZP" (for zero point) is displayed in selection field 1.
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 ZP S18
2 9
3
3. To save zero point "ZP", first press the memory key (the R key lights
up) and then the R key R .
The value for the zero point "ZP" is accepted.
"U": Adjusting and saving the upper value
4. Insert the occlusal bite block in the bite block holder and deflect the bite
block plate all the way up (up to the stop).
"U" (for upper value) is displayed in selection field 1.
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
5.14
1 U S18
2 9
3
➊
5. To save upper value "U", first press the memory key (the R key lights
The value for the upper value "U" is accepted.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 135
"L": Adjusting and saving the lower value
6. Deflect the bite block plate all the way down (up to the stop).
"L" (for lower value) is displayed in selection field 1.
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 L S18
2 9
3
➊
7. To save lower value "L", first press the memory key (the R key lights
The value for the lower value "L" is accepted.
The adjustment of the AD values is now finished.

Check the adjustment via service routine S018.7. To do this, move the bite
block plate and check whether the adjustment range is between -17° and
+22°.
arrow key .
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 136 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S018.10: Setting the PWM values for the height adjustment creep speed
5.14.9 S018: Test step 10

båÖäáëÜ
Check in the user mode to see whether the upward and downward move-
ment speed (creep speed) must be corrected.
Occlusal bite
block For this purpose, the bite block must be deflected so that creep speed be-
comes effective in the relevant direction (observe the green arrows).
The PWM index values are correctly adjusted if...
...the drive runs at approximately the same speed in both directions
...the drive spontaneously starts without jolting and concurrent to key ac-
tuation
...the travel speed does not exceed 5mm/s.
The factory setting is: 15 U; 20 D
Selecting test step 10 1. Select test step 10 in selection field 2 with the arrow keys and confirm
your selection by pressing the Service key .
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - 15U + S18
2 - 20 D + 10
3
The PWM index for upward travel "U (Up)" is displayed in selection field 1.
The PWM index for downward travel "D (Down)" is displayed in selection
field 2.
5.14
Adjusting and saving the PWM index 2. Select the desired index values using the arrow keys of selection fields 1
values and 2.
i NOTE
The index values can be set and stored within a range of 1 to 35.
3. To save the index values, first press the memory key (the R key lights
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 137
arrow key .
Check the upward and downward movement speed (creed speed) once
again in the user mode.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 138 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 5 5.15 Service routine S020 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)

båÖäáëÜ
Service for temple support
Function S020 Service for temple support
Test step 1 Changing the switching thresholds of the temple support
This service routine can be used to change the factory-set switching points of
the temple width measurement used for setting the jaw width (“small”, “nor-
mal”, or “large”) within certain limits.
The following drawing shows the motor position values (initial and individual
offset ranges) as well as the mechanical end stops of the temple support.
Headrest version 1
(up to unit hardware version AG)
0 34 46 60
large normal small
-10 (24) +5 (39)

L
-5 (41) +10 (56)
U
Headrest version 2
(as of unit hardware version BA)
0 31 43 60
large normal small
-10 (21) +5 (36)

L
-5 (38) +13 (56)
5.15
U
The switching point between large <–> normal is referred to as the lower
switching point (marked L = lower) and the switching point
between normal <–> small as the upper switching point (marked U = upper).
These switching points can be adjusted via service routine S20.1 within the
following limits:
Headrest version 1 (up to unit hardware version ≤ AG):
Lower switching point (L): Setting range -10...+5
Upper switching point (U): Setting range -5...+10
Headrest version 2 (as of unit hardware version ≥ BA):
Lower switching point (L): Setting range -10...+5
Upper switching point (U): Setting range -5...+13
i NOTE
A negative offset shifts the respective switching point toward larger skulls; a
positive offset has the opposite effect.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 139
S020.1: Change switching thresholds for the temple support
5.15 Service routine S020 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) Tab 5

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S020 + ➊
- 1 +
S020_______1____
2
1 2 3
5.15.1 S020: Test step 1

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S020 + S20
S021_______1____
2 - 1 +
➊
3
1 2 3
Service key .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1
__________20____
2 - 20 +
➊
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 140 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
After the service routine is selected, the lower switching threshold is dis-
played in selection field 1 in the form L: 0. The upper switching threshold
båÖäáëÜ
is displayed in selection field 2 in the form U: 0.

Easypad touchscreen
1 - L: 0 + S20
- U: 0 +
___L:0___U:0_____
2 1
3
1 2 3
R
3. Select the desired offset for the switching point using the arrow keys in
the corresponding selection field (see page 5-139).
Selection field 1: Lower switching point (L)

Selection field 2: Upper switching point (U)
i NOTE
A negative offset shifts the respective switching point toward larger skulls; a
positive offset has the opposite effect.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - L: -3 + ➊
+
___L:-3___U:0_____
2 - U: 0 1
5.15
3
1 2 3
R
After the offset value for the switching point has been changed the mem-
ory key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the
Memory key (XG 5).
ready
/ 3D ) or the LED above the R key (XG 5) lights up) and then the R key
R R .
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 141

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - L: -3 + S20
2 - U: 0 + 1 ___L:-3___U:0_____
3
1 2 3
R
➊
➊ R
arrow key .
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 142 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S021: Service for motor-driven diaphragm
5.16 Service routine S021 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)

Service for motor-driven diaphragm
båÖäáëÜ
Function S021 Service for motor-driven diaphragm
Test step 1 Initialization of diaphragm axis
Test step 3 Perform TSA sensor adjustment (TSA) even if TSA is not configured (function test)

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S021 + ➊
2 - 1 + S021_______1____
3
1 2 3
5.16.1 S021: Test step 1
5.16

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S021 +
S021_______1_____
2 - 1 +
➊
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 143
S021.1: Initialization of diaphragm axis
An inactive progress indicator in selection field 1 and the message FFFF

in selection field 2 signal that the system is ready for initialization of the di-
aphragm axis.
Easypad touchscreen
1 S21
2 FFFF 1 _______FFFF____
3
1 2 3
T
Performing the initialization of the dia- 2. Start the automatic initialization of the diaphragm axis by pressing the T
phragm axis key T T .

Easypad touchscreen
1 S21
2 1
3
1 2 3
T ➊ T ➊
When the axis initialization is completed, the result is displayed in selec-

tion field 2:
0000 = Initializiation OK
EEEE = Initialization error
The initialization can be restarted at any time by pressing the T

key T T

Easypad touchscreen
1 S21
2 0000 1 _______0000____
3
1 2 3
T
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 144 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S021.3: Function test of TSA sensor adjustment
5.16.2 S021: Test step 3
båÖäáëÜ
XGPlus:Easypad touchscreen
1 - S021 +
2 - 3 +
➊
3
Selection fields 1 and 2 are blank.
1 S21
2 3
3
5.16
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 145
Axis initialization of the TSA sensor 2. Start the automatic axis initialization of the TSA sensor holder by pressing
holder the T key T .
1 S21
2 3
3
T ➊
When the axis initialization is completed, the result is displayed in selec-
tion field 2:
0000 = Initializiation OK
EEEE = Initialization error
The initialization can be restarted at any time by pressing the T key T
1 S21
2 0000 3
3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 146 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Moving the TSA sensor holder 3. Move the TSA sensor holder by alternately pressing
Press Patient symbol keys a and d.
When key P1 is pressed, the TSA sensor holder moves to the
båÖäáëÜ
moves to the PAN/CEPH position ; to the TSA position when the P4 key is
1 S21
2 3
3 a d
➊
T
pressed.
When the action is completed, the result is displayed in selection field 2:
0000 = action OK
EEEE = action error
XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen
1 S21
2 0000 3
3
5.16
Quitting the service routine For XGPlus:

arrow key .
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 147
S032: Test function for sensor in PAN slot

Test function for sensor in PAN slot
Function S032 Test function for sensor in PAN slot
Test step 10 Test function for sensor in PAN slot
XGPlus / 3Dready: XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:Multipad

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S032 + ➊
2 S032_______10___
3
1 2 3
5.17.1 S032: Test step 10

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S032 + S32
2 - 10 + ➊
S032_______10___
3
1 2 3
After test step 10 is selected, selection field 1 displays the current selection
for synchronized readout sequence.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 148 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S032.10: Test function for sensor in PAN slot
Selecting the synchronized readout 2. Select the mode of the desired synchronized readout sequence using the
sequence arrow keys of selection field 1.
HSIPan3x3 = sensor in the PAN mode with synchronized readout
båÖäáëÜ
sequence 3x3 clocked out
HSIPan4x4 = sensor in the PAN mode with synchronized readout
HSITSA4x4 = sensor in the TSA mode with synchronized readout

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - HSIPan3x3 + ➊
2 10
HSIPAN3X3______
3
1 2 3
T
After the mode for the synchronized readout sequence has been selected the
Test key T (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the Test key T
i NOTE
If the R key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) ini-
tially lights up, the sensor holder must be moved to the corresponding position
first. To do this, press the R key R R
i NOTE
Starting synchronized readout The sensor must be plugged in for at least 15 seconds before starting the syn-
sequence chronized readout sequence.
5.17
3. Start the synchronized readout sequence with the Test key T T .
CAUTION
The sensor must not be removed while the synchronized readout sequence is
active!
Otherwise the electronics may be damaged.

Easypad touchscreen
1 Take Image... S32

2 10
TAKE_IMAGE_____
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 149
Explanations on the test procedure:
The synchronized readout sequence of the sensor is performed with real data
transmissions and CAN bus commands.
The image data are analyzed in the memory of the DX11.
V500 V502 V501 It is possible to evaluate the LEDs on DX1 (IMAGE; PAN; CEPH) during the
Pan Ceph Image synchronized readout sequence.
IMAGE-LED V501:
DX1 Stand By mode = LED dark

Active synchronized readout sequence = LED lights up
CEPH-LED V502:
Sensor in the Ceph slot/Stand By mode = LED lights up

No sensor in the Ceph slot/Stand By mode = LED dark
Sensor in the Ceph slot/active synchronized readout sequence=LED dark
PAN-LED V500:
Sensor in the Pan slot/Stand By mode = LED lights up

No sensor in the Pan slot/Stand By mode = LED dark
Sensor in the Pan slot/active synchronized readout sequence=LED dark
In addition, "wiggle tests" of cables or ring rotation tests can also be per-
formed.
XGPlus / 3Dready: Easypad touchscreen The result of the synchronized readout sequence is displayed:
Image Size = total size of the image
Row Length = image height in pixels
HSI-State
Image Size : NOK : 26320

No. of Rows = Number of image rows
Row Length : OK : 1314
No. of Rows : NOK : 10 CRC Errors = Number of detected CRC errors during the
CRC Errors : NOK : 10 Synchronized readout sequence
Exp.-ThermTMO : NOK : 1
Exp.-ThermCRC : OK : 0 65 Exp.-Therm TMO = Exposure interrupted by a timeout
while reading image data.
Exp.-Therm CRC = Exposure interrupted by an excess
number of CRC errors.
HSI-State
Image Size : OK : 8134984

No. of Rows : OK : 1859
CRC Errors : OK : 0
Exp.-ThermTMO : OK : 0
Exp.-ThermCRC : OK : 0 65
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 150 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad initially shows the HSI-STATE.
Using the arrow keys in selection field 1, select the desired
➊ parameters, e.g. IMAGE SIZE and confirm your selection by pressing the
båÖäáëÜ
memory key .
IMAGE SIZE______
1 2 3
The result of the synchronized readout sequence for the selected parameter
➊ is displayed.
OK : 8134984______ Service key , you can return to the parameter selection
menu.
1 2 3

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.17
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 151
S033: Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS
5.18 Service routine S033 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)

Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS
Function S033 Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS
Test step 10 Test of the CEPH image path without SIDEXIS

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S033 + ➊
2 S033_______10___
3
1 2 3
5.18.1 S033: Test step 10


Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S033 + S33
2 - 10 + ➊
S033_______10___
3
1 2 3
After test step 10 is selected, selection field 1 displays the current selection
for the synchronized readout sequence.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 152 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S033.10: Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS
Selecting the synchronized readout 2. Select the mode of the desired synchronized readout sequence using the
sequence arrow keys of selection field 1.
HSIC4x4 = Sensor in CEPH mode with synchronized readout
båÖäáëÜ
sequence 4x4
clocked out without CEPH scan
HSIC4x4M = Sensor in CEPH mode with synchronized readout
sequence 4x4
clocked out with CEPH scan

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - HSC4x4 + ➊
2 10
HSIC4X4_________
3
1 2 3
T
After the mode for the synchronized readout sequence has been selected the
Test key T (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the Test key T (XG 5)
lights up.
i NOTE
If the R key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the R key (XG 5) initially lights
up, the sensor holder must be moved to the corresponding position first. To do
this, press the R key R R
Starting the synchronized readout 3. Start the synchronized readout sequence with the Test key T T .
sequence

Easypad touchscreen
5.18
1 Take Image... S33
2 10
TAKE_IMAGE_____
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 153
XGPlus / 3Dready: Easypad touchscreen The result of the synchronized readout sequence is displayed:
Image Size = total size of the image
Row Length = image height in pixels
HSI-State
Image Size : NOK : 26320

No. of Rows = Number of image rows
No. of Rows : NOK : 10 CRC Errors = Number of detected CRC errors during the
CRC Errors : NOK : 10 Synchronized readout sequence
Exp.-ThermTMO : NOK : 1
Exp.-ThermCRC : OK : 0 65 Exp.-Therm TMO = Exposure interrupted by a timeout
while reading image data.
Exp.-Therm CRC = Exposure interrupted by an excess
number of CRC errors.
HSI-State
Image Size : OK : 8134984

No. of Rows : OK : 1859
CRC Errors : OK : 0
Exp.-ThermTMO : OK : 0
Exp.-ThermCRC : OK : 0 65
XG 5: Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad initially shows the HSI-STATE.
Using the arrow keys in selection field 1, select the desired
➊ parameters, e.g. IMAGE SIZE and confirm your selection by pressing the
memory key .
IMAGE SIZE______
1 2 3
The result of the synchronized readout sequence for the selected parameter
➊ is displayed.
OK : 8134984______ Service key , you can return to the parameter selection
menu.
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 154 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
båÖäáëÜ
arrow key .
For XG 5:
5.18
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 155
S034: Service for the digital cephalometer

Service for the digital cephalometer
Function S034 Service for the digital cephalometer
Test step 4 Display/calibrate center position of Ceph scan sensor axis
Test step 5 Display/calibrate center position of Ceph scan secondary diaphragm axis
Test step 6 Moving to the Ceph packing position
Test step 7 Display/change ring type

Test step 8 User-specific determination of the shadowing limit for C1 and C2

(only XGPlus full version
/ 3Dready)
Test step 9 User-specific determination of the shadowing limit for C3 and C3F
(only XGPlus full version
/ 3Dready)

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S034 + ➊
2 - 1 + S034_______1____
3
1 2 3
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 156 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S034.4: Display/calibrate center position of Ceph scan sensor axis
5.19.1 S034: Test step 4
Remove the cover from the cephalometer (see also section 1.13).
båÖäáëÜ

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S034 + S34
2 - 4 + ➊
S034_______4____
3
1 2 3
After test step 4 is selected, the current offset value for the center position of
the ceph scan sensor axis is displayed in selection field 1.
5.19
Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 1500 S34
2 4 ____1500________
3
1 2 3
T R
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 157
Switching the test mode ON 2. Press the T key T T to switch the test mode on.
i NOTE
In the test mode, travel to the center position of the ceph scan sensor axis is
initially performed without offsets. The T key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED
above the T key (XG5) lights up and displays the test mode.
Determining the offset values 3. Move the sensor to its front position by pressing the R key R R .
i NOTE
The sensor can always be moved back and forth between its front and center
positions with the R key.
4. Move the sensor to its center position by pressing the R key R R .
Wall side 5. Measure distances L2 and L1 with a slide gage.
Wall side
L1 L1
L2 L2
Sensor side
Room side
Ceph arm mounted Ceph arm mounted
Room side
6. Calculate the offset value according to the following formula:
Ceph arm on left side:

( L2 – L1 ) ÷ 2 = Offsetwert
Ceph arm on right side:

59 38 399 D3352
5 – 158 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Entering the offset value 7. Select an offset value using the arrow keys of selection field 1.
i NOTE
båÖäáëÜ
The offset value can have a positive or a negative sign.

– A positive offset value shifts the sensor toward the room center.
– A negative offset value shifts the sensor toward the wall.
Ceph arm mounted on right side:

– A positive offset value shifts the sensor toward the wall.
– A negative offset value shifts the sensor toward the room center.
Since the offset value can be set only in large steps of 500 (500 = 0.5 mm), you
should set a value which comes as close as possible to the one you calculat-
ed.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 1500 + ➊
2 4 ____1500________
3
1 2 3
T R
8. To save the offset value, first press the memory key (R key (XG-
Plus / 3Dready) or the LED above the R key (XG 5) lights up) and then the R
key R R .
5.19
Easypad touchscreen
1 - 1500 + S34
2 4 ____1500________
3
1 2 3
➊
R
➊
R
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 159
Checking the new center position of the 9. Quit the test mode by pressing the T key T T .
ceph scan (sensor axis)
i NOTE
The offset settings are taken into account in normal operation.
10. Move the sensor to its reference position by pressing the R key R R .
i NOTE
The sensor can always be moved back and forth between its front and center
positions with the R key.
11. Move the sensor to its center position by pressing the R key R R .
12. Measure distances L1 and L2 with a slide gage and calculate the remain-
ing offset as described on page 5-158.
– If the offset is still > ± 0.5 mm, the offset value must be corrected again.
Repeat the service routine from item 2.
– If the offset is < ± 0.5 mm, the calibration is OK.
Continue with service routine S034.5.

arrow key .
For XG 5:
field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 160 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S034.5: Display/calibrate center position of Ceph scan secondary diaphragm axis
5.19.2 S034: Test step 5
båÖäáëÜ

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S034 + S34
2 - 5 + ➊
S034_______5____
3
1 2 3
After test step 5 is selected, the current offset value for the center position of
the ceph scan secondary diaphragm axis is displayed in selection field 1.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 1500 S34
2 5 ____1500________
3
1 2 3
T R
5.19
Switching the test mode ON 2. Press the T key T T to switch the test mode on.
i NOTE
In the test mode, travel to the center position of the ceph scan secondary dia-
phragm axis is initially performed without offsets. The T key (XGPlus / 3Dready)
or the LED above the T key (XG5) lights up and displays the test mode.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 161
Determining the offset values 3. Move the secondary diaphragm to its front position by pressing the R
key R R .
i NOTE
The secondary diaphragm can always be moved back and forth between its
front and center positions with the R key.
4. Move the secondary diaphragm to its center position by pressing the R

key R R .
5. Measure distances L2 and L1 with a slide gage.
Wall side
Wall side
L1 L1
L2 L2
Secondary diaphragm
Ceph arm mounted Ceph arm mounted
Room side
Room side
6. Calculate the offset value according to the following formula:

Ceph arm on right side:

59 38 399 D3352
5 – 162 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Entering the offset value 7. Select an offset value using the arrow keys of selection field 1.
i NOTE
båÖäáëÜ
The offset value can have a positive or a negative sign.

– A positive offset value shifts the secondary diaphragm toward the room cen-
ter.
– A negative offset value shifts the secondary diaphragm toward the wall.
Ceph arm mounted on right side:

– A positive offset value shifts the secondary diaphragm toward the wall.
– A negative offset value shifts the secondary diaphragm toward the room
center.
Since the offset value can be set only in large steps of 500 (500 = 0.5 mm), you
should set a value which comes as close as possible to the one you calculat-
ed.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - 1500 + ➊
2 ____1500________
3
1 2 3
T R
8. To save the offset value, first press the memory key (R key (XG-
Plus / 3Dready) or the LED above the R key (XG 5) lights up) and then the R
key R R .
5.19
Easypad touchscreen
1 - 1500 +
2 ____1500________
3
1 2 3
➊
R
➊
R
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 163
Checking the new center position of the 9. Quit the test mode by pressing the T key T T .
ceph scan (secondary diaphragm axis)
i NOTE
The offset settings are taken into account in normal operation.
10. Move the secondary diaphragm to its reference position by pressing the R
key R R .
i NOTE
The secondary diaphragm can always be moved back and forth between its
front and center positions with the R key.
11. Move the secondary diaphragm to its center position by pressing the R
key R R .
12. Measure distances L1 and L2 with a slide gage and calculate the remain-
ing offset as described on page 5-162.
– If the offset is still > ± 0.5 mm, the offset value must be corrected again.
Repeat the service routine from item 2.
– If the offset is < ± 0.5 mm, the calibration is OK.
Reattach the ceph cover.

arrow key .
For XG 5:
field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 164 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S034.6: Moving to the Ceph packing position
båÖäáëÜ

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S034 + S34
2 - 6 + ➊
S034_______6____
3
1 2 3
After the test step is started, an inactive progress indicator is displayed in

selection field 1. Selection field 2 shows the characters FFFF.

Easypad touchscreen
1 S34
2 FFFF 6 _______FFFF____
3
1 2 3
T
5.19
Moving to the Ceph packing position 2. Press the T key T T .
The cephalometer moves to the packing position. The procedure is visu-
alized by an active progress indicator in selection field 1. Once the proce-
dure is completed, the characters 0000 appear in selection field 2.

Easypad touchscreen
1 - + S34
2 6
3
1 2 3
T ➊ T ➊
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 165
S034.6: Moving to the Ceph packing position
When the cephalometer has reached its packing position, 0000 is displayed
in selection field 2.

Easypad touchscreen
1 S34
2 0000 6 _______0000____
3
1 2 3
T

arrow key .
For XG 5:
field 3.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 166 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S034.7: Display/change ring type
båÖäáëÜ
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - S034 + S34
2 - 7 + ➊
3
2. Select the ring type using the arrow keys of selection field 1:
01 = old ring type = PAN unit serial numbers up to 20056

PAN/CEPH units up to serial number 40104
02 = new ring type = PAN units with serial no. 20056 and higher
PAN/CEPH units with serial no. 40104 and higher
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1
S34
2 - 01 + ➊
3
5.19
R
3. To save the setting, first press the memory key (R key lights up)
and then press the R key R R .
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 S34
2 - 01 + 7
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 167
S034.8: Determining shadowing limit C1 and C2
arrow key .
5.19.5 S034: Test step 8 )(only for XGPlus full version /

3Dready)
For ceph programs C1 and C2, the default setting of the shadowing limit can
be assigned an individual offset for XGPlus full version / 3Dreadydevices. In this
way the shadowing can be shifted within certain limits.
For C1 / C2
+30,000μm
Shadowing limit
-15,000μm
The offset must be determined by reference to an existing exposure. Starting

from the default setting, an offset can be
selected and saved within a range of +30,000 μm to -15,000μm.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 168 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S034.8: Determining shadowing limit C1 and C2
båÖäáëÜ
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - S034 + S34
2 - 8 + ➊
3
2. Select the desired offset value using the arrow keys in selection field 1
(step width = 500, offset value = 1000 corresponds to a 1 mm shift of the
shadowing limit).
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1
- 5,500 + ➊
2 8
5.19
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - 5,500 + S34
2 8
4. Take a C1 or C2 exposure to check the effectiveness of the setting (see

operating instructions).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 169
S034.9: Determining the shadowing limit for C3 and C3F
arrow key .
5.19.6 S034: Test step 9(only for XGPlus full version /

3Dready)
For ceph programs C3 and C3F, the default setting of the shadowing limit can
be assigned an individual offset for XGPlus full version / 3Dreadydevices. In this
way the shadowing can be shifted within certain limits.
For C3 and C3F
+15,000μm
Shadowing limit
-30,000μm
The offset must be determined by reference to an existing exposure. Starting

from the default setting, an offset can be
selected and saved within a range of +15,000 μm to -30,000μm.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 170 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
båÖäáëÜ
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - S034 + S34
2 - 9 + ➊
3
2. Select the desired offset value using the arrow keys in selection field 1
(step width = 500, offset value = 1000 corresponds to a 1 mm shift of the
shadowing limit).
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1
- -2500 + ➊
2 9
5.19
XGPlus / 3Dready:
Easypad touchscreen
1 - -2500 + S34
2 8
4. Take a C3 or C3F exposure to check the effectiveness of the setting (see

operating instructions).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 171
arrow key .
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 172 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S037: Network service

Network service
båÖäáëÜ
Function S037 Network service
Test step 1 Showing the network data
Test step 2 Setting the default IP address, default gateway address and default Security access
subnet mask
Test step 3 Toggling the DHCP and fixed address boot mode (DEFAULT/STATIC) Security access
Test step 4 Manual input of IP address, default gateway address and subnet mask Security access
Selecting service routine S037 Use the arrow keys to select service routine S037.

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S037 + ➊
2 - 1 + S037_______1____
3
1 2 3
5.20
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 173
S037.1: Displaying the network data
5.20.1 S037: Test step 1

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S037 +
S037_______1_____
2 - 1 +
➊
3
1 2 3
The IP address of the unit is displayed.

Easypad touchscreen
1 192.168.15.240 S37
2 DEFAULT 1 X192.168.15.240_
3 a
1 2 3

DEFAULT or STATIC or is DHCP is displayed in selection field 2.
DEFAULT = fixed address, factory setting

STATIC = fixed address, changed setting
DHCP = automatic address allocation
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
The first digit in the single-line display of the Multipad denotes DEFAULT or
STATIC.
X = DEFAULT= fixed address, factory setting

S = STATIC = fixed address, changed setting
D = DHCP = automatic address allocation
The patient symbol key a (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the
Patient symbol key a (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 174 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S037.1: Displaying the network data
Displaying the network data 2. You can display different network data in selection field 1 by pressing Pa-
tient symbol keys a, b, and c.
a b c d
båÖäáëÜ
a : Display of the IP address
XG Plus ready
/ 3D
b : Display of the standard gateway
c : Display of the subnet mask
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE
The currently selected patient symbol key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED
above the selected patient symbol key (XG 5/3/3 PPE) is lit.

DEFAULT or STATIC or is DHCP is displayed in selection field 2.
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
The first digit in the single-line display of the Multipad denotes DEFAULT or
STATIC.
X = DEFAULT = fixed address, factory setting

S = STATIC = fixed address, changed setting
D = DHCP = automatic address allocation
i NOTE
If all network data is set to DEFAULT , the system is in UDP boot mode.

5.20
arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 175
S037.2: Setting the default IP address, default gateway address and default subnet mask
5.20.2 S037: Test step 2
your selection by pressing the service key .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S037 + S37
S037_______2____
2 - 2 +
➊
3
1 2 3
main routine (37) with the arrow keys of selection field 2 and then press-
ing the Service key .

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1
__________37____
2 - 37 +
➊
3
1 2 3
After test step 2 is selected, the network data will be displayed as in test
step 1. In addition, the memory key and the R key R R are al-
so displayed. The memory key is lit.
XGPlus / 3Dready: XG 5 / 3: Multipad

Easypad touchscreen
1 192.168.15.178 S37
2 STATIC 2 S192.168.15.178__
3
1 2 3
R
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 176 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Checking the network data 3. Check the network data still in the system before resetting.
a b c
båÖäáëÜ
XGPlus / 3Dready c : Display of the subnet mask
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE The currently selected patient symbol key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED
above the selected patient symbol key (XG 5/3/3 PPE) is lit.
Resetting the network data 4. To reset the network data, first press the
Memory key (R key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the R
i NOTE
The network data cannot be reset selectively. All network data are reset.

Easypad touchscreen
1 - 192.168.15.178 + S37
2 - STATIC + 2 S192.168.15.178__
3
1 2 3
➊
R
➊
R
The default network data is displayed. To switch between the display of

the different network data, proceed as in test step 1.
5.20
i NOTE
It is possible to reset the network address to the default value only in the fixed
address boot mode (no DHCP).

Easypad touchscreen
1 - 192.168.15.178 + S37
2 - DEFAULT + 2 X192.168.15.178__
3
1 2 3
R
5. Switch the unit off and then on again.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 177

arrow key .
ForXG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 178 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
S037.3: Toggling the DHCP and fixed address boot mode (DEFAULT/STATIC)
5.20.3 S037: Test step 3
båÖäáëÜ

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S037 +
S037_______3_____
2 - 3 +
➊
3
1 2 3

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1
__________37____
2 - 37 +
➊
3
1 2 3
5.20
The current boot mode of the unit is displayed in selection field 1.

Easypad touchscreen
1 - STATIC + S37
2 3 _STATIC__________
3
1 2 3
R
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 179
Selecting the boot mode 3. Using the arrow keys in selection field 1, select the desired
Boot mode DHCP or fixed address (STATIC).

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - DHCP + ➊
2 3 _DHCP__________
3
1 2 3
R
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 180 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Saving the boot mode 4. To save the boot mode, first press the
Memory key (R key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the R key
båÖäáëÜ
Easypad touchscreen
1 - DHCP + S37
2 3 ____DHCP________
3
1 2 3
➊
R
➊
R
i NOTE
If the system is reset to the STATIC mode, the network addresses will be reset
to the factory setting.

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
5.20
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 181
S037.4: Manual input of IP address, default gateway address and subnet mask
5.20.4 S037: Test step 4
i NOTE
Performance of this service routine is not possible in the DHCP mode (T key
is blocked).

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1 - S037 + S37
S037_______4____
2 - 4 +
➊
3
1 2 3

Easypad touchscreen
➊
1
2 - 37 + ➊
__________37____
3
1 2 3
The IP address of the unit is displayed in selection field 1.
Only for XGPlus / 3Dready:

Selection field 2 shows the boot mode as DEFAULT or STATIC or DHCP.
DEFAULT = fixed address, factory setting

STATIC = fixed address, changed setting
DHCP = automatic address allocation
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 182 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

Easypad touchscreen
båÖäáëÜ
1 192.168.15.240 S37
2 DEFAULT 4 X192.168.15.240_
3
1 2 3
T
Selecting / displaying the network data 3. To select the network data you would like to edit, press patient symbol key
a, b or c:
a b c d

XGPlus / 3Dready
c : Display of the subnet mask
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE
Easypad touchscreen
1 192.168.15.240 S37
2 DEFAULT 4 X192.168.15.240__
3
1 2 3
T
➊
➊
5.20
The currently selected patient symbol key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED
above the selected patient symbol key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) is lit.
Selecting the network data 4. To change the selected parameter, first press the T key T T .

Easypad touchscreen
1 192.168.15.240 S37
2 DEFAULT 4 X192.168.15.240__
3
1 2 3
T
T ➊
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 183
Selecting the octet 5. Select the desired octet 1-4 with

Patient symbol keys a-d :
a b c d
a: Octet B1
XG Plus ready
/ 3D b: Octet B2
c: Octet B3
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE d: Octet B4
Example:
1 2 3 (Digit 1 - 3 of octet)
192.168.015.178
B1 B2 B3 B4 (Octets 1 - 4)

Easypad touchscreen
1 - Digit No. 3 + S37
2 - 2 + 4 __DIG:_3___2____
3
1 2 3
T R
➊
➊
The currently selected patient symbol key is lit.
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 184 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Selecting digits 6. Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select the desired
digit within the octet (see step 5).
båÖäáëÜ
NOTE
The digits always refer to the selected octet only. Reprogramming the last digit
is shown here as an example.

Easypad touchscreen
192.168.015.178
➊
Octet 3, digit 12, with the
value 8
1 - Digit No. 12 + ➊
2 - 8 + 4 __DIG:12___8____
3
1 2 3
T R
Selection field 2 shows the value of the selected digit.
Changing the value under the digit 7. To change the value under the digit, use the arrow keys of selection field 2.

Easypad touchscreen
192.168.015.179
➊
Octet 3, digit 12, with the 1 - Digit No. 12 + S37
value 9
2 - 9 + ➊ __DIG:12___9____
3
1 2 3
5.20
T R
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 5 – 185
Saving the changes 8. To save the changes, first press the

Memory key (R key (XGPlus / 3Dready) or the LED above the R key

Easypad touchscreen
1 - Digit No. 12 + S37

2 - 9 + 4 __DIG:12___9____
3
1 2 3
T R
➊
➊
R

Easypad touchscreen
1 192.168.15.179 S37
2 4 S192.168.15.179___
3
1 2 3

arrow key .
For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
59 38 399 D3352
5 – 186 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
ORTHOPHOS XG
6 Repair
Tab 6
Contents
6.1 Safety check............................................................6 – 6
6.2 Replacing the height adjustment motor (M1_4)/spindle 6

–7
6.2.1 Preparing for motor replacement.......................... 6 – 7
6.2.2 Moving the slide manually .................................... 6 – 7
6.2.3 Removing board DX32 ....................................... 6 – 11
6.2.4 Replacing the height adjustment motor/spindle . 6 – 14
6.2.5 Laying cables when replacing the height
adjustment motor................................................ 6 – 16
6.3 Replacing the ring motor (M1_3)...........................6 – 19

6.3.1 Laying cables when replacing the ring motor ..... 6 – 21
6.4 Replacing the PAN actuators (M1_1/2).................6 – 22

6.4.1 Laying cables when replacing actuators
(M1_1/2) ............................................................. 6 – 23
6.5 Replace headrest ..................................................6 – 24

6.5.1 Laying cables when replacing the headrests ..... 6 – 25

Or the Multipad for XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE) .....................6 – 26
6.7 Replacing the control panel...................................6 – 29

6.7.1 Laying cables when replacing the control panel. 6 – 30
6.8 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (PAN) ..6 – 31
6.9 Replacing/adjusting the MS light localizer laser

module (PAN)........................................................6 – 33
6.10 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (Ceph) .6 – 35

(for XGPlus and XG 5, if present) ...........................6 – 37
6.12 Replacing the bite block holder .............................6 – 38

6.12.1 For units without an occlusal bite block.............. 6 – 38
6.12.2 For XGPlus / 3Dready devices with occlusal
bite block ............................................................ 6 – 39
6.12.3 Replacing silicone rings...................................... 6 – 40
59 38 399 D3352
6–2 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Register 6

(for XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5) ..................................6 – 41
6.13.1 Cables and connectors for replacement
of the motor-driven diaphragm unit .................... 6 – 44
6.14 Replacing the fixed diagram (for XG 3 / 3 PPE)....6 – 45
6.15 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly.......................6 – 48

6.15.1 Cables and connectors for replacement
of the tube assembly .......................................... 6 – 50
6.16 Replacing the fan (tube assembly 1.0)..................6 – 53
6.17 Replacing the fan (tube assembly 2.0)..................6 – 54
6.18 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder...............6 – 56

6.18.1 Laying cables when replacing the PAN
sensor holder...................................................... 6 – 58
6.19 Replacing the ceph sensor holder.........................6 – 60
6.20 Replace sensor .....................................................6 – 61
6.21 Replacing the light barriers....................................6 – 62

6.21.1 Replacing light barrier V1_3:
For hardware device level < AG ......................... 6 – 64
6.22 Replacing circuit boards ........................................6 – 73

6.22.1 Important notes about replacing boards............. 6 – 73
6.22.2 Replace board DX1 ............................................ 6 – 75
6.22.3 Replace board DX11 .......................................... 6 – 76
6.22.4 Measures following replacement of boards........ 6 – 77
6.22.5 Replacing a DX11 .............................................. 6 – 81
6.22.6 Replacing an X-ray tube assembly incl. DX6 ..... 6 – 92
6.22.7 Check jumper on circuit board DX42
(replacement of board DX42) ........................... 6 – 100
6.22.8 Jumper position on circuit board DX42 ............ 6 – 100
6.23 Replacing cables .................................................6 – 101

6.23.1 Replacing the fiber-optic cables L5, L6 ............ 6 – 102
6.23.2 Replacing cables (L3, L5, L6, L11, L12, and L15)/
Laying the cable/corrugated tube at the
rotation unit....................................................... 6 – 103
6.23.3 Replacing cable L7 or L8/L108*
(in cable track 2)............................................... 6 – 106
6.23.4 Laying cable L1 and the grounding strap
(in cable track 1)............................................... 6 – 108
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6–3
Tab 6
59 38 399 D3352
6–4 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6
6 Repair
båÖäáëÜ
DANGER
wait at least 1 minute, or 4 minutes if disconnecting the tube assembly
(cable L3), before starting the repair or taking off a cover panel!
When replacing parts involving the power connection, the power switch,
board DX32, or the X-ray tube assembly, disconnect the unit from the
junction box of the building installation.
CAUTION
dling
Touch a ground point to discharge static electricity

before touching any boards.
CAUTION
Modifications to this system which might affect the safety of the system owner,
patients or other persons are prohibited by law! For reasons of product safety,
this product may be operated only with original Sirona accessories or
third-party accessories expressly approved by Sirona. The user is responsible
for any damage resulting from the use of non-approved accessories.
i NOTE
Open the PAN and CEPH RESET ADJUSTMENT menus in SIDEXIS and note
the old adjustment values before you begin replacing boards or modules
(which contain boards).
i NOTE
After replacing boards or modules containing boards, check to make sure that
the software version of the module corresponds to the current software status
of the system. The software version for the modules can...
for XGPlus / 3Dready:

be accessed through service routine S008.2 or the DETAILS. You can also
check the info screen in advance to determine whether the current software
constellation is permissible. If this is not the case, the version number of the
entire software is labeled with an asterisk (e.g. V02.20*)
for XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
be accessed through service routine S008.2 or the DETAILS.
Perform a software update in case of software incompatibilities (see Section

1.7).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6–5
6.1 Safety check Tab 6
CAUTION
When replacing modules, be sure to note which ones contain boards and fol-
low the instructions in section "Measures following replacement of boards"
starting on page 6-77. Also check whether the current ORTHOPHOS XG CD
or the SIRONA dealer page contains any additional, up-to-date information on
module replacement.
CAUTION
Be sure to observe the information on action required following
module replacement. You will find this information at the end of each set of re-
pair instructions.
6.1 Safety check

A protective ground wire test and a leakage current test must be performed
prior to the installation or the hand-over of the unit as well as after repair work.
See sections "7.14 Checking the protective ground wires " and "7.15 Check-
ing the unit leakage current ".
59 38 399 D3352
6–6 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.2 Replacing the height adjustment motor (M1_4)/spindle
6.2 Replacing the height adjustment motor

(M1_4)/spindle
båÖäáëÜ
6.2.1 Preparing for motor replacement
Remove the sensor and store it in a safe place.
Switch the unit ON.
Moving the unit up and removing the Use the UP/DOWN keys on the Easypad (XGPlus / 3Dready) or Multipad
profile covers (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) to move the slide upward and remove the cover parts
(see section 1.13):
– Intermediate piece
– Profile covers, top and bottom
i NOTE
Tip: While loosening the screws, press the top profile cover down towards the
unit and allow it to slide down once the screws are loose.
Switch the unit OFF again.
i NOTE
If the height adjustment motor is inoperative, you can also move the slide man-
ually.
6.2.2 Moving the slide manually
CAUTION
If the slide can no longer be moved electrically, it must be moved mechanically.
You must lock the slide in position to prevent the risk of the carriage plummet-
ing downward during service work if the self-locking function does not fully en-
gage.
Sirona recommends using the the height adjustment service kit,

REF. 62 57 518, for this purpose.
This service kit is used to prevent automatic downward movement of the slide
during service by fixing the slide and the spindle holder.
The clamp A is clamped tightly underneath the slide. The locking pin B is used
to secure the spindle holder against twisting.
6.2
It must be ensured that no one is located underneath the ring arm during the
repair.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6–7
6.2 Replacing the height adjustment motor (M1_4)/spindle Tab 6
1. 2. C
C
AA
3. 4.
B
E
Using the height adjustment service kit, Moving the slide

REF. 62 57 518
1. Insert the clamp through the opening A in the stand and rotate it 90°.
Tighten the nut securely.
2. Loosen the two screws C and remove the cover D.
3. Remove the 1st Screw E on the spindle holder F.
4. Insert the locking pin B into this opening.
Now remove the 2nd Screw E on the spindle holder.
Attach the socket wrench (SW19) to the spindle. Remove the locking pin
and move the slide up to the required height by turning the socket wrench.
i NOTE
CW rotation of spindle = slide moves upward
CCW rotation of spindle = slide moves downward
Reinsert the locking pin.
Locking the slide
Now move the clamp A directly underneath the slide.
i NOTE
The slide is now locked in this position for further repair work.
59 38 399 D3352
6–8 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
1. C 2.
C E
båÖäáëÜ
D
3.
If the height adjustment service kit is Moving the slide

not available
1. Loosen the two screws C and remove the cover D.
2. Loosen the first of the two screws E on the spindle holder F.
3. Attach the socket wrench (SW19) to the spindle. Hold the spindle tight
while unscrewing the second of the two screws E.
CAUTION
If it becomes necessary to readjust the socket wrench, the spindle holder must
be secured against turning, e.g. with a screw.
4. Turn the spindle holder with a socket wrench (19mm A/F) to move the
slide to the required height.
i NOTE
CW rotation of spindle = slide moves upward
CCW rotation of spindle = slide moves downward
6.2
Once the slide has reached the required nominal position, lock it in place
by reinserting the two screws E.
i NOTE
Make sure that the slide is locked in this position when replacing the height ad-
justment motor.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6–9
G
3. H
4.
DX41*
approx. 560 mm
approx. 22’’
G
H
J
* Board DX41 is omitted in unit

HW version BA and higher.
Securing the slide position Make a mark at the position of the upper limit stop.
5. Loosen nut G on upper profile clamp H and remove upper limit stop J from
the stand.
6. Install limit stop J above the lower limit stop so that there is a distance of
approx. 560 mm (22’’)between the lower edge of the unit and the lower
edge of the limit stop.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 10 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Removing the remaining covers Remove the top cover and pull connector X607 off board DX1.
Now remove the following cover parts:
– Arm cover, top
båÖäáëÜ
– Slide cover, top rear
– Slide cover, bottom rear
– Slide cover, front
Note: FH laser cable (PAN)!
i NOTE
To prevent scratches, also remove the covers of the slide table and the drawer.
6.2.3 Removing board DX32

Removing board DX32
Tip: In order to facilitate removal of board DX32, the bottom edge of the
slide (H) should be roughly flush with the upper bracket in the stand.
1. Unscrew the bracket (C) located in front of board DX32.
2. Remove the cable ties (A) from cable L2.
6.2
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 11
3. Loosen all screws (B) on the left-hand side of the protecting covers
(E).
L3
F
H
DX32
L3
X1
E X2
L2
X100
4. Unscrew the remaining screws from the protecting covers (E).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 12 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
5. Remove the cover plates (E) (bottom and top) from the connection
box (F) of board DX32.
6. Cable L3 can remain on the top cover plate (E) (remove the shield ter-
båÖäáëÜ
minal if necessary).
Tip: The cover plate can simply be folded to the side and stored lat-
erally in the stand.
7. Pull connector X2 off board DX32 and detach the protective ground
wire.
8. Detach cable L2 from terminal X100 and pull it out of connection box
(F) toward the bottom.
9. Pull connector X1 off board DX32.
10. Loosen the two screws on the left-hand side (G).
11. Loosen the two screws on the right-hand side (I) and remove the con-
nection box including board DX32.
6.2
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 13
6.2.4 Replacing the height adjustment

motor/spindle
1. K 2.
L
D
3. N
Removing the spindle Loosen both screws E on the spindle holder F if this has not already been
done (see page 6-7).
1. Turn spindle holder D (with an 18 mm A/F socket wrench) CCW until the
motor comes to rest on the limit stop and spindle L has been turned
all the way out of the motor. Remove the
straight pin K.
Remove spindle L.
i NOTE
Tip: First pull spindle L downward along the motor, and then diagonally up-
ward and out of the unit.
Removing the defective motor Unplug connector X402 of the motor cable from board DX1, detach the
motor cable from the cable harness, and carefully pull it out of the stand.
2. Loosen the screws M. Remove the motor while carefully pulling the motor
cable out of the stand.
Inserting the dampers 3. Attach the new rubber pads to the new motor.
They are included in the scope of supply of the HA motor.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 14 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Installing the new motor Install the height adjustment motor in the reverse order of removal. Please
observe the following:
båÖäáëÜ
i NOTE
When fastening the motor, make sure that all three screws are tightened uni-
formly and protrude approx. 3 mm out of the nut.
i NOTE
Don't forget to plug all connectors and cables back in again in their original
positions and to reattach all cable ties and clamps
(see section "Laying cables when replacing the height adjustment motor" on
page 6-16).
Make sure that none of the cables are crushed by the cover plates
of the DX32 connection box.
Final work With the height adjustment service kit
After reinstalling the spindle, screw the first of the two screws E back into
the spindle holder.
Then remove the locking pin and screw in the second of the two screws E.
Attach the cover D.
Remove the clamp A.
Only then should you check the travel function of the slide.
Without the height adjustment service kit
Attach the spindle holder F with the two screws E.

Attach the cover D.
Reattach the upper limit stop to the previously marked position.
Only then should you check the travel function of the slide.
ATTENTION: What to do after replacement?

– After inserting the new spindle above and below the HA motor, grease it
generously with Chesterton 622.
– Check the function of the height adjustment motor with the UP/DOWN keys
on the user interface.
6.2
– Readjust the travel height (see "Service routine S018" on

page 5-121).
For XGPlus / 3Dreadyunits with a unit software version of V02.40 or higher and
an occlusal bite block installed:
– Check the unit creep speed (Requirement:
The occlusal bite block must be plugged in and P1 must be selected) and
correct it
via service routine S018.10 if necessary (see page 5-137).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 15
6.2.5 Laying cables when replacing the height

adjustment motor
Plugging connector X2 (cable L3) into

DX 32
Plug connector X2
(L3) into DX32.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 16 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Connecting cable L2 to terminal X100

(DX32)
båÖäáëÜ
Don't forget! Screw in
the varistor.
i NOTE
Varistor no longer
required after 1st quar-
ter of 2005, since
integrated in line filter
Fasten cable L2 to bottom strain relief with cable tie (on plate DX32).
Cable L2 must be run behind the EMC plate of DX32 without any loops.
6.2
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 17
Motor cable and cable L3
Motor cable
Cable L3
Green mark must lie in

recess.
Plug connector X402

into DX1
Lay cable in cable harness

and secure its position with
cable clamps
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 18 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.3 Replacing the ring motor (M1_3)
6.3 Replacing the ring motor (M1_3)
båÖäáëÜ
D
1.
A
2.
B
3.
6.3
Removing the covers Remove the covers (see section 1.13):

– Top arm
Removing the defective motor 1. Detach the motor cable from the cable harness and pull it off connector
X813 on board DX1.
2. Loosen the four screws A on the ring motor and remove the motor includ-
ing the screws and the serrated washers B.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 19
6.3 Replacing the ring motor (M1_3) Tab 6
Reusing the coupling and flywheel 3. Loosen set screws C and D and remove coupling E and absorber F from
the defective motor.
Attach the coupling and absorber to the new motor and retighten the set
screws.
i NOTE
Seal set screws C and D with Loctite 242
before tightening.
Installing the new motor Insert the new motor including coupling and absorber in the ring.
i NOTE
While inserting the motor, turn it back and forth slightly until the pinion engag-
es in the ring gear.
Use the screws and serrated washers B to screw the new motor onto the
ring securely.
4. Run the motor cable along its original path and plug it back into connector
X813 on board DX1.
(See "Laying cables when replacing the ring motor" on page 6-21).
i NOTE
Don't forget to reattach all cable ties and clamps.
Attaching the covers Reattach the covers.

– Check the function of the ring motor.
– Perform the complete unit adjustment (see chapter 4).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 20 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.3 Replacing the ring motor (M1_3)
6.3.1 Laying cables when replacing the ring motor
båÖäáëÜ
Plug in connector
X813 on DX1.
Lay motor cable in

a single loop (from
top to bottom).
6.3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 21
6.4 Replacing the PAN actuators (M1_1/2) Tab 6
6.4 Replacing the PAN actuators (M1_1/2)
i NOTE
Seal set screws A with Loctite 242 before
fastening them tight.
DX1
A 2.
B
C
3.
M1_1 = right
M1_2 = left
1.
– Top arm
Removing the defective actuator 1. Detach the actuator cable from the cable holders and pull it off connector
X811 (AK1; M1_1) / X812 (AK2; M1_2) on board DX1.
2. Loosen set screws A on the coupling and the two screws B on the actua-
tor holder and pull the actuator including the holder out toward the rear.
Reusing the motor holder (if required) 3. Loosen the four screws C and remove the actuator holder from the defec-
tive motor.
Place the new actuator in the holder and fasten it with the four screws C.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 22 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.4 Replacing the PAN actuators (M1_1/2)
Installing the new actuator Install the actuator in the reverse order of removal.
i NOTE
båÖäáëÜ
Don't forget to plug connectors X811 and X812 back in, lay the cables in their
original positions and reattach all cable ties and clamps (see section "Laying
cables when replacing actuators (M1_1/2)" on page 6-23).

– Check the function of the actuators.
– Perform the complete unit adjustment (see chapter 4).
6.4.1 Laying cables when replacing actuators

(M1_1/2)
Lay cable in a
single
loop and fasten it
with a cable tie.
6.4
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 23
6.5 Replace headrest Tab 6
6.5 Replace headrest
Vertical
Headrest version 1
(due to be replaced by headrest ver-
sion 2 in 2007 and then no longer avail-
able as a spare part)
1. A
Slanted toward
the rear Headrest version 1
Headrest version 2
(will be available (from 2007 on) under
the part no.: 5969741)
Removing the defective headrest 1. While holding the headrest firmly from below, loosen screw A and remove
the defective headrest.
Pull cable L18 off connector X1 on board DX5 (see "Laying cables when
replacing the headrests" on page 6-25).
Installing the new headrest Plug cable L18 into connector X1 on board DX5 of the new headrest.
Position the new headrest in the unit and screw it on loosely with screw A
until a slight stop is perceptible.

Unit software version V02.28.02 or higher is required to operate a unit with
headrest version 2 (as of 2007: delivered as a spare part (5969741)). For this
reason, be sure to perform a software update after replacing the headrest. A
CD-ROM containing software version V02.28.02 is attached to the spare part.
For XGPlus / 3Dreadydevices:

Check the headrest configuration via service routine S017.10 and make sure
that the ID is set to "02" (also see section 5.13.8).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 24 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.5 Replace headrest
Aligning the new headrest Switch the unit ON.

Switch the light localizers ON and align the headrest so that the MS light
beam strikes the center of the forehead support.
båÖäáëÜ
Tighten screw A securely.
i NOTE
Make sure that the headrest does not turn when you tighten the screw.

– Check the function of the headrest using the forehead and temple
support keys on the user interface.
29
– No further action is required.
6.5.1 Laying cables when replacing the headrests
Plug cable L13 into con-

nector X1 (DX5).
6.5
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 25
6.6 Easypad (XGPlus/ 3Dready) or Or the Multipad for XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE) Tab 6

Or the Multipad for XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
* Shielded in unit HW version

*
2. BA and higher (see page 6-30)
L10 (X103)
DX7/DX71
L9 (X102)
Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
Easypad
(XGPlus / 3Dready)
1.
Removing the defective user interface 1. Press into slit A of the housing cover with a screwdriver (do not pry!) and
remove the defective user interface from the control panel.
2. Pull cables L9 and L10 off connectors X102 (L9) and X103 (L10) on
board DX7 / DX71.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 26 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.6 Easypad (XGPlus/ 3Dready) or Or the Multipad for XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE)
3.
båÖäáëÜ
C
B
C
Installing the new user interface 3. Check whether a grounding strap is present on the defective cover.
– If not, (for ORTHOPHOS XG 3 and XG 5) cut off the overhang B of
grounding strap C from the new cover.
– If so, (for ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / 3Dready) insert grounding strap C from
the new cover into the Easypad.
Remove old adhesive strip. Clean the adhesive surface and stick
grounding strap A into place.
Plug the cables of the new user interface into connectors X102 (L9) and
X103 (L10) on board DX7 / DX71 and clip the new user interface onto the
control panel.
6.6
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 27
6.6 Easypad (XGPlus/ 3Dready) or Or the Multipad for XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE) Tab 6

– Since board DX7/DX71 is always replaced along with the user interface,
be sure to also observe the
"6.22.4 Measures following replacement of boards "(see section 6.22.4)
- Check the user interface for correct functioning as well as the

Function of the display elements. (After the unit is switched ON
all of the display elements must light up briefly!)
Only for Easypad (XGPlus/ 3Dready):

– Perform a software update to the current system version
(see section 1.7).
Following replacement of the Easypad, the language set on board DX7

is set to the factory setting by default (00 = German, English,
French, Italian). If the configured unit language set
(displayable via service routine S017.5 or the DETAILS) has
any configuration other than 00, this
configuration will be copied to DX7 by the update.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 28 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.7 Replacing the control panel
6.7 Replacing the control panel
båÖäáëÜ
C 4.
1.
B
2. A
Removing the user interface Remove the user interface (see page 6-26).
Removing the defective control panel 1. Swing folding mechanism A for the user interface all the way up. This
makes it easier to remove the cover.
2. Press into slit B of the housing cover with a screwdriver (do not pry!) and
remove the cover.
3. Detach cables L9 and L10 from the strain reliefs.
4. Rotate the control panel to the center position and loosen the four screws
C.
Pull the cables out of the control panel and remove the panel.
Integrating a newcontrol panel To install the control panel and the user interface, follow the procedure for
removing them in reverse order.
i NOTE
Don't forget to plug connectors X102 and X103 back into board
DX7 / DX71, lay the cables in their original positions and reattach the strain re-
6.7
liefs (see "Laying cables when replacing the control panel" on page 6-30).

- Check the user interface for correct functioning as well as the
Function of the display elements. (After the unit is switched ON
all of the display elements must light up briefly!)
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 29
6.7 Replacing the control panel Tab 6
6.7.1 Laying cables when replacing the control

panel
Up to unit hardware version AG (until approx. Oct. 2006)
L10
(green)
L9 (gray)
Reattach the strain

reliefs.
From unit hardware version BA (since approx. Nov. 2006)
L9
L10
(green)
Reattach the strain

reliefs.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 30 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.8 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (PAN)
6.8 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer

(PAN)
båÖäáëÜ
1. DX1
3. A B
2.
A
4. C
B
Removing the covers Remove the covers (see also section 1.13):
– Top arm
1. Pull the cable of the FH laser module off connector X807 on board DX1.
Detach the cover (see also section 1.13):
– Front slide cover, carefully pulling it together with the FH light localizer
off toward the front.
Removing the defective laser module 2. Detach the cable from the strain reliefs.
3. Loosen the two screws A and remove the holder including the laser mod-
ule (FH).
4. Loosen the two screws B and carefully pull laser module C out of the hold-
6.8
er toward the front.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 31
6.8 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (PAN) Tab 6
Installing the new laser module Insert the new laser module (FH) in the holder and retighten screws B.
i NOTE
Make sure that the lines in the laser module run vertically.
Screw the holder securely back onto the cover with screws A and reattach
the strain reliefs.
Set the front slide cover down on the top support cover and plug the cable
of the new FH laser module into connector X807 on board DX1.
i NOTE
Before reattaching the front slide cover, you must adjust the FH light localizer.
Adjusting the FH light localizer (PAN) Switch the unit ON.

Switch the light localizers ON.
Loosen screws A slightly and align the laser module (FH) including the
holder so that the FH light beam runs parallel to the edge of the tube as-
sembly light localizer C (visible here in the mirror).
Tighten the screws A firmly.
i NOTE
Make sure that the holder does not turn when you tighten the screws.
C
Check the light localizer again and perform a correction if necessary.
Attaching the covers Reattach the top arm and front slide covers.

59 38 399 D3352
6 – 32 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.9 Replacing/adjusting the MS light localizer laser module (PAN)
6.9 Replacing/adjusting the MS light localizer

laser module (PAN)
båÖäáëÜ
DX1
1.
– Top arm
Pull the cables of the laser modules (FH+MS) off connectors X807 (FH)
and X811 (MS) on board DX1.
Detach the cover (see also section 1.13):
– Front slide cover, carefully pulling it together with the FH light localizer
off toward the front.
Removing the defective laser module Detach the cable from the cable holder.
1. Loosen the two screws A and carefully remove the laser module (MS) to-
ward the front.
Installing the new laser module Insert the new laser module (MS) in the holder and tighten the screws A
loosely.
i NOTE
Make sure that the lines in the laser module run horizontally.
Plug the cable of the new MS laser module into connector X811 on board
6.9
DX1 and run the cable in the cable holder.
i NOTE
Before reattaching the front slide cover, you must adjust the MS light localizer.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 33
6.9 Replacing/adjusting the MS light localizer laser module (PAN) Tab 6
Adjusting the MS light localizer (PAN) Insert a bite block in the bite block holder.
Switch the unit ON.
Switch the light localizers ON and align the laser module (MS) so that the
MS light beam C strikes the center of the bite block or bite block holder
Tighten the screws A firmly.
i NOTE
Be careful not to turn the laser module when you tighten the screws.
C
29
Attaching the covers Set the front slide cover down on the top support cover.
Plug the cable of the FH laser module back into connector X807 on board
DX1.
Reattach the top arm and front slide covers.

59 38 399 D3352
6 – 34 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.10 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (Ceph)
6.10 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer

(Ceph)
båÖäáëÜ
Cable holder and
Cable ties
1.
A
Laser module
– Cover of cephalometer
– Outer cover of secondary diaphragm
CAUTION
Do not under any circumstances remove or move the secondary dia-
phragm!
Otherwise the system will require readjustment.
Removing the defective laser module Pull the cable of the Ceph laser module off connector X407 on board
DX91 and detach the cable from the cable ties and holder.
1. Loosen the screw A and remove the FH laser module (Ceph).
6.10
Installing the new laser module Insert the new laser module (FH) and tighten screw A loosely.
i NOTE
Make sure that the lines in the laser module run vertically.
Plug the cable of the FH laser module back into connector X407 on board
DX91.
Lay the cable in its original position and secure it there with cable ties.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 35
6.10 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (Ceph) Tab 6
i NOTE
Before reattaching the cover of the secondary diaphragm, you must adjust the
Ceph light localizer.
Adjusting the Ceph light localizer (FH) Switch the unit ON.
Switch the light localizers ON.
Align the Ceph (FH) laser module so that FH light beam C runs horizontal
between the ear plugs (tolerance: ±1.5mm).
Tighten screw A securely.
60 70 80 90 100 110 120

i NOTE
Be careful not to turn the laser module when you tighten the screws.

C
Attaching the covers Reattach the cover of the secondary diaphragm.

Reattach the cover to the cephalometer.

59 38 399 D3352
6 – 36 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.11 Removing the light localizers from the ring (for XGPlus and XG 5, if present)

(for XGPlus and XG 5, if present)
båÖäáëÜ
Light localizer
X406 X405
In XGPlus and XG 5 units with an older serial number, a light localizer is

located on the left and right bottom side of the ring. Both of these light local-
izers must be removed for TSA operation. To do this, proceed as follows:
1. Unplug the cables of the light localizers from connectors X405 and X406
on board DX61 and detach the cables from the cable clamps.
2. Unscrew the holders including the light localizers from the ring.
6.11
i NOTE
Depending on the serial number of the unit, different versions of light localizers
may be installed.
CAUTION
For "TSA ready" units, make sure that cable L20 (TSA motor) and cables L21
(light barriers) are once again correctly installed in the cable clamps (see page
6-58). Tighten the cables slightly if necessary.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 37
6.12 Replacing the bite block holder Tab 6
6.12 Replacing the bite block holder
6.12.1 For units without an occlusal bite block
Removing a defective bite block holder 1. Loosen the two screws A and remove the bite block holder.
2. Replace silicone rings, see chapter 6.12.3
Attaching a bite block holder Place the bite block holder into the groove of the silicone rings on the tube
bend and fasten it with the two screws A.

– Check the system adjustment via a diaphragm test exposure
PAN - Symmetry (see page 7-25).
– Perform a complete PAN unit adjustment (see chapter 4).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 38 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.12 Replacing the bite block holder
6.12.2 For XGPlus / 3Dready devices with occlusal bite

block
båÖäáëÜ
A
Removing a defective bite block holder 1. Loosen the two screws A and remove the bite block holder.
2. Unplug the connector of cable L41 from board DX51.
3. Unscrew board DX51 from the front half of the defective bite block holder,
and screw board DX51 into the new bite block holder.
4. Replace silicone rings, see chapter 6.12.3
Attaching a bite block holder Plug the connector of cable L41 into the board of the new bite block hold-
er.
Place the support piece on the tube bend and fasten it with the two screws
A.

6.12
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 39
6.12 Replacing the bite block holder Tab 6
6.12.3 Replacing silicone rings
E D
A
C
Removing the old bite block holder 1. Loosen the two screws A and remove the bite block holder.
2. For units with an occlusal bite block:
Unplug the connector of cable L41 from board DX51.
Replacing silicone rings 3. For silicone rings which have not yet been cut open:
In order to prevent any damage to the paintwork on the bracket, pull the
old silicone rings B slightly from a distance and cut through the silicone
rings with scissors.
Remove the silicone rings B.
4. Cut open the new silicone rings using some scissors at the marking C.
5. With the markings D facing inward and the cutting edge C facing outward,
place the new silicone rings in the positions of the old silicone rings.
6. Align the silicone rings with their markings D towards the recess E of the
bracket.
Attaching a bite block holder 7. Place the front half F of the bite block holder in the groove of the silicone
rings.
8. For units with an occlusal bite block:
Plug the connector of cable L41 back into the board of the new bite block
holder.
9. Place the rear half G of the bite block holder in the groove of the silicone
rings, and check that the outer edges match up with the bite block holder
exactly.
10. Screw the bite block holder securely with the two screws A.

59 38 399 D3352
6 – 40 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.13 Replacing the motor-driven diaphragm (for XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5)

(for XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5)
båÖäáëÜ
CAUTION
Be sure to install the diaphragm unit that matches the given unit type (XGPlus,
XGready,) or installed tube assembly version (1.0 or 2.0); (see spare parts list
for unit serial number and part number of matching diaphragm unit). If the
wrong diaphragm unit is installed, error code E6 61 70 or E6 61 17 will be dis-
played before an exposure is taken (see chapter 2-9).
i NOTE
The diaphragm unit installed in the unit may differ from those shown in this
chapter depending on the unit serial number. Assembly and removal are the
same for all versions.
1.
– Tube assembly, front
6.13
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 41
6.13 Replacing the motor-driven diaphragm (for XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5) Tab 6
Removing the defective diaphragm unit Pull cables L11 and L12 off connectors X501 (L11) and X101 (L12) on
board DX61 (see page 6-44).
DX61 TSA operation only:
Pull cables off of connectors X203, X303 , X304, X405, and X406 on
board DX61.
C 1. Loosen the upper screw A and the two lower screws B and remove the di-
aphragm unit.
i NOTE
If the two lower screws are not accessible, push the lower slider B upward
manually. If the slider is in such an unfavorable position that it cannot be
pushed upward, then:
– Remove board DX61,
– Loosen the 4 screws on motor C and raise it together with the spindle.
B
DX61
Installing the new diaphragm unit Start by fastening the new diaphragm unit to the unit with screw A.
Insert the two lower screws B and tighten them carefully (torque: 80
Ncm);
Attention! Aluminum housing.
Plug cables L11 and L12 back onto the connectors X501 (L11) and X101
(L12) of board DX61 (see "Cables and connectors for replacement of the
motor-driven diaphragm unit" on page 6-44).
For TSA operation:
Plug the cables back onto the connectors X203 (motor cable L20), X303
(light barrier cable L21), X304 (light barrier cable L21), X405 (laser light
localizer 1 TSA) and X406 (laser light localizer 2 TSA) of board DX61 (see
"Cables and connectors for replacement of the motor-driven diaphragm
unit" on page 6-44).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 42 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.13 Replacing the motor-driven diaphragm (for XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5)
båÖäáëÜ
– Since board DX61 is always replaced along with the diaphragm unit, also
be sure to observe the “6.22.4 Measures following replacement of
boards “
(see section 6.22.4).
– Perform a complete unit adjustment (see chapter 4).
– Take diaphragm test exposures for possible later

evaluation by an expert.
6.13
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 43
6.13 Replacing the motor-driven diaphragm (for XGPlus / 3Dready / XG 5) Tab 6
6.13.1 Cables and connectors for replacement of the

motor-driven diaphragm unit
X101 (L12) X501 (L11)
X203
(L20)
X406 X405 X304 X303

(L21) (L21)
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 44 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.14 Replacing the fixed diagram (for XG 3 / 3 PPE)
6.14 Replacing the fixed diagram (for XG 3 / 3 PPE)
båÖäáëÜ
CAUTION
Be sure to install the diaphragm unit that matches the given unit type (XG3) or
installed tube assembly version (1.0 or 2.0); (see spare parts list for unit serial
number and part number of matching diaphragm unit). If the wrong diaphragm
unit is installed, error code E6 61 70 or E6 61 17 will be displayed before an ex-
posure is taken (see chapter 2-9).
1. Remove the covers:

1. – Tube assembly, front
6.14
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 45
6.14 Replacing the fixed diagram (for XG 3 / 3 PPE) Tab 6
2.
B B B B
(REF 6371707)
BB
BB
2. For units in the version delivered until around October 2012:

Loosen the two screws B (approx. 2-3 turns) and push the fixed dia-
phragm upward.

(REF 6371707):
Unscrew and remove the two screws B and take off the fixed diaphragm.
Assemble by following the same procedure in reverse order.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 46 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.14 Replacing the fixed diagram (for XG 3 / 3 PPE)

– Take PAN diaphragm test exposures (see page 7-20)
båÖäáëÜ
(e.g. for possible later evaluation by experts).
– Perform the PAN system adjustment (see chapter 4).
6.14
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 47
6.15 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly Tab 6
6.15 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly
DANGER
wait at least another 4 minutes before starting the repair or taking off a
cover panel!
i NOTE
The tube assembly installed in the unit may differ from those shown in this
chapter depending on the unit serial number.
1. 2.
C C
D D
A
Removing the diaphragm unit Remove the diaphragm unit

(See section 6.13).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 48 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.15 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly
Removing the defective tube assembly 1. Loosen the four screws A and remove cover plate B incl. the cable shield-
ing (L3).Attention! Also pull cable L3 off connector X3 and the
ground cable off connector X304 on board DX6.
båÖäáëÜ
(see page 6-50)
i NOTE
The ferrite core and cable shielding can remain on the cover plate.
Detach cables L5 and L6 from the strain reliefs and pull the cables off
sockets J6 (L5) and J2-J3 (L6) on board DX6 (see page 6-50).
2. Loosen the two rear screws C on the tube assembly.
Hold the tube assembly firmly in place (Attention: Heavy!), loosen the
two front screws D and remove the tube assembly toward the front.
i NOTE
Tip: If you leave the two front screws on the rotating element, you can imme-
diately hang the tube assembly on them when reinstalling it.
Installing the new tube assembly Hang the new tube assembly on the two front screws of the rotating ele-
ment and tighten them securely.
CAUTION
Make sure that the cables of the diaphragm unit once again lie in their original
position (see section 6.23 page 6-52), as they could otherwise get in the way
while you're attaching the covers later on.
Insert the two rear screws and tighten them firmly.

Plug cables L3, L5, and L6 as well as the ground cable back onto board
DX6 and reattach the cables to the strain reliefs.
Attach the cover plate.
Installing the diaphragm unit Install the diaphragm unit

(See section6.13).

– Since board DX6 is always replaced along with the tube assembly, also
boards “
(see section 6.22.4)
6.15
– Perform an acceptance test (applies to Germany only);

without consulting an expert

59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 49
6.15.1 Cables and connectors for replacement of the

tube assembly
For tube assembly 1.0
Laying cables cor-

rectly on the cover
plate
Unplug/plug in cable L6 (socket

J2-J3 on board DX6)
Unplug/plug in cable L5
(socket J6 on board DX6)
Unplug/plug in ground cable (con-

nector X304 on board DX6)
(connector X3 on board DX6)
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 50 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.15 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly
Tube assembly 2.0
båÖäáëÜ
Laying cables cor-
rectly on the cover
plate
Unplug/plug in cable L6 (socket

J2-J3 on board DX6)
(socket J6 on board DX6)
Unplug/plug in ground cable (con-

nector X103 on board DX6)
(connector X3 on board DX6)
6.15
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 51
Cable routed on left side Cable routed on right side of

of tube assembly: 2x L21, tube assembly: L12, L20 (TSA
L11 and TSA laser light motor) and TSA laser light local-
localizer izer
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 52 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.16 Replacing the fan (tube assembly 1.0)
6.16 Replacing the fan (tube assembly 1.0)
båÖäáëÜ
1.

Replacing fan 1. Caution: Cable! Loosen the four screws A and carefully remove the cov-
er plate including the fan.
Pull the fan cable off connector X2 from board DX6.
Connector X2
6.16
Install the new fan in the reverse order of removal.

– Check the function of the fan using service routine S005.4
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 53
6.17 Replacing the fan (tube assembly 2.0) Tab 6
6.17 Replacing the fan (tube assembly 2.0)

i NOTE
As the X-ray tube assembly has to be disassembled when replacing the fan on
tube assembly version 2.0, after replacing the fan, the device must be fully re-
adjusted or recalibrated (see page 4-3ff.).
Remove the X-ray tube unit Remove the mounting frame (see page 6-48ff.).
Replacing fan 1. Caution: Cable! Loosen the four screws A and carefully remove the cover
plate including the fan.
2. Pull the fan cable off connector X2 on board DX6.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 54 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.17 Replacing the fan (tube assembly 2.0)
3. Loosen the four screws C and remove the faulty fan from the cover
plate.
4. Install the new fan, the cover plate, and the tube assembly in the re-
båÖäáëÜ
verse order of removal.

– Check the function of the fan using service routine S005.4
– Perform a complete unit adjustment or calibration.

(see from page 4-3).
6.17
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 55
6.18 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder Tab 6
6.18 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder
Rigid sensor holder TSA sensor holder

(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE + XGPlus / 3Dready basic class) (XGPlus comfort class)
1. 1.
2. A 2. A
B
B
4. 4.
C
C
3. 3.

– Sensor holder cover, large
Remove the sensor.
Removing the defective sensor holder 1. For TSA sensor holder (PAN), for XGPlusonly: Detach motor cable L20
and both light barrier cables L21 from the cable tie on the unit and pull the
cables off of connectors X203 (L20), X303 and X304 (L21) of the TSA
sensor holder.
2. Loosen the three screws A and remove the sensor holder. Caution: Ca-
ble L13!
3. Loosen the two screws B and remove the small sensor holder cover.
4. Loosen the three screws C and remove the connection socket.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 56 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.18 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder
5. 6.
båÖäáëÜ
Shield clamp
5. Detach the shield clamp (L13) on the rear side of the connection socket.
6. Loosen the connector screw connection on the front side of the connec-
tion socket and thread the connector to the rear through the connection
socket and the sensor holder.
Installing the new sensor holder 7. Install the new sensor holder in the reverse order of removal.
i NOTE
Don't forget to plug all connectors and cables back in again in their original
position and reattach the cable shields as well as all cable ties and strain re-
liefs (see section "Laying cables when replacing the PAN sensor holder" on
page 6-58).

– Perform the PAN system adjustment (see section 4.3).
The TSA adjustment also must be performed for TSA units!

6.18
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 57
6.18 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder Tab 6
6.18.1 Laying cables when replacing the PAN sensor

holder
Sensor holder, rigid (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or XGPlus / 3Dready basic version)
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 58 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.18 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder
TSA sensor holder (XGPlus full version)
båÖäáëÜ
Lay cables on the ring!
Reattach cable ties
Draw cable back into sensor holder

6.18
(no longer applicable as of unit hardware ver-
Reattach cable shield
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 59
6.19 Replacing the ceph sensor holder Tab 6
6.19 Replacing the ceph sensor holder
3.
D
D
2. B
C
A
1.
1. Remove the sensor.
Removing the defective sensor holder 2. Loosen the three screws A and remove the connection socket B. Cau-
tion: Cable L35!
3. Detach the cable shield from terminal C and the connector screw connec-
tion (loosen the two screws D from the rear) and thread the connector to
the rear through the connection socket.
Installing the new sensor holder Install the new sensor holder in the reverse order of removal.
i NOTE
Don't forget to reattach the cable shield.

– Perform the CEPH system adjustment (see section 4.5).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 60 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.20 Replace sensor
6.20 Replace sensor

båÖäáëÜ
– Since board DX81 is always replaced along with the sensor, also
boards “
– Perform a software update of the unit to version V02.20 or

higher.
6.20
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 61
6.21 Replacing the light barriers Tab 6
6.21 Replacing the light barriers
Device hard- Device hard-

ware version ware version
< AG ≥ AG
V1_3
V1_3
V1_4
V91_2
V91_1
V1_1
V1_2
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 62 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.21 Replacing the light barriers
The following light barriers can be replaced:
In the panoramic X-ray unit Light barrier at actuator 1, ON position: V1_1
båÖäáëÜ
Light barrier at actuator 2, ON position: V1_2
Light barrier at ring motor, starting position of rotation: V1_3
Light barrier at HA motor, height adjustment: V1_4
In the cephalometer Light barrier for patient diaphragm position detection, ceph: V91_1
Light barrier for sensor position detection, ceph: V91_2
After replacing V1_1, 2 and 3:

After replacing V1_4:

– Perform a function check.
After replacing V91_1 and 2:

– Execute S034.4 and S034.5 (see pages 5.19.2ff.)
– Check the CEPH adjustment by taking
Diaphragm test exposures: Fixed point of rotation and Quickshot
– Perform a CEPH unit adjustment if necessary (see chapter 4).
6.21
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 63
6.21.1 Replacing light barrier V1_3:

For hardware device level < AG
i NOTE
The device may differ slightly from those shown in this chapter depending on
the unit serial number.
Removing light barrier V1_3 Remove the covers (see also section 1.13):
– Top arm
1. Loosen the two clamping screws A on the tie rods and remove the tie rods
by pulling them B upward.
1.
B
A
2. Pull the light barrier cables (V1_1, V1_2 and V1_3) off connectors X802,
X803, and X804 and the ring motor cable off connector X813 on board
DX1.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 64 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
2.
båÖäáëÜ
Pull light barrier cables off con-
nectors X802, X803 and X804 on
board DX1
Pull ring motor cable off connector

X813 on board DX1
6.21
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 65
i NOTE
The three light barrier cables are bundled with a flexible tube and fastened to
the basic unit next to board DX1 or on the upper wing plate with two
cable clamps.
Detach the cable harness (flexible tube) from the cable clamps and re-
move the flexible tube.
Remove the ring motor (see page 6-19).
3. Loosen the screw C on the wing plate (Attention! The eccentric spring
is prestressed!), unhook the spring and release it carefully. Remove the
eccentric spring D.
4. Detach the remaining screws from the wing plates and initially remove the
upper wing E.
3. C 4.
E
D
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 66 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
5. Loosen the screws from the bearing covers of the actuator spindles and
detach the spindles. Now you can remove the lower wing plate F.
båÖäáëÜ
5.
Position the motor mount ring so that the tensioning roller is positioned
above a recess (so that the roller can be removed from below).
6. Detach the retaining ring and the washer. Remove tensioning roller G incl.
eccentric bolt (downward).
6.
6.21
7. Loosen the screws on the right guide profile (on spring side) H and re-
move the profile including tension spring J.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 67
CAUTION
Look out for bearing shells K. They may fall out after the profile is removed.
8. Remove bearing shells K.

9. Loosen the screws on motor mount ring L and remove motor housing M.
7. - 9.
H J
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 68 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
10. Loosen the two screws on light barrier V1_3 and remove it.
10.
båÖäáëÜ
M
V1_3
6.21
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 69
Installing light barrier V1_3 Screw new light barrier V1_3 onto motor housing M securely.
Reattach motor housing M to motor mount ring L and screw them together
again with the four screws.
CAUTION
Seal the screws with Loctite 242.
Reinsert the left part of the bearing shell and bring the motor mount ring
along with the motor mount back into position.
Reinsert the right part of the bearing shell K with the guide profile H and
the tension spring J and tighten the profile screws loosely.
Reattach tensioning roller G to the motor housing with the eccentric bolt
from below and fasten the eccentric bolt from above using a washer and a
retaining ring.
Pull the rotary ring (with motor mount ring) into the front-most position and
fasten the front screw of guide profile H securely.
Now push the rotary ring (with motor mount ring) into the rearmost posi-
tion (from the column) and fasten the rear screw of guide profile H secure-
ly.
Slide the rotary ring back and forth another 1 to 2 times to make sure that
it glides smoothly in the guide.
i NOTE
Check to make sure that the guide profile is still sufficiently greased following
assembly. Grease the profile with Chesterton 622 if necessary.
Reinsert the lower wing plate F.

Insert both spindles with spindle nuts and screw the bearing cover back
on tight.
Reinsert upper wing plate E and refasten the wing plates with the eight
screws (Note! Tighten screw C for fastening the eccentric spring only
loosely!).
Attach eccentric spring D to the eccentric bolt of the tensioning roller and
reattach it to screw C on the upper wing plate with a prestress of 2½ turns.
Tighten screw C securely.
Reinstall the ring motor (see page 6-20).
CAUTION
Note the correct procedure for laying the cables of the ring motor.
Now perform the cabling (see page 6-71).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 70 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Cabling V1_1, V1_2 and V1_3
11. 12.
båÖäáëÜ
13.
Properly run cable

harness
Run the light barrier cables together next to the ring motor and pull the
flexible tube over them.
11. Secure the flexible tube at the motor end with a cable tie and fasten it to
the wing plate with the cable clamp.
12. Twist the flexible tube (only the tube, not the cables!) clockwise at the con-
6.21
nector end, secure it with a cable tie and fasten it to the basic unit next to
board DX1 with the cable clamp.
13.
CAUTION
In its installed state, the cable harness (flexible tube) must exhibit a tendency
to move upward and form a loop during travel of the rotary ring. It must dip into
the unit!
Also make sure that the cable harness is refastened to the cable clamps in its
original position.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 71
Plug the ring motor cable and the light barrier cables back into connectors
X813, X802, X803, and X804 on board DX1.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 72 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.22 Replacing circuit boards
6.22 Replacing circuit boards
6.22.1 Important notes about replacing boards
båÖäáëÜ
CAUTION
Please observe the usual precautionary measures for handling
Printed circuit boards (ESD).Touch a ground point to discharge
static electricity before touching any boards.
CAUTION
Replacement of printed circuit boards DX6 and DX11:
Never replace both boards at the same time. After replacing one of these
boards, first proceed as specified in section 6.22.4 and then restart the unit.
Only then may you begin replacement of the other module.
CAUTION
Prior to circuit board replacement:
Open the PAN and CEPH RESET ADJUSTMENT menus in SIDEXIS and write
down the adjustment values before you start replacing the boards.
CAUTION
Replacement of circuit board DX11:
– If the old DX11 is still working:
Open the DETAILS; look for
the "Language Set ID" (listed in "Extended Configuration DX7") and
write down the configuration of the Language Set Index.
If it differs from 00
the Language Set Index has to be resetafter inserting a new
DX11, using the service routine S017.5
(see page 5-93).
– The replacement of circuit board DX11 also causes the loss of user
preference settings (patient symbols, quickshot pre-selections etc.). Point
this out
to the user or set the original values up again after the replacement
of the circuit board, provided they could still be queried prior to
the replacement.
CAUTION
Please be sure to read the notes in Section "6.22.4 Measures following re-
placement of boards " (see page 6-77)!
This Service Manual describes all measures required after the replacement of
6.22
modules or circuit boards, provided they were known at the time of publication.
You will find more up-to-date information and supplements concerning this
subject on the latest ORTHOPHOS XG CD and on the Sirona dealer page on
the Internet. For this reason, you should always check for the latest informa-
tion on the replacement of modules and performing updates before you start
replacing any modules or boards.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 73
6.22 Replacing circuit boards Tab 6
i NOTE
The connectors on the boards are labeled on delivery of the system.
Tip: When pulling off cables, check the connector designations and label the
cables accordingly if necessary.
DX11
DX91
DX1
DX61*
DX51
DX71
DX42 DX41**
* not for XG 3 / 3 PPE

** from system hardware version BA
PC board DX41 is omitted
DX32
see page 5-11
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 74 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
6.22.2 Replace board DX1
i NOTE
båÖäáëÜ
The software version of the "DX1/DX11 board" must be compatible with the
main software version of the unit.
1. Remove the "arm cover".

2. Only with DX1 boards with REF 59 24 142:
Disassemble both cross braces A.
3. CAUTION! Touch a ground point to discharge static electricity be-
B fore touching any boards.
Remove the cover plate B of the board DX11.
A
4. Pull all cables off board DX1.
5. Disassemble and remove the defective board DX1.
6. ATTENTION! It is imperative you observe the notes in chapter
A "6.22.3 Replace board DX11".
Install the DX11 board from the defective DX1 to the new DX1.
7. Reinstall the DX1 board in the unit and reattach the connectors.
8. Only with DX1 boards with REF 59 24 142:
Reinstall both cross braces A
9. Reattach the covers.
i NOTE
Once you have removed the cross braces A, the unit must be completely re-
adjusted or recalibrated.
i NOTE
After replacing board DX1, be sure to observe the information provided in the
chapter titled "6.22.4 Measures following replacement of boards" .
6.22
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 75
6.22.3 Replace board DX11
i NOTE
The software version of the "DX1/DX11 board" must be compatible with the
main software version of the unit.
i NOTE
The cover plates of the DX1 (REF 59 24 142 and REF 62 82 052) board ver-
sions are not compatible with each other.
In the case of boards with REF 59 24 1. Remove the cover plate from board DX11, see chapter "6.22.2 Replace
142 (DX1) and REF 59 25 214 (DX11) board DX1".
fore touching any boards.
Pull defective board DX11 off board DX1.
3. Insert the new DX11 board on the DX1 and reattach the cover plate.
In the case of boards with REF 62 82 1. Remove the cover plate from board DX11, see chapter "6.22.2 Replace
052 (DX1) and REF 63 17 056 (DX11) board DX1".
fore touching any boards.
Pull defective board DX11 off board DX1 using the removal tool D.
IMPORTANT! The removal tool D is included in the delivery scope of the
D DX11 board.
3. ATTENTION! Ensure that the connector strips of boards DX1 and
DX11 are aligned precisely above one another and are not offset, be-
DX11 fore pressing the boards together firmly.
Insert the new DX11 board on the DX1.
4. Check that the DX11 board is correctly attached to the DX1 board. There
must be no visible gap between the connector strips.
5. Reattach the cover plate.
i NOTE
DX1 After replacing board DX11, be sure to observe the information provided in the
chapter titled "6.22.4 Measures following replacement of boards" .
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 76 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
6.22.4 Measures following replacement of boards
CAUTION
båÖäáëÜ
After replacing boards or modules containing boards, check to make sure that
the software version of the module corresponds to the current software status
of the system. The software version for the modules can...

be accessed through service routine S008.2 or the DETAILS. You can also
check the info screen in advance to determine whether the current software
constellation is permissible. If this is not the case, the version number of the
entire software is labeled with an asterisk (e.g. V02.20*)
for XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
be accessed through service routine S008.2 or the DETAILS.
Perform a software update or downgrade (see Section 1.7) in case of software

incompatibilities.
Always perform the measures described below in the given sequence and do
not carry out any other actions between the steps.
6.22
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 77
The following table provides an overview of various possible replacement sit-

uations and cross-references to detailed descriptions of the actions required
for the corresponding situations following board replacement.
Board Constellation Actions Page

DX1 Inserting a new DX1
ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / 3Dready Switch the unit ON. 1-27
System software version V02.20 or higher Perform a software update of the unit
to version V02.51.02 or higher as de-
For units with an occlusal bite block and Start service routine S018.9 and per- 5-134
unit software version ≥ V02.40: form the adjustment of the AD accep-
tance angle values.
Check under "Details" to find out 1-37
whether any customer-specific angle
settings exist.
If so, adjust them via service routine 5-130
S018.7.
ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE Switch the unit ON. 1-27
Perform a software update of the unit
to version V02.51.02 or higher as de-
DX11 Replacing a DX11
i NOTE
Board DX11 with software version V02.22 or higher requires a SIDEXIS software version of V01.45 or
higher in order to perform an update. This makes it necessary to perform an overall system update to
software version V02.22 or higher or SIDEXIS V01.45 or higher. The software contained on the CD
included with the DX11 must always be installed on the entire unit.
Inserting a new DX11 Please proceed as described in sec- 6-81

ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / 3Dready tion 6.22.5, Case A
System software version V02.22 or higher
Inserting a DX11 from another unit with Please proceed as described in sec- 6-85
software version V02.22 to V02.35 tion 6.22.5, Case B
ORTHOPHOS XGPlus/ 3Dready
Inserting a DX11 from another unitwith Please proceed as described in sec- 6-88
software version V02.20 or higher tion 6.22.5, Case C.
ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3
CAUTION
Never use a module from another unit in an XG
3 PPE unit or vice versa.
Inserting a new DX11 Please proceed as described in sec- 6-90

ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE tion 6.22.5, Case D.
Occlusal bite Installation of a new occlusal bite block Perform service routine S18.9 and a 5-134
block or board or a new board DX51 functional test.
DX51
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 78 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

X-ray tube Replacing an X-ray tube assembly incl. DX6
båÖäáëÜ
assembly as a Inserting a new X-ray tube assembly Please proceed as described in sec- 6-92
complete ORTHOPHOS XGPlus ready
/ 3D tion 6.22.6, Case E.
assembly System software version V02.22 or higher
(incl. DX6) Inserting an X-ray tube assembly from Please proceed as described in sec- 6-94
another unitwith software version V02.22. tion 6.22.6, Case F
ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / 3Dready
Inserting a new X-ray tube assembly Please proceed as described in sec- 6-95
ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE tion 6.22.6Case G
Inserting an X-ray tube assembly from Please proceed as described in sec- 6-98
another unit with software version V02.20 tion 6.22.6, Case H .
ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3
CAUTION
Never use a module from another unit in an XG
3 PPE unit or vice versa.
Diaphragm unit Installation of a new complete dia- Check the compatibility between the 1-27
as a complete phragm unit software version of the modules and
assembly that of the overall system. Perform an
update or a downgrade if necessary.
(incl. DX61)
i NOTE
Note the dependency of the diaphragm unit
on device serial numbers in the spare parts
list.
DX61 Installation of a new DX61 in a previous- Check the compatibility between the 1-27
ly installed diaphragm unit software version of the modules and
(within the dia- that of the overall system. Perform an
phragm unit) update or a downgrade if necessary.
Execute service routine S017.17:
- RöV FRG: 5-110
(see section 5.13.14, Case B)
- Worldwide: 5-115
6.22
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 79

Easypad as a Inserting a new Easypad incl. DX7 It is essential that you perform a soft- 1-27
complete ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / 3Dready ware update to a system version ≥
assembly V02.25 (see section 1.7).
(incl. DX7) i NOTE
Following replacement of the Easypad, the
language set on board DX7 is set to the fac-
tory setting by default (00 = German, Eng-
lish, French,
Italian). If the configured unit language set
(which can be queried via service routine
S017.5 or DETAILS) has a configuration
other than 0, this configuration will be trans-
ferred to board DX7 by the update function.
DX71 Inserting a new DX71 Check the compatibility between the 1-27
software version of the modules and
(within the Multi- that of the overall system. Perform an
pad) update or a downgrade if necessary.
DX32 Inserting a new DX32 No further action is required.
(Stand)
DX41* Inserting a new DX41 Check the compatibility between the 1-27
(Stand) that of the overall system. Perform an
(Remote control) that of the overall system. Perform an
Up to device hardware version < BA: 6-100
Set jumpers X109 and X110 to "Con-
figuration with DX41“ (inside jumper)
(see also Section 6.22.7).
Sensor as a Using a new sensor Perform an update to an overall soft- 1-27
complete ware version of V02.25 or higher.
assembly
(incl. DX89)
software status of the module and that
(Ceph) of the overall system. Perform an up-
date or a downgrade if necessary.
Perform service routine S034, test 5-157
steps 4 and 5.
Perform the Ceph adjustment. 4-58
* circuit board DX41 no longer applies in system hardware version BA.
Circuit board DX41 is available as a repair part for units up to hardware version AG.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 80 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
6.22.5 Replacing a DX11
båÖäáëÜ
CAUTION
After a new DX11 is inserted, the IP address is initially reset to the factory set-
ting. Make sure that no second system is running on
the same IP address before switching the system to a new IP address.
Select/confirm system class

The error message E1 10 03 (format flash file system) is displayed.
E1 10 03 R
The formatting of the flash file system is started automatically. Error mes-
sage E1 10 04 is displayed during the entire process (approx. 5-6 min.).
E1 10 04 When the formatting is completed, the error message is automatically ac-
knowledged by the unit and error message E6 11 07 (undefined unit
5 - 6 min.
class) is displayed.
E6 11 07
E6 11 07 R
The access level for the service menu (level 4) is automatically started.
4. Press and hold down the Service key until the patient symbol keys light up
(approx. 2 s).
Level 4
– a.
a b c d Once the key combination has been entered correctly, service routine
017, test step 1 (select/confirm system class) is started
automatically. The memory key is lit.
i NOTE
Acknowledge any additional error messages with the
approx. 2 s ❶ R key R .
6. Confirm the "Comfort" (01) or "Basic" (02) system class depending on the
device:
1 - 01 + To do this, first press the memory button (R key lights up) and then
the R key R .
2
3
6.22
R ?
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 81
Checking / changing the IP address
1. Select service routine S037 test step 4 with the arrow keys and confirm
your selection by pressing the Service key , confirm the security
1 access.
- S037 +
The IP address of the unit is displayed in selection field 1.
2 - 4 +
2. Amend the patient data.5-182
3
3. Quit the service routine via the double arrow key .
Case A: New DX11 Performing a software update

System software status V02.22 1. Turn the device OFF.
or higher Wait for approx. 1 minute. Then switch the unit ON again.
i NOTE
Do not acknowledge any error messages at this point.

V02.4 or higher.
CAUTION
i NOTE
If the current SIDEXIS version is a patch version, the previous officially re-
leased main version of SIDEXIS
has to be installed before the current version can be installed.
3. Perform a software update (via the automatic update function) to the cur-
rent software version (go to the Dealer domain of the SIRONA Internet
site (go to Product info X-ray systems) (also see section 1.7.6).
i NOTE
try set. The contents of the CD can be downloaded from the Dealer domain of
www.sirona.com
i NOTE
When installing a new DX11 which already has the same software status as
the overall system, you must nevertheless perform a software update to this
status, so that an administrative entry can be written to the memory of the
DX11.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 82 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

Error message E6 15 05 (undefined system serial number) is displayed.
båÖäáëÜ
E6 15 05 R

7. Start service routine S008.3, check the unit serial number and confirm it if
it is correct (see page 5-52).
i NOTE
CAUTION

i NOTE
In systems that already run with a system software version V02.27 or higher,
please check that there is a XML file with the network name of the system (de-
tails) in the directory PDATA\Plugins\<Plugin Name>\P2K_Config\/<Geräte-
name>ext.xml This file contains up-to-date information about the previous
system configuration! See also section 1.8, on page 1-31).
9. Determine the ring type based on the system serial number.
PAN unit serial numbers up to 20056 = old ring type = 01

PAN unit serial numbers from 20057 = new ring type = 02
PAN/CEPH unit serial numbers up to 40104 = old ring type = 01
PAN/CEPH unit serial numbers from 40105 = new ring type = 02
10. Start service routine S034.7 and select the corresponding ring type (see
page 5-160).
11. Start service routine S017 and perform the system configuration (test
step 2-18) (see page 5-79).
i NOTE
For systems with hardware version < BA (until October 2006):
– Circuit board DX41 must be configured with service routine S017.9
6.22
.
– Review the installed headrest version and adjust the
configuration, using service routine S017.10 if necessary
(see page 5.13.8).
i NOTE
Inform the customer about the new possibilities of the software version, such
as the welcome screen (XGPlus / 3Dready only) or the acoustic exposure signal.
Activate these functions if they are required.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 83
12. If the minimum travel height of the system must be limited:

Set the travel height with service routine S018.2
(see page 5-116). Perform another software update to the current system
software version as described in section 1.7.3. This updates all modules
in accordance with the configuration.
– PAN adjustment
For units with an occlusal bite block:
1. Start service routine S018.9 and perform the adjustment of the AD accep-
tance angle values (refer to page 5-134).
2. Check under "Details" (see page 1-37) to find out whether any custom-
Occlusal bite block er-specific angle settings exist. If so, adjust them via service routine
S018.7 (refer to page 5-130).
3. Open the DETAILS.

1.8, on page 1-37).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 84 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Case B: DX11 from an external device, Performing a software update

System software status V02.22
CAUTION
båÖäáëÜ
or higher
– The replacement of a DX11 from an external device is possible if
the DX11 board and the system have at least the software version
V02.22.
– The replacement is only possible within the same system class, i.e.
the DX11 board must come from a XGPlus / 3Dreadysystem if it is to be in-
stalled in another
XGPlus / 3Dready!
CAUTION
After inserting the board, you must reconfigure the IP address to match the IP
address of the existing X-ray component. Before you set the unit to the correct
IP address, make sure that this address has not been assigned to any other
unit.
i NOTE
Do not acknowledge any error messages at this point.

V02.4 or higher.
i NOTE
3. Perform a software update (via the automatic update function) to a soft-

ware version ≥ V02.25, ideally to the current software version (go to the
Dealer domain of the SIRONA Internet site (go to Product info X-ray
systems) (also see section 1.7.5).
i NOTE
6.22
www.sirona.com
i NOTE
DX11.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 85

Error messageE6 15 05 (undefined system serial number) is displayed.
E6 15 05 R
E6 15 04 R

8. Start service routine S008.3 (see page 5-52).
9. Get the unit serial number from the rating plate of the unit and enter it (see
page 5-52).
i NOTE
Any serial number which is unknown to the unit will not be accepted by the
unit.
The serial number entered must be identical to the number on the nameplate
of the unit. If an inadmissible serial number is entered, the input will not be ac-
cepted and the serial number can be entered again.

i NOTE
11. Determine the ring type based on the system serial number.
PAN unit serial numbers up to 20056 = old ring type = 01
PAN unit serial numbers from 20057 = new ring type = 02
PAN/CEPH unit serial numbers up to 40104 = old ring type = 01
PAN/CEPH unit serial numbers from 40105 = new ring type = 02
12. Start service routine S034.7 and select the corresponding ring type (see
page 5-160).
i NOTE
– Circuit board DX41 must be configured with service routine S017.9
.
– Review the installed headrest version and adjust the
configuration, using service routine S017.10 if necessary
(see page 5.13.8).

(see page 5-116).
Perform another software update to the current system software version
as described in section 1.7.3. This updates all modules in accordance
with the configuration.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 86 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

– PAN adjustment
båÖäáëÜ
For units with an occlusal bite block:
1. Start service routine S018.9 and perform the adjustment of the AD accep-
tance angle values (refer to page 5-134).
2. Check under "DETAILS" (see page 1-37) to find out whether any custom-
Occlusal bite block er-specific angle settings exist. If so, adjust them via service routine
S018.7 (refer to page 5-130).

1.8, on page 1-37).
6.22
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 87
Case C: DX11 from an external device, Performing a software update

ORTHOPHOS
XG 5 / 3 (not XG 3 PPE)
CAUTION
System software status
– The replacement of a DX11 from an external device is possible if
V02.20 or higher.
the DX11 board and the system have at least the software version
V02.20 .
DX11 must come from an XG 5 or XG 3 device if it is to be installed in
an XG 5 or XG 3 system.
CAUTION
After inserting the board, you must reconfigure the IP address to match the IP
address of the existing X-ray component. Before you set the unit to the correct
IP address, make sure that this address has not been assigned to any other
unit.
CAUTION
Do not acknowledge any error messages displayed at this point!

V02.4 or higher.
CAUTION
3. Perform a software update (via the automatic update function) to a soft-

ware version ≥ V02.25, ideally to the current software version (go to the
Dealer domain of the SIRONA Internet site (go to Product info X-ray
systems) (also see section 1.7.5).
i NOTE
www.sirona.com
i NOTE
DX11.

59 38 399 D3352
6 – 88 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

E6 15 05 R
båÖäáëÜ
page 5-52).
i NOTE
unit.

i NOTE
name>ext.xml. This file contains up-to-date information about the previous
10. Start service routine S034.7 and select

Ring type 02 (see page 5-160).
11. Start service routine S017 and check the system configuration or perform
the system configuration (test step 2-23) (see page 5-80).
i NOTE
For XG 3: The adjustments of service routine S017.17 must be performed ac-
cording to the unit serial number (see page 5-105).

(see page 5-116).
– PAN adjustment
– CEPH adjustment, if installed
14. Perform another software update to the current system software version
6.22

1.8, on page 1-31).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 89
Case D: New DX11 Performing a software update

ORTHOPHOS
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE
CAUTION
After a new DX11 is inserted, the IP address is initially reset to
V02.22 or higher
the factory setting. Before you set the unit to a new IP address, make sure that
the IP address you're assigning has not been assigned to any other unit.
CAUTION

V02.4 or higher.
i NOTE
3. Perform a software update (via the automatic update function) to the cur-
rent software version (go to the Dealer domain of the SIRONA Internet
site (go to Product info X-ray systems) (also see section 1.7.5).
i NOTE
www.sirona.com
i NOTE
DX11.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 90 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

båÖäáëÜ
E6 15 05 R
6. Start service routine S008.3 and confirm the

system serial number (see page 5-52).
7. Quit the service routine via the up arrow key above selection field 3.
i NOTE
9. Start service routine S034.7 and select

Ring type 02 (see page 5-160).
i NOTE
Circuit board DX41 must be configured with service routine S017.9
adjusted.
i NOTE
For XG 3: The adjustments of service routine S017.17 must be performed ac-
cording to the unit serial number (see page 5-105).

(see page 5-116).
12. Perform another software update to the current system software version
– PAN adjustment
6.22

1.8, on page 1-31).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 91
6.22.6 Replacing an X-ray tube assembly incl. DX6
Case E: New tube assembly, 1. Switch the unit ON.

2. If the software status of the newly installed DX6 board is not compatible
with the current overall system software version, perform a software up-
V02.22 or higher
date to the current system version as described in section 1.7.3.
Error message E6 11 07 (undefined system class) is displayed.

E6 11 07 R
The access level for the service menu is automatically started.
i NOTE
R key R .
5. Press and hold down the Service key until the patient symbol keys light up
(approx. 2 s).
Level 4
– a.
a b c d Once the key combination has been entered correctly, service routine
automatically. The memory key is lit.
approx. 2 s ❶
7. Confirm the “Comfort“ system class (01):

To do this, first press the memory button (R key lights up) and then
1 - 01 + the R key R .
R ?
8. Quit the service routine via the double arrow key .

i NOTE
Error message E6 15 04 is occasionally displayed at this point. This error mes-
sage can be ignored at this point. Acknowledge the error message with the R
key R
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 92 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

E6 15 05 R
båÖäáëÜ
12. Start service routine S008.3, check the unit serial number and confirm it if
it is correct (see page 5-52).
i NOTE
CAUTION

V02.4 or higher.
i NOTE
15. Perform a software update to version V02.27 or higher (automatic update)

(see also section 1.7.5).
– PAN adjustment
17. Perform an acceptance test (applies to Germany only);
without consulting an expert.
6.22
1.8, on page 1-31).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 93
Case F: Tube assembly from another

unit,
CAUTION
System software status – The replacement of an X-ray tube assembly from an external device is
possible if
V02.22 or higher
the X-ray tube assembly and the system have at least the software ver-
sion
V02.22.
The tube assembly must come from a XGPlus / 3Dreadysystem if it is to be
installed in another
XGPlus / 3Dready!

2. Perform a software update to a software version ≥ V02.28.02.

E6 15 05 R

E6 15 04 R
page 5-52).
i NOTE
unit.

– PAN adjustment
1.8, on page 1-31).
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 94 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Case G: New X-ray tube assembly 1. Switch the unit ON.

ORTHOPHOS
XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE CAUTION
båÖäáëÜ
System software status At this place do not perform any software update to a higher version! (Impor-
V02.20 or higher. tant for the configuration!) The tube assembly must first be brought to the ex-
isting system software status.
2. Perform a software update to the overall system software status (automat-

ic update) as described in section 1.7 in order to bring the tube assembly
firstly to the existing system software status.
Error message E6 11 07 (undefined system class) is displayed.

E6 11 07 R
The access level for the service menu is automatically started.
i NOTE
R key R .
5. Press and hold down the Service key until the LEDs above the patient
symbol keys light up (approx. 2 s).
approx. 2 s
❶
– a.
Once the key combination has been entered correctly, service routine
automatically. The LED above the memory key lights up.
a b c d
6.22
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 95
7. Confirm the "Basic" system class (02):

To do this, first press the memory key (LED above the R key lights
______02__________
1 2 3
❶
R


E6 15 05 R

12. Start service routine S008.3 and confirm the
system serial number (see page 5-52).
V02.4 or higher.
i NOTE
16. Perform a software update to version V02.28.02 or higher (automatic up-

date) (see also section 1.7.5).
– PAN adjustment
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 96 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

1.8, on page 1-31).
båÖäáëÜ
6.22
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 97
Case H: X-ray tube assembly from

external system,
CAUTION
ORTHOPHOS
XG 5 / 3 (not XG 3 PPE) – The replacement of an X-ray tube assembly from an external device is
possible if
the X-ray tube assembly and the system have at least the software version
V02.20 or higher.
V02.20 .
X-ray tube assembly must come from an XG 5 or XG 3- system if it is to be
installed in
an XG 5 or XG 3 system.
CAUTION

V02.4 or higher.
i NOTE


E6 15 05 R

page 5-52).
i NOTE
unit.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 98 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

10. Install the current SIDEXIS software version
båÖäáëÜ
(V01.53 or higher).
i NOTE
If the current SIDEXIS version is a patch version, the previous officially re-
leased main version of SIDEXIS
has to be installed before the current version can be installed.

– PAN adjustment
1.8, on page 1-31).
6.22
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 99
6.22.7 Check jumper on circuit board DX42

(replacement of board DX42)
From system hardware version BA (November 2006), the DX42 board will
DX42 have two jumpers which are configured through the system hardware version
with or without board DX41.
If board DX42 is supplied as a spare part (from November 2006), the jumpers
will be set to operation without board DX41 DX41. If a new DX42 board (sup-
plied during/after November 2006) is to be inserted in a unit with a unit hard-
ware version < BA as a spare part, the jumpers must be reconfigured prior to
installation in accordance with the following steps.
6.22.8 Jumper position on circuit board DX42
Unit operation without DX41

(factory setting from November 2006,
DX41 IN
DX41 IN
system HW version ≥ BA)
Jumper out-
X109 X110
Unit operation with DX41

(factory setting until October 2006,
DX41 IN
DX41 IN
unit hardware version < BA)
Jumper inside
X109 X110
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 100 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 6 6.23 Replacing cables
6.23 Replacing cables
båÖäáëÜ
CAUTION
Switch the unit OFF before you start replacing cables or
removing connectors.
CAUTION
Be careful not to twist the cables or kink the fiber-optic light guides when in-
stalling them.
i NOTE
An overview of all cables can be found in section 1.11.
Always check the cables before replacing them

(see section 3-18).
The cables are labeled with small flags.

They specify the designation and part number of the cable.
The plugs and sockets on the cables are designated both on the boards and
cables.
Check the designations of the cables when pulling them off.
Some of the cables are marked with green adhesive tape. Mark the corre-
sponding positions on the unit before removing an old cable. Lay the new ca-
ble so that the cable markings again come to rest at the corresponding posi-
tions marked on the unit while removing the old cable.
6.23
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 101
6.23 Replacing cables Tab 6
6.23.1 Replacing the fiber-optic cables L5, L6
1. + 2.
AA DX1
4. 3.
When changing the fiber-optic cables L5 and L6, please observe the following
notes:
Remove the defective fiber-optic cable.
CAUTION
Do not bend or twist fiber-optic cables. The curve radius must not be smaller
than 20 mm, as the cables can otherwise break!
i NOTE
If a radius limiter is not yet installed: When replacing a cable, retrofit all existing
fiber-optic cables (L5, L6) with the radius limiters included with delivery! The
radius limiters improve torsional and bending force tolerance.
1. Attach the radius limiter A to the cable near to the connector which is
plugged into the board DX1.
2. Plug the connector of the new fiber-optic cable to the same color assign-
ment on the board DX1.
3. Lay the fiber-optic cables up to point B and attach the radius limiter A to
the cable at point B (around 900 mm away from the connectors on the
DX1).
4. Guide the fiber-optic cable to board DX6 and plug the connector of the
new fiber-optic cable to the same color assignment on board DX6.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 102 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
6.23.2 Replacing cables (L3, L5, L6, L11, L12, and

L15)/Laying the cable/corrugated tube at the
rotation unit
båÖäáëÜ
CAUTION
The connectors and cables must be protected by inserting them in the fabric
tube A supplied with the cables.
Preparing the cable exchange 1. Remove the covers.

2. Pull the connectors off board DX6.
Replacing cables
A
1.
2.
W1
1. For L12: Protect the tongue of connector RJ45 by wrapping it with insulat-
ing tape.
ATTENTION! Make sure that the contacts don't get sticky or stuck to-
gether!
6.23
2. For L3: Remove the connector of the cable with tool W1.
3. Remove the corrugated tube and the spiral spring B from the cable loom.
4. Remove the defective cable and run the new cable up to the rotary ring in
the original position.
5. Bunch the cables together again to form a loom.
6. Fasten the defective cable to the loom and use it as a pull wire to pull the
loom through the fabric tube A.
7. Pull the fabric tube over the connector and as far over the cable loom as
possible.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 103
8. Use the pull wire to pull the fabric tube into the spiral spring B.
9. Slide the corrugated tube over the spiral spring.
10. Remove the fabric tube and the pull wire.
Laying the corrugated tube or cable at 1. Check whether the latest tube supports C or tube clamps D are installed
the rotation unit on the rotation unit.
A C
B
C D
A
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 104 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
2. If the obsolete tube supports A and tube clamps B are still installed on the
rotation unit, replace them with the latest tube supports C and tube
clamps D (included in the delivery scope of the spare part).
båÖäáëÜ
3. Lay the corrugated tubes and cables back in their original position.
4. Plug the connectors back in again.
5. Reattach the covers.
6.23
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 105
6.23.3 Replacing cable L7 or L8/L108*

(in cable track 2)
Removing cables L7 and L8/L108* from Switch the unit ON.

board DX1
Move the slide downward to a pleasant working position using the
UP/DOWN keys on the Easypad.
Remove the covers (see section 1.13):
– Arm
Remove the two cross braces and the cover plate of board DX1.
Pull fiber-optic cable L7 and cable L8/L108* off board DX1.
CAUTION
Immediately after pulling off the cables, wrap the detent of connector X303
(cable L8/L108*) with adhesive tape to protect it against breaking off.
Moving the unit up and removing the Switch the unit ON.
profile covers
Move the slide upward using the UP/DOWN keys on the Easypad.
Remove the covers (see section 1.13):
– Intermediate piece
– Profile covers (top and bottom)
i NOTE
Tip: While loosening the screws, press the top profile cover down towards the
unit and allow it to slide down once the screws are loose.
If the height adjustment motor is inoperative, you can also move the slide man-
ually.
Removing board DX32 Remove board DX32 (see section 6.2.3).
*) as of unit hardware version BA
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 106 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
1. 2. 3.
båÖäáëÜ
4.
5.
X303
*) as of unit hardware version
Removing the cable track 1. Detach fiber-optic cable L7 and cable L8*/L108 from the cable clamps at
the rear of the unit and pull the cables through the slit in the slide toward
the front into the stand.
2. Unscrew the angle brackets on both sides of the cable track.
3. Remove the motor-side end piece from the cable track.
Remove both cable covers (on the right and on the left in the stand) and
pull the cable track (behind the motor) down and out of the stand.
Detaching old cables from the cable 4. With defective cable L7:
track Unscrew cable L7 from the interface board and remove the shielding.
i NOTE
This step is not required if cable L7 is intact and therefore will be reused. Un-
less it is not possible to lay down the cable track flat near the stand (see next
step)
6.23
Remove the cable ties from the cable track and lay the cable track down
on a flat surface stretched out.
5. Carefully pull both cables (together) out of the cable track and out of the
fabric tube.
CAUTION
At the same time, be sure to check the position of connector X303 on cable
L8/L108* (see photo above).
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 6 – 107
6. 7. 8.
*) as of unit hardware version
Drawing new cables into the cable track With defective cable L8/L108*:
Wrap the connector X303 of the new cable L8/L108* with adhesive tape to
protect the detent against breaking off.
Lay the cable track down on a flat surface stretched out.
6. Fasten the two (new) cables together with adhesive tape above the flag la-
bels.
7. Push both cables (together) into the cable track up to the cable markings.
CAUTION
Push the green cable. The white cable is carried along. In this way, you can
prevent the sensitive fiber-optic cable from being damaged.
i NOTE
New cables have no cable markings. Orientate yourself according to the mark-
ing on the second (old) cable and make sure that both cables protrude equally
far out of the cable track once they have been drawn in. Then make a mark on
the new cable.
Reinstalling the cable track in the unit 8. Before installing the cable track in the stand, fasten the cables to both
ends of the cable track using cable ties.
CAUTION
The cable ties should only fix the position of the cables. They must not be fas-
tened too tightly, as overtightening them could damage fiber-optic cable L7.
The actual installation of the cable track is performed in the reverse order
of its removal.
6.23.4 Laying cable L1 and the grounding strap

(in cable track 1)
The procedure for replacing cable L1 and the grounding strap is basically
analogous to the procedure described in chapter 6.23.3.
59 38 399 D3352
6 – 108 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
ORTHOPHOS XG
7 Maintenance
Tab 7
Contents
7.1 Checking the height adjustment ..............................7 – 4
7.2 Checking the forehead and temple supports ..........7 – 6
7.3 Testing the rotating unit for smooth running............7 – 7
7.4 Checking the sensor holder (pan and ceph) ...........7 – 8
7.5 Checking the bite block holder ..............................7 – 10
7.6 Checking the light localizers..................................7 – 11
7.7 Checking the X-ray images ...................................7 – 13
7.8 Checking the tube data .........................................7 – 14
7.8.1 kV actual value and radiation time ..................... 7 – 14
7.8.2 Checking the tube current .................................. 7 – 14
7.8.3 Fan and temperature.......................................... 7 – 19
7.9 Checking the diaphragm .......................................7 – 20
(only for XG 3 / 3 PPE)....................................... 7 – 20
7.9.2 Diaphragm test exposures ................................. 7 – 21
7.9.3 Pan diaphragm test exposure ............................ 7 – 22
7.9.4 Pan symmetry test exposure.............................. 7 – 25
7.9.5 Ceph - Fixed point of rotation
(not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) ........................................ 7 – 29
7.9.6 Quickshot test exposure
(only for XGPlus full version/ 3Dready).................. 7 – 32
7.9.7 TSA sensor
(only for XGPlus and full version) ........................ 7 – 35
7.10 Checking the cables for damage...........................7 – 38
7.11 Checking the idling rollers .....................................7 – 39
7.12 Checking the grounding straps .............................7 – 40
7.13 Checking the cable shields ...................................7 – 41
7.14 Checking the protective ground wires ...................7 – 42
7.15 Checking the unit leakage current.........................7 – 46
59 38 399 D3352
7–2 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 7
7 Maintenance
båÖäáëÜ
DANGER
wait at least another 1 minute before starting the repair or taking off a
cover panel!
When replacing parts involving the power connection, the power switch,
board DX32, or the X-ray tube assembly, disconnect the unit from the
junction box of the building installation.
CAUTION
– Switch the X-ray unit OFF before connecting a
measuring instrument.
– Select the correct current/voltage type and adjust the
measuring range to match the expected readings.
– Perform continuity tests only on units which are switched off.
– Observe the prescribed cool-down intervals if several exposures must be
taken to check a measurement.
CAUTION
dling
Touch a ground point to discharge static electricity

before touching any boards.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7–3
7.1 Checking the height adjustment Tab 7
7.1 Checking the height adjustment
Spindle
HA motor
Check the threaded rod and motor for Perform a visual inspection of the motor and the threaded rod for abra-
abrasion sion.
If abrasion clearly has occurred:

Replace the height adjustment motor including spindle (see Page 6-7)
Check whether the height adjustment Use the UP/DOWN keys on the Easypad (XGPlus / 3Dready) or Multipad
produces atypical running noises (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) to move the unit up and down throughout its entire travel
range.
If the height adjustment is mechanically defective, atypical running noises

may occur:
Speed-dependent hammering noises:

Bearing on the height adjustment motor is damaged
Replace the height adjustment motor including spindle (see Page 6-7)
Check whether precise, jolt-free height Use the UP/DOWN keys on the Easypad (XGPlus / 3Dready) or Multipad
adjustment is possible (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) to move the unit up and down and watch the movement
of the slide: The slide must begin moving with a soft start and then speed
up its movement.
If precise height positioning with a soft start is not possible:

Lubricate the spindle with a light coat of Chesterton 622
i NOTE
If the X-ray unit is not used for a longer period of time, a slight jolt may occur
the first time it starts moving. However, the next time it starts moving, it must
execute a jolt-free soft start.
59 38 399 D3352
7–4 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 7 7.1 Checking the height adjustment
Check whether the height adjustment Manually actuate both limit switches one after the other while the height
limit switches are functioning properly adjustment motor is running: The motor must stop.
båÖäáëÜ
Actuator If the limit switches are not functioning:
Check the corresponding microswitch and replace if necessary
50 Check cable L19, replace if necessary
Limit switch
Check whether an audible signal can be Run the unit up and down: An audible signal must sound.
heard during height adjustment
If no audible signal sounds:
Replace board DX1 (see Page 6-73)
7.1
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7–5
7.2 Checking the forehead and temple supports Tab 7
7.2 Checking the forehead and temple supports
Headrest version 1
(will be replaced by headrest version 2 in 2007 and will then no longer be available as a repair part)
Headrest version 2
(will be available (from 2007 on) under the part no.: 5969741)
Check whether the forehead support Move the forehead support and observe its position.
moves easily and without jolting
throughout its travel range
If the forehead support cannot be positioned easily and without jolting:
Replace the headrest (see section 6.5)
Check whether the temple supports Move the temple supports and observe their position.
move easily and symmetrically
If the temple supports cannot be positioned symmetrically and without
jolting:
Replace the headrest (see section 6.5).
59 38 399 D3352
7–6 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 7 7.3 Testing the rotating unit for smooth running
7.3 Testing the rotating unit for smooth running

Testing the rotating unit for smooth running
The mechanical function of the rotating unit (ring movement) is checked via a
båÖäáëÜ
3D test cycle. The test cycle is executed without radiation. The test cycle is
used to check that the unit is functioning correctly and to ensure that a smooth
cycle of the rotation unit is possible. The unit stops automatically if the resis-
tance increases.
The unit must be switched on.
1. Press the T key.
The program enters test cycle mode. On the touchscreen, the display of
T the kV/mA value, the exposure time and the patient symbols is hidden.
Two test cycle symbols appear.
PAN CEPH 3D
CEPH TS 2. Press the exposure release button.
1260 P1 14 s The test cycle is started.
3. Listen out for atypical running noises.
10
64
If unusual running noises occur during the test cycle, or the rotating unit
P6.1 stops due to increased resistance:
12,1s
Establish the mechanical fault.
T T Correct the mechanical fault.
Filmkassette einlegen
Ready for exposure ?
? 4. Press the T key again.
The program exits test cycle mode again.
7.3
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7–7
7.4 Checking the sensor holder (pan and ceph) Tab 7
7.4 Checking the sensor holder (pan and ceph)
PAN sensor holder, rigid PAN sensor holder

for operation with TSA sensor
(only for XGPlus)
Sensor holders
Pan
Sensor
Sensor holders
Ceph
Sensor
Locking button
59 38 399 D3352
7–8 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 7 7.4 Checking the sensor holder (pan and ceph)
Check whether the sensor locks and Carefully insert the sensor upward into the holder:
unlocks easily and is firmly seated in The sensor must snap in place audibly.
the holder Check the sensor for firm seating.
båÖäáëÜ
Press the locking button and carefully pull the sensor downward out of the
holder: The sensor must be easy to remove.
If the sensor cannot easily be inserted in or removed from the holder, or is

seated too loosely in the holder:
Check the magnets on the sensor for dirt or foreign particles and clean
them or remove any foreign particles if necessary
Replace the sensor holder (see Page 6-56)
Replace sensor
7.4
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7–9
7.5 Checking the bite block holder Tab 7
7.5 Checking the bite block holder
Bite block holder
**
*) only for units with an oc-

clusal bite block
Check whether the bite block, contact Insert the bite block, contact segment and chin rest one after the other in
segment and chin rest can be fitted the bite block holder and check them to make sure they are firmly seated.
securely in the bite block holder
If loosely seated:
Check the bite block, contact segment and/or chin rest for damage; re-
place with new parts if necessary
Replace the bite block holder (see Page 6-38)
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 10 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 7 7.6 Checking the light localizers
7.6 Checking the light localizers
båÖäáëÜ
FH light localizer PAN
MS light localizer PAN Light localizer Ceph
Check whether the FH light localizer Adjust the FH light localizer on the PAN with slider A.
(PAN) can be adjusted easily
If the light localizer cannot be moved easily:
Lubricate the slider (rail) with a light coat of Vaseline
MS light localizer
A = FH light localizer
7.6
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 11
7.6 Checking the light localizers Tab 7
Checking the position of the light lines Switch the light localizers on and check the positions of the light lines:
(FH and MS) on the PAN – The horizontal light line (FH) must be running horizontally
– The vertical light line (MS) must be running vertically through the cen-
ter of the forehead support down to the center of the bite block holder
i NOTE
Tip: When checking and adjusting the light localizers use the following as
Reference lines:
For the FH light localizer: Edge of the tube assembly light localizer
FH For the MS light localizer: Bite block holder, inserted bite block or
Forehead support
If the light beam alignment is not correct:

Adjust the light localizers
(see chapter 6)
MS
29
Checking the position of the light lines Switch the light localizers on and check the positions of the light lines:
(FH) on the Ceph The horizontal light line (FH) must be running horizontally between
the temple supports at the height of the ear plugs
i NOTE
Tip: When checking or adjusting the light localizer, you may use a PA or AP
position on the ear plugs to assess the light beam.
60 70 80 90 100 110 120
FH
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 12 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 7 7.7 Checking the X-ray images
7.7 Checking the X-ray images
båÖäáëÜ
Check whether the X-ray images taken Check to see whether the existing images of the patient exhibit an unex-
by the dentist are OK posed border on all 4 sides.
Check whether the X-ray images show normal definition.
Check whether the density of the X-ray images is OK.
If the quality of the X-ray images is unsatisfactory in some way:

Check the adjustment and readjust the system if necessary (see sec-
tion 4)
7.7
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 13
7.8 Checking the tube data Tab 7
7.8 Checking the tube data
7.8.1 kV actual value and radiation time

Select service routine S002.3 for the exposure (radiation without rotary
movement, radiation time selectable, see page 5-28) and set the following
parameters:
– Radiation time: 1 s
– kV value: 66 kV
Release radiation and check the kV actual value and radiation time spec-
trometrically, e.g. using a Mult-O-Meter.
If the measured values deviate from the values set above (1 s, 66 kV) by
more than ± 10 %:
Replace the tube assembly (see Page 6-48)
i NOTE
For the XG 3 / 3 PPE system version, sensor positioning must be performed
until the beam strikes the sensor precisely. If the sensor is positioned correctly,
the corresponding values can be compared with the setpoint values.
7.8.2 Checking the tube current
DANGER
The electronics of the X-ray tube assembly are always connected to line
voltage.
The device must be switched off and, after switching off the unit, wait at
least 4 minutes (LED V203 must not be on) before you ...
– remove the cover from the tube assembly
– Attach measuring wires to the DX6 board, or
– detach the jumper from the mA measuring socket
WARNING
The test leads and measuring instruments used must have a dielectric
strength of at least 1000V!
Be sure to use a battery-powered measuring instrument with shock-hazard-

protected sockets.
Use only test leads with shock protection.
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 14 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 7 7.8 Checking the tube data
Preparing the measurement 1. DANGER After switching the unit off, wait at least 4 minutes (LED
D V203 must not light up any more) before removing the cover of the
tube assembly!
D
båÖäáëÜ
Turn the device off.
2. Loosen the 3 screws D and remove the "Front tube assembly" cover E.
D
3. Loosen the 4 screws F and remove the cover plate G.

F
For tube assembly 1.0:
20 mADC
4. DANGER After switching the unit off, wait at least 4 minutes (LED
V203 must not light up any more) before removing jumper A from the
DX6 board!
Remove jumper A from the MA+/MA– measuring points on board DX6.
5. DANGER Use exclusively fully insulated measuring wires.
the digital multimeter with the measuring wires to the test points MA+ and
MA– of board DX6.
6. On the digital multimeter, select the current measuring range 20mA
DC.
com.
MA+ MA–
400 VDC
A
·
DX6 board
7.8
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 15
For tube assembly 2.0:
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 16 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
4. DANGER After switching the unit off, wait at least 4 minutes (LED
V203 must not light up any more) before removing jumper H from the
DX6 board!
båÖäáëÜ
Remove the jumper H from connector X302 of the DX6 board.
5. DANGER Use exclusively fully insulated measuring wires.
Connect the digital multimeter with the measuring wires to test points MA-
(X5-) and MA+ (X4+) at connector X302 of board DX6 an.
6. On the digital multimeter, select the current measuring range 20mA
DC.
7. ATTENTION! If the "front tube assembly" cover is not attached, the

D ring circulation is impeded and the unit can be damaged.
Temporarily install the "front tube assembly" cover E on the unit using the
screw D.
Performing measurements 8. DANGER Do not touch live components!

Set the main switch (A) to I (see also Operating Instructions).
9. Wait for approx. 1 minute.
10. Press the R key.
The unit moves to its starting position.
11. Select the P1 program (see Operating Instructions).
12. Set the highest kV/mA level, 66 kV / 8 mA (see Operating Instructions).
13. Make the SIDEXIS XG ready for 2D exposure (see Operating Instruc-
tions).
14. CAUTION! Activating the release button triggers X-rays.

Start the exposure by pressing the release button. Hold down the release
button until image acquisition is completed and the acoustic signal that in-
dicates the end of the exposure can be heard.
i NOTE
1 mA corresponds to a tube current of 1 mA. The permissible tolerance is ± 20
%.
7.8
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 17
Analyzing measurements 15. Read the voltage value on the display of the multimeter.
– The tube current must be in the range of 8 mA ± 1.6 mA
– If the measured value does not fall within the permissible tolerance, re-
place the tube assembly.
– If the measured value falls within the permissible tolerance, conclude
the measurement.
Concluding the measurement 16. Switch the unit off via switch A (see Operating Instructions).
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 18 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
7.8.3 Fan and temperature
Check whether the fan is functioning Check the function of the fan using service routine S005.4
båÖäáëÜ
(see Page 5-35)
If the fan is defective:

Replace the fan (see Page 6-53)
Check whether the temperature sensor Read the temperature in the single tank via service routine S005.5
is supplying plausible values (see page 5-37)
If the displayed temperature reading is not plausible:

Replace the tube assembly (see page 6-48)
7.8
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 19
7.9 Checking the diaphragm Tab 7
7.9 Checking the diaphragm

(only for XG 3 / 3 PPE)

(REF 6371707)
Check the fixed diaphragm for completeness.

Then release the diaphragm test exposures
(see from page 7-21).
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 20 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 7 7.9 Checking the diaphragm
7.9.2 Diaphragm test exposures

The diaphragm test exposures are used for a quick check of the system
båÖäáëÜ
adjustment. The TEST EXPOSURE menu is started without a service pass-
word. Diaphragm test exposures can thus be performed by the user as well.
Menu: Test exposure
The TEST EXPOSURE menu is started from SIDEXIS XG:

UTILITIES CONSTANCY TEST XCXP SELECT X-RAY DEVICE SER-
VICE EXPOSURE DIAPHRAGM TEST EXPOSURE
i NOTE
When you open the TEST EXPOSURE menu, the unit switches from the user
mode to the PC service mode logged by the PC.
In the PC service mode, the control options that are available on the Easypad
eral control of the unit (as in the user mode) is not possible in this mode.
By clicking the corresponding tab with the mouse, you can switch between the
PAN DIAPHRAGM, PAN SYMMETRY, CEPH FIXED POINT OF ROTATION, and
TSA SENSOR menus. To quit the TEST EXPOSURE menu, click CANCEL.
i NOTE
The Ceph - Fixed point of rotation and TSA - Sensor tabs are not present in the
XG 3 / 3 PPE system version.
7.9
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 21
7.9.3 Pan diaphragm test exposure
Menu: Test exposure Pan - Diaphragm
i NOTE
The exposure is performed without a needle phantom.
OPENING pan diaphragm 1. Select the PAN - DIAPHRAGM submenu.

59 38 399 D3352
7 – 22 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
appears in SIDEXIS.
båÖäáëÜ
1 - 60 kV / 3 mA + S30
2 0.20 s 2
60/3____0.20____
1 2 3
– Press the R key to move the unit back to the starting position.
R For XGPlus / 3Dready:
UNTIL UNIT IS IN STARTING POSITION For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
dialog box.
7.9
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 23
A B

i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the pan diaphragm must be adjusted
(see chapter 4)
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 24 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
7.9.4 Pan symmetry test exposure
båÖäáëÜ
Menu: Test exposure Pan - Symmetry
Preparations Insert the needle phantom in the bite block holder of the panoramic X-ray
CAUTION
It is essential that the needle phantom is removed from the bite block holder of
the panoramic X-ray unit again before a Ceph exposure is taken; otherwise the
phantom may collide with the sensor.
OPENING pan - symmetry 1. Select the PAN SYMMETRY submenu.

7.9
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 25
appears in SIDEXIS.
1 - 60 kV / 3 mA + S10
2 14.1 s 2
60/3____14.1____
1 2 3


UNTIL UNIT IS IN STARTING POSITION For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 26 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
båÖäáëÜ
A ZOOM: 1:1 B
± 0.75 mm ± 0.75 mm
A1 = 88.6 mm ± 1 mm
A2 A2
A2 = 44.3 ± 0.5 mm A2 = 44.3 ± 0.5 mm
S2
Adjustment: not OK (length measurement with SIDEXIS)

7.9
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 27
(A).
(B).
i NOTE
If one of these criteria is not fulfilled (C), the pan symmetry must be adjusted
(see chapter 4)
Remove the needle phantom from the bite block holder of the unit.
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 28 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
7.9.5 Ceph - Fixed point of rotation

båÖäáëÜ
Menu: Test exposure Ceph - Fixed point of rotation
CAUTION
OPENING Ceph - Fixed point of rotation 1. Select the CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION submenu.
i NOTE
The QUICKSHOT check box must not be selected.

7.9
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 29
appears in SIDEXIS.
1 - 80 kV / 14 mA + S10
2 0.60 s 5
80/14___0.60____
1 2 3

UNTIL UNIT IS IN STARTING POSITION For XG 5:
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 30 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
båÖäáëÜ
A B

i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the ceph fixed point of rotation must be ad-
justed (see chapter 4).
7.9
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 31
7.9.6 Quickshot test exposure

(only for XGPlus full version/ 3Dready)
Menu: Test exposure Ceph - Quickshot
CAUTION
OPENING Ceph - Fixed point of rotation 1. Select the CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION submenu.
OPENING quickshot 2. Activate the QUICKSHOT check box.
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 32 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016

båÖäáëÜ
appears in SIDEXIS.
1 - 80 kV / 14 mA + S10
2 0.30 s 8

R The procedure is completed when the status message "ORTHOPHOS is
WAIT!
dialog box.
7.9
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 33
A B

lines (A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the ceph quickshot must be adjusted (see
chapter 4).
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 34 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
7.9.7 TSA sensor

(only for XGPlus and full version)
båÖäáëÜ
Menu: Test exposure TSA sensor
i NOTE
The exposure is performed without a needle phantom.
OPENING TSA sensor 1. Select the TSA SENSOR submenu.

7.9
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 35
appears in SIDEXIS.
1 - 60 kV / 3 mA + S30
2 0.20 s 4
R The procedure is completed when the status message "ORTHOPHOS is
WAIT!
dialog box.
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 36 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
båÖäáëÜ
A B

image field (A).
i NOTE
If these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the TSA sensor must be adjusted (see
chapter 4).
7.9
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 37
7.10 Checking the cables for damage Tab 7
7.10 Checking the cables for damage

Check whether the cables feeding the Perform a visual check of the power cable, protective ground wire, control
unit are OK cables and data cables.
If cables are externally damaged:

Replace the respective cables (see Page 6-101)
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 38 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 7 7.11 Checking the idling rollers
7.11 Checking the idling rollers
båÖäáëÜ
B
Idling roller
Check whether the idling rollers are OK Rotate ring B by hand and check it for smooth and easy running.
If the ring does not run smoothly and easily:

Remove the covers and check the idle rollers for dirt and foreign par-
ticles. Clean and remove foreign particles if necessary.
7.11
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 39
7.12 Checking the grounding straps Tab 7
7.12 Checking the grounding straps
Check whether the grounding straps Perform a visual and "hands-on" inspection of the grounding straps to en-
have complete and firm contact sure that they have complete and firm contact at the positions marked.
If the grounding straps do not have proper contact:

Fasten them properly
If the grounding straps are damaged:

Replace the grounding straps
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 40 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 7 7.13 Checking the cable shields
7.13 Checking the cable shields
båÖäáëÜ
Shield on the tube assembly
Shield on housing DX32
Check whether the cable shielding is Perform a visual and "hands-on" inspection of the cable shields to ensure
OK that they have complete and firm contact at the positions marked.
If the cable shields do not have proper contact:

Fasten them properly
7.13
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 41
7.14 Checking the protective ground wires Tab 7
7.14 Checking the protective ground wires
DANGER
Shock hazard! It is essential that you switch the X-ray unit OFF before
replacing any components!
Switch OFF the line voltage at the main switch of the building installation.
Disconnect the power cable and the second protective ground wire from
the building installation.
Remove the following cover parts (see section 1.13):
– Profile cover (10)
– Tube assembly cover, front (65)
– Tube assembly cover, rear (70)
Measuring setup for protective ground wire test
A ~ A
Measuring point
Ammeter Power source central ground wire
Voltmeter
V
Measuring points B-E
B
C
D
E
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 42 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 7 7.14 Checking the protective ground wires
Check whether the protective ground A power source with a current of at least 0.2 A and a no-load voltage of 24
wire resistance complies with the speci- V max. and 4 V min. is required.
fications Connect the power source between the measuring points specified in the
båÖäáëÜ
table for at least 5s and measure:
– the voltage drop with the voltmeter
Protective ground wire test
between... – the current with the ammeter and
– calculate the resistance using the formula R = U / I
A and B GNYE wire 0.1Ω
A and C 2nd protective 0.1Ω
ground wire
A and D Housing DX32 0.2Ω
Measuring point A: central ground wire
A
7.14
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 43
7.14 Checking the protective ground wires Tab 7
Measuring points B and C: GNYE power connection and 2nd Protective

earth conductor
B B C B C
A
PE
Power cable
protective earth conductor
protective earth conductor

ORTHOPHOS XG
Second protective ground wire
to the Orthophos XG
to the Orthophos XG
Power cable
Power cable
Second
Second
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 44 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 7 7.14 Checking the protective ground wires
Measuring points D and E: Board cage DX32 and tube assembly hous-
ing
båÖäáëÜ
E
Board
cage
DX32
D Tube assembly
i NOTE
If the resistance exceeds the value specified in the adjacent table, check
whether the protective ground wire is fastened according to specifications:
– Check whether the flat washer, toothed lock washer and cable lug are
fitted on the protective ground wire in the right order (see page 7-43)
and whether the nuts of the ground wire connections are tightened securely.
If the ground wire is not fastened according to specifications, fasten the

ground wire properly (see page 7-43).
Do not connect the power cable and the second ground wire to the build-
ing installation yet, but perform a measurement of the device leakage
current first (see section 7.15).
7.14
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 45
7.15 Checking the unit leakage current Tab 7
7.15 Checking the unit leakage current
DANGER
Perlious shock hazard!
It is essential to switch the unit off and to wait at least one more 1 minute
before beginning the check!
Prevent the device from unintentionally switching back on.
WARNING
Important information on building installation
The connection and disconnection of the unit (power cable) to/from the build-
ing installation must be performed by a qualified expert in compliance with the
national regulations. DIN VDE 0100-710 applies in Germany.
For measurements, Sirona recommends an automatic tester (example illus-

Automatic tester in accordance with IEC 62353
tration) which complies with standard IEC 62353. If you do not use an auto-
matic tester, please pay attention to the specifications in the standard IEC
62353.
1. Switch the line voltage off at the main switch of the building installation.
2. DANGER Note the electrical safety rules without fail.
Disconnect the power cable and the second protective ground wire from
the building installation.
3. Attach a connector compatible with the tester (see the user’s manual for
the tester) to the unit’s power cable.
4. Plug the connector of your power supply unit into the intended socket on
the tester in accordance with the user’s manual for the tester.
5. Check whether the unit power switch is turned on.
CAUTION
According to Note 2 at Table 3 of standard IEC 62353:2014, the maximum de-
vice leakage current permitted by the manufacturer is 5 mA for permanently
connected units.
6. Perform the measurements according to the operating instructions of the

tester.
7. Document the measured value of the leakage current in the technical doc-
ument "Inspections, maintenance, and safety-related checks"
(REF 59 87 685), to identify changes from the original value.
– A maximum deviation of ±20% from the original value is permitted for
the measured leakage current.
8. If a deviation from the original value is >±20%:
Perform troubleshooting according to chapter “Unit leakage current too
high” (see service manual for the unit).
9. Reconnect the unit to the building installation (fixed connection) (see the
installation instructions for the unit).
59 38 399 D3352
7 – 46 D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Tab 7 7.15 Checking the unit leakage current
båÖäáëÜ
7.15
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016 7 – 47
Service manual history D3352
Version 1: Software version V02.17, ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / Ceph and not all errors and service rou-
tines are described.
Version 2: Software version V02.18.1 (XG 5) and V02.19 (XGPlus), device version XG 5,
complete revision.
Version 3: Software version V02.20, Service-Routine S034.7,
Error messages added, chapter update added, additional general revision
Version 4: Software version V02.22, TSA, service routines S017.12/13/14 and S020,
chapter update added, additional general revision
Version 5: Software version V02.24, device version XG 3, Ceph arm,
Service routines S017.15 and S021.3, chapter update added,
additional general revision
Version 6: Software version V02.25
Version 7: Software version V02.27; new service routines S005.7, S007.5, S012.2/3/4, S017.9
S018.5/6, S032.10 and S033.10, optimized error lists, troubleshooting chapter added
(CAN bus diagnostics, sensor data path), additional general revision
Version 8: Software version V02.28; system hardware version BA, DX41 omitted, new headrest; new
fixed diaphragm; XG 3 PPE "pay per exposure" concept (USA only);
new service routines S014, S015, S017.10, S017.22, and S017.23,
optimized error lists, troubleshooting chapter extended, additional general
revision
Version 9: Software version V02.28.02
Version 12: Chapter 6 "Repair," sections "Replacing the light barriers" and "Replacing the cables in
the drag chains" modified and corrections implemented in Chapter 3 "Troubleshooting".
Version 13: General: Software version V02.32, Chapter 2: Error message E6 61 70 added, Chapter 5:
Service routine S017.17, Chapter 6: Section "Replacing the bend" removed, section
"Measures following replacement of boards" modified.
Version 15: Software version V02.40, occlusal bite block inserted, error messages added, service rou-
tines S017.18, S018.7-10 added, chapter on repair extended, additional general revision
Version 16: Error messages E5 11 06 added, Repairs chapter extended
Version 17: Software version V02.41, chapter on repair extended
Version 18: Software version V02.41.01, pages 5-11
Version 19: Expanded to include ORTHOPHOS XG 3Dready, safety-related check
Version 20: New board DX1/DX11, software version V02.51.02 added
Version 21: Software version V02.51.03 added
Version 22: Software version V02.54 added
Version 23: Software version V02.54.01 and tube assembly 2.0 added
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
Version 24: Software version V02.58.00 added
Version 25: Software versions V02.58.01 added, chapter "Checking the unit leakage current" revised
båÖäáëÜ
Version 26 Section "Functional check" added to the chapter "Operation notes".
Software version V02.58.02 added, general additional revision.
59 38 399 D3352
D3352.076.01.26.02 09.2016
tÉ=êÉëÉêîÉ=íÜÉ=êáÖÜí=íç=ã~âÉ=~åó=~äíÉê~íáçåë=ïÜáÅÜ=ã~ó=ÄÉ=êÉèìáêÉÇ=ÇìÉ=íç=íÉÅÜåáÅ~ä=áãéêçîÉãÉåíëK
«=páêçå~=aÉåí~ä=póëíÉãë=dãÄe=OMMQ péê~ÅÜÉW=ÉåÖäáëÅÜ= mêáåíÉÇ=áå=dÉêã~åó

aPPROKMTSKMNKOSKMO===MVKOMNS ûKJkêKW= NON=RRP fãéêáã¨=Éå=^ääÉã~ÖåÉ
páêçå~=aÉåí~ä=póëíÉãë=dãÄe=
áå=íÜÉ=rp^W
c~Äêáâëíê~≈É=PN páêçå~=aÉåí~ä=póëíÉãë=ii`
aJSQSOR=_ÉåëÜÉáã QUPR=páêçå~=aêáîÉI=pìáíÉ=NMM lêÇÉê=kç RV=PU=PVV=aPPRO
dÉêã~åó `Ü~êäçííÉI=k`=OUOTP
ïïïKëáêçå~KÇÉ rp^

Sirona Orthophos XG3, XG5 Dental X-Ray - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Sirona Orthophos XG3, XG5 Dental X-Ray - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sirona Orthophos XG3, XG5 Dental X-Ray - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

loqelmelp=ud=PaêÉ~Çó=L=`ÉéÜ

ORTHOPHOS XG 3Dready / XGPlus

In addition, you also require:

• Wiring diagrams: Order No. 59 38 332

1 General information ..................................................................... 1-5

2 Messages .................................................................................... 2-3

3 Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 3-3

4 Adjustment ................................................................................... 4-3

5 Service routines ......................................................................... 5-11

6 Repair .......................................................................................... 6-5

7 Maintenance ................................................................................ 7-3

1.12 Illustrations of boards ............................................1 – 54

1.2 Device classes XGPlus / 3Dready and XG 5 / 3 / 3

1.2.1 Overview of the ORTHOPHOS XG system

Basic class (Multipad, basic equipment, remote release optional)

with ceph arm on left side ORTHOPHOS XG 5

ORTHOPHOS XG 3 ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE

1.3 Operation notes

Remote control The system can be equipped with...

Turn-off time The turn-off time must amount to at least 60 s.

Reattach the covers.

A pulse/pause ratio of 1:20 is better for the X-ray tube.

Replacing parts Switch off the unit before replacing parts.

1.4 Demo mode – Operation without radiation

DX6 tube assembly 1.0 DX6 tube assembly 2.0 S2

1.4.1 Switching the demo mode ON

1. Remove the cover of the tube assembly.

1.4.2 Switching the demo mode OFF

1. Remove the cover of the tube assembly.

1.5 Demo mode –

Cephalometer Start service routine S034, test step 6.

1.6 List of software versions

1.6.1 ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE

Sidexis XG Note Database

V 01.54 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE

requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE

V 2.3 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE

Remote control Note

V 01.53 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3

V 01.61 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 overall software New database

requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 overall software

V 2.5.6 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE

1.6.3 ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / Ceph

Overall software compatible with

Sidexis XG Note Database

V 01.45 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 5 overall

V 2.2 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 5 overall

1.6.4 ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / Ceph

Overall software compatible with SIDEXIS

Remote control Note

V 01.45 requires ORTHOPHOS XGPlus

V 01.53 requires ORTHOPHOS XGPlus overall soft-

V 01.61 requires ORTHOPHOS XGPlus overall soft- New database

V 2.2 requires ORTHOPHOS XGPlus overall soft-

1.6.5 ORTHOPHOS XG 3Dready /Ceph

Remote control Note

Sidexis XG Note Database

V 2.5.6 requires overall software version V02.41.01

Motors M1, M2 Linear movement of headrest